bid volume -ii sec vii ted-151

BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150 1

SPECIFICATIONS

Supply of material and Erection, testing and commissioning of new 11 kV lines, New DTs, LT lines for release of BPL beneficiary connections under Rajiv Gandhi Grameen Vidyutikaran Yojana (RGGVY) on turnkey basis in Faridabad District under the jurisdiction of DHBVN.

VOLUME – II

SECTION – VII

BID NO. P&D/TED –151/2012

DAKSHIN HARYANA BIJLI VITRAN NIGAM

HISAR

Jan -2012


INDEX

VOLUME – II

SECTION DESCRIPTION PAGE NO.

VII A, B & C

Technical

Specifications

VII D

Drawings


SECTION VII-A 1. Introduction

The scope of this specification covers construction of new 11 kV lines, New

DTs, LT lines for release of BPL beneficiary connections under Rajiv Gandhi

Grameen Vidyutikaran Yojana (RGGVY) on turnkey basis in Faridabad

District under the jurisdiction of DHBVN.

1.1 Scope :

The scope of work shall include complete engineering of the Lines as per design, given in the tender documents, manufacture, testing and supply of all the required material on FOR destination/Site basis including transportation, insurance, storage, erection, dismantlement of HT/LT line and other equipment as per site requirement, testing and commissioning of 11 kV lines, New DTs, LT lines for release of BPL beneficiary connections under Rajiv Gandhi Grameen Vidyutikaran Yojana (RGGVY) on turnkey basis in Faridabad District funded by REC under the jurisdiction of DHBVN on turnkey basis. The supply items shall include 9/11 meter long PCC Poles, Base Plates, ACSR conductor, HT XLPE AB cable, 11 kV Disc Insulators with required fittings, 11 kV Pin Insulators with Pins, Single Tension fittings, Stay rods with Elbow, Stay Wires, Earthing rods, Pipe earthing GI wire, LAs, G.O. Switches, PG Clamps, MS Angle iron, MS channel iron, MS Flat including fabrication of Clamps, Suspension clamp, Dead end clamp, 25/16 KVA Three phase distribution T/F ( Only from DHBVN empanelled firms from P&D wing),LT cables, Energy meters ( Only from DHBVN empanelled firms from MM wing), MCB for energy meters, Insulated conductor, Number plate, Danger plate, Phase plate, Drilling, Cutting providing muffing in marshy land and other items as per Schedule of prices. All the other material / job not specifically mentioned but required to complete the work shall also be in the scope of the contractor. The conductor requiring dismantlement shall be dismantled Section wise i.e. from dead end pole to next dead end pole. Shorter lengths of dismantled ACSR without any valid technical reason shall not be accepted. The contractor will complete all the required work under the scope.

In addition to the above Load losses at 50% and 100% load of all the transformers received by the Nigam against turnkey works shall be checked at Nigam’s works by a committee of three officers, one each from OP. Wing, M&P Wing and TRW Workshop. Out of 100 No. T/Fs supplied by the contractor against individual tender enquiry, one T/F shall be opened at Nigam’s workshop for physical verification of the quality of material used by the manufacturer. This shall be done by the same committee of three officers as mentioned above and lot size of each capacity (in nos.) as provided in the supply order, the entire type test shall be conducted from NABL Lab on 1nos. T/F up to 200 nos. T/F supply order, 2nos. T/F from 201 to 400 nos. T/F supply order, 3 nos. T/F from 401 to 600 nos. T/F supply order and 4nos. T/F


from 600 nos. & above T/F supply order. For the release of BPL connections , the contractor will obtain the list of the BPL connections from the SDO/Op concerned .The contractor will complete all the required work under the scope (All the meters shall be got tested and sealed by the contractor from the DHBVN labs, at their own cost, before their erection at site). The contractor will intimate the SDO/Operation regarding when he/they are starting the work for the release of the BPL connections. Under no circumstances will the contractor undertake the work of release of BPL connections without the prior intimation to the Nodal officer and the SDO/Op Concerned and subsequent permission.

NOTE: The contractors will obtain the detailed drawings / sketches of the work involved from the GM/Construction Concerned. The contractor will intimate the XEN/Construction prior to start the work.

1.1.1 This specification also includes the supply of the poles, insulators and their

hardware, conductor, earth wire etc. The bidder shall clearly indicate in his

offer the sources from where he proposes to procure the raw material /

completed material and its components.

1.1.2 Any material not specifically mentioned in the contract but required to

complete the job is deemed to be included in the scope of work of the

Contractor.

1.1.3 The entire stringing work of the conductor and earth wire shall be carried out

by standard practice. The bidder shall indicate in his offer the detailed

description of procedure to be deployed for stringing operation.

1.1.4 Location Details: The line shall be laid in the areas covered under DHBVN in

Haryana.

1.2 Details of Line Route and Terrain: The 11 KV Power Lines will be running almost through plain and cultivated

area. Preliminary route alignment maps of Power lines covered under this

package giving the general topography and major crossings like river, power

lines, railway lines and roads are in the bidder’s scope. Wherever, special

river crossings are involved proper strengthening of the normal pole locations

will be done by the Contractor.


1.3 Access to the Line and Right of Way:

Right of way clearance shall be arranged by employer in accordance with

work schedule. Employer will secure way leave and right of way in the forest

area.

1.4 Detailed Survey of Optimization Pole Location:

1.4.1 The detailed survey for the line route and optimization of the pole location

along with profiling shall be carried out by the successful bidder. The

provisional quantity has been indicated in the Bill of Material for each

package.

1.4.2 (a) The tentative sketches of the lines / works to be carried out are

enclosed with this specification. The detailed survey shall be carried

out by the bidder along the approved alignment. The bidder will

examine the site of works and its surroundings and obtain himself, at

his own responsibility and expenses, all information regarding general

site characteristics, crossings accessibility, infrastructure details etc.

The purchaser will, however, assist the interested bidder to see and

inspect the site of work. For this purpose the bidders are requested to

contact : General Manager, Planning & Design, DHBVN, Vidyut

Sadan, Vidyut Nagar, Hisar or the respective DGM (Operation) /

AGM(OP) of the area as indicated on sketch.

2 Pole & 4 Pole Structure as per site requirements shall be provided

where the situation so demands. Drawings of 2/4 Pole Structure is

provided for guidance.

(b) Additional H Poles required for Pole Mounting Sub-Station under the

existing 11 KV feeders are to be taken care of by the Bidder as per the

requirement of Operation Organization.

1.4.3 The bidder should note that the Employer will not furnish the topographical

map prepared by survey of India but will make available any assistance that

may be required for obtaining topographical map.


1.4.4 Route Marking :

At the starting point of the commencement of route survey the peg marking

shall be done with iron spikes, driven firmly into the ground. A Benchmark

on top section of the angle iron shall be made to indicate the location of the

survey instrument. Teakwood peg shall be driven at prominent Position at

intervals of not more than 750 meters along the Power line to be surveyed up

to the next angle point. At angle position stone / concrete pillar with DHBVN

marked on it shall be put firmly on the ground for easy identification.

1.4.5 Pole Locations :

With the help of pole spotting data, pole locations shall be marked on the

profiles prepared to check the required ground clearances. While locating the

poles on the profile sheets the following shall be borne in the mind.

a) Extension:

An individual span shall be as near to the normal design span as possible. In

case an individual span becomes too short or long with normal supports on

account of ground profile, one or both supports of the spans may be extended

with standard design or provision of a special structure for the purpose

according to technical specifications. The design of such extension shall be

prepared & supplied by the Contractor and shall be got approved from the

Employer.

b) Road Crossings :

At all the important road crossings, the protective cradle guarding will be

provided and poles shall be fitted with normal tension insulators strings

depending upon the location but the ground clearing at the roads at the

maximum temperature and in the still air shall be such that even with the

conductor broken at adjacent span, the ground clearance of the conductor from

the road surface will not be less than 5.125 meter. For road and lines

crossings 11 meter PCC poles (400 Kg.) shall be provided to achieve required

clearances. H pole structure on 11 meter PCC poles for road crossings and

single 11 meter PCC poles for line crossing shall be provided.

c) Railway Crossings :

The Contractor will make preliminary survey to assess the requirement of

Railway Crossing and take the same into account in his Bid. The work of


Railway Crossings will be got executed by him as a deposit work with the

Railways or otherwise as per rules of Railway Department. The Employer

will arrange to get the approval from Railway Authorities expedited. The case

for approval will be submitted by the Contractor on the behalf of the Employer

well in time.

d) Power Line Crossings :

Wherever the line is to cross over / below the other line of the same voltage or

higher or low voltage the requisite clearances will be ensured in accordance

with the Indian Electricity Rules. The Contractor shall submit and get

approved from the Employer any special design where required in order to

achieve such clearances.

e) River Crossing:

The route of 11 KV New / Augmented line/LT line if routed through a river

bed / mullah or rivulet must have concrete foundation for erection of poles and

must be supported by a good number of stay-supports capable to withstand

water / wind pressure and must be executed to the entire satisfaction of the

Engineer.

f) In case the 11 KV U/G cable is to be laid along the Municipal Road / High

way, the Contractor will make preliminary survey to assess such requirement

and take into account in his Bid. The employer will arrange to get the

approval from the Civic Authorities. However, the case for approval will be

submitted by the Contractor on behalf of the employer well in time.

1.4.6 Clearance from Ground, Building, Trees etc.:

Clearance from Ground, Building, Trees and Telephone lines shall be

provided in conformity with the Indian Electricity Rules 1956.

1.4.7 The tree cutting shall be the responsibility of the Contractor at the time of

survey as well as during actual execution. However, the Contractor shall

count, mark and put proper Nos. with suitable quality of paint at his own cost

on all the trees that are to be cut by him at the time of actual execution of

work. Contractor may please be note that the Employer shall not pay any

compensation for any loss or damage to the properties or for tree cutting

necessitated due to Contractor’s work.

1.4.8 Any way leave which may be required by the Contractor shall be arranged by

the Employer.


1.4.9 To evaluate and tabulate the trees and bushes coming 6.096m on either side of

the central alignment of the support, the trees will be numbered and marked

with quality paint serially from angle point 1 onwards and corresponding

number will be painted on the stem of trees at a height of 1m from ground

level. The trees list should contain the following information:

a) Girth (circumference) measured at a height of 1 m from ground level.

b) Approximate height of the tree with an accuracy of +/- 2 mtrs.

c) Name of the type of the species / tree.

1.4.10 The profile sheets duly spotted along with preliminary schedule indicating

position of poles, wind span, weight span, angle of deviation, river or road

crossings and other details shall be submitted for the approval of the

Employer. After approval the, Contractor shall submit six more sets of

approved reports along with one set of reproducible final profile drawings to

the Employer for record purpose.

1.5 Environmental Conditions :

1.6.1 General Climatic Conditions :

The area is in extreme climatic belt. Monsoons are generally active in the area

from the month of July to September. The area is also prone to mild dust

storms during the months of March to May. The maximum temperature shall

be of the order of 50°C and minimum temperature shall be of the order of -

2°C. Normal every day temperature is 32°C.

1.7 Technical Data:

The bidder shall furnish all technical data as per relevant schedules in five

copies.

1.8 Statutory Regulations and Standards :

1.8.1 Statutory Regulations:

The Contractor is required to follow Statutory Regulations stipulated in

Electricity Act 1948 and Indian Electricity Rules 1956 as amended to-date and

other local rules and regulations referred to in this specification.

1.8.2 Reference Standards :

The work shall be carried out in accordance with specifications & construction

standards attached hereto or available with the P&D wing of


DHBVN/Nigam’s Website. The codes or standards referred to in this

specification shall govern in all cases wherever such references are made. In

case of conflict between such codes or standards and specification, latter shall

govern. Such codes or standards referred to shall mean the latest revision,

amendments / changes adopted and published by relevant agencies. Other

internationally accepted standards, which ensure equivalent or better

performance than those specified shall also be accepted. All tested steel

sections shall be supplied conforming to relevant Indian Standard

Specifications.

1.9 Quality Assurance, Inspection and Testing :

1.9.1 Quality Assurance :

The Contractor shall adopt suitable quality assurance programme to control

each activity. Such programme shall be outlined by the Contractor and shall

be finally accepted by the Employer.

1.9.2 Quality Assurance Document :

The Contractor shall be required to sub it all quality assurance documents as

stipulated in quality plan at the time of Employer’s inspection of material.

The Employer through his duly authorized representative reserves the right to

carry out quality inspection / audit & checks to see the adequacy of the

Contractor’s quality management programme.

1.9.3 Inspection and Testing :

The Employer shall inspect the major material i.e. Poles, Conductors, Earth

wire, Insulators, Pins, Hardware fittings at the works of supplier before

dispatch. The requisite original type test certificates wherever required will be

submitted by the Contractor / Supplier at the time of inspection for verification

/ examination by the Inspector. The material shall not be dispatched without

dispatch authorization by the Employer. Other material shall be inspected by

the Employer before erection at site. The Employer shall have the right to re-

inspect at his expenses any material through previously inspection and

approved by him at the Contractor’s / Supplier’s works, before / after the same

are erected at the site. If following the latter, the material is found defective,

then the Contractor shall bear the cost of this inspection and re-instatement

according to specifications. The Employer shall get the material inspected

from his Engineers or from any other inspection agency at its discretion.


2.0 Technical Parameters of 11 KV Line : Electrical System Data :

a) Nominal Voltage 11 KV

b) Maximum system voltage 12 KV

c) NIL (Impulse) 75 KV (Peak)

d) Power frequency withstand voltage 28 KV

3. Details of line material for 11 KV Line: 3.1 Particulars of Conductor: Sr. No.

Particulars Conductor

1 Type ACSR 50 mm2 2 Standing and wire diameter in mm 6/3.35(AI)

1/1.35(Steel)6/4.09(AI) 1/ 4.09 (steel)

3 Approximate Mass Kg. Per KM. 214/319 4 Approximate calculated breaking load KN 18.25/26.91 5 Calculated DC resistance at 20o 0.5560 Ohm/0.3736 Ohm C 6 Mass of Zine coating 190 gm.m2 7 Configuration of Conductor Triangular 3.2 Particular of Polymeric Insulator / Disc Insulators: Sr.No. Particulars I-Pole Str. II-Pole Str. 4-Pole Str. 1 No. of Disc Insulators - - - 2 E&M Strength of each Disc

Insulator KN 45 45 45

3 11 KV Polymeric Insulator 3 6 9 3.3 Material for Single / H-Pole/4 Pole Structure 1 PCC Pole 9 Mtr. 1 No. 2 No. 4 No. 2 FRP Cross Arm 1 No. - - 3 M.S.Channel X-Arm (100x50x6-

2200mm) - 1 No. 5 Nos.

4 Pole Top Bracket 1 No. - - 5 Back Clamps 1 No. As required As required 6 11 KV Polymeric Insulator 3 Nos. 6 Nos. 9 Nos. 7 11 KV Disc Insulators - 6 Nos. 6 Nos. 8 Guy Sets with stay wire As required 4 Nos. 8 Nos. 9 Earthing material as per design As required As required As required 10 Nuts & Bolts, Pole Clamps As per design As per design As per design 11 MS Flat, 50x50x6mm, 2200mm for

4-Pole &1400mm for H-Pole - 2 Nos. -

12 MS Bracing 50x50x6mm, 3230mm for 4-Pole &2860mm for H-Pole

- 2 Nos. 8 Nos.

13 Tension fittings suitable for 30 - 6 Nos. 8 Nos.


sq.mm conductor 14 C-type wedge connector for 50

sq.mm conductor - 6 Nos. 6 Nos.

15 Eye Screw bolts for earth wire 6 Nos 16 M.S.Angle 50x50x6mm (2400mm)

for earth wire. - - 4 Nos.

17 Danger Plate - - 2 Nos. 18 Number Plate 1 No. 1 No. 1 No. 3.4 Tentative Bill of material for each Package is as per Annexure/Schedule of

Prices.

3.5 Meteorological Data is as per Annexure-II.

4. Bolts , Nuts &Washers :

4.1 All Bolts and Nuts shall conform to IS:1363-1967 (amended to-date) or

equivalent to IES Standard. All Bolts and Nuts shall have Hexagonal head

Nuts, the heads being forged out of the solid steel rods and shall be truly pen

centric and square with the shank, which must be perfectly straight. Small

Nuts & Bolts both shall be fully threaded whereas long bolts shall be partially

threaded.

4.2 Steel Items : All steel items shall be conform to IS:2062 Grade-A (amended

to date) or equivalent to IEC Standard.

5. Spares and Clearances:

5.1 Normal Span :

The normal running span of the line shall be approx. 60 Mtrs. For 11 KV Line

with ACSR and 40 Mtrs. With AB Cable and 60 Mtr. of LT line in the Cross

Country.

5.2 Wind Span :

The wind Span is the sum of two half spans adjacent to the support under

consideration. For normal horizontal spans this equals to normal running

span.

5.3 Electrical Clearances:

5.3.1 Ground Clearances:

The minimum ground clearances from the bottom conductor shall not be less

than 5.125 meter at the maximum sag conditions i.e. at maximum

temperature and still air.

Any LT/HT/Telecommunication line falling around of new 11 KV line should

have enough clearances as prescribed in I.E. rules applicable in this respect.


5.3.2 For river crossing, the minimum electrical clearance including ground

clearance will be the same as for normal poles.

5.4 Conductor and Earth Wire Configuration:

The three phases shall be in triangular formation. The phase to phase spacing

shall not be less than 1.070 Mtr.

6. Drawings:

6.1 The design and drawings submitted by the Contractor shall be

approved/commented by the Employer as the case may be within 20 days of

receipt of design/drawings in the office of the Engineer. If the

design/drawings are commented by the Employer, the Contractor shall submit

revised design/drawings within 15 days of date of issue of comments. The

drawing will also be submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer who will

take further necessary action to approve the same or get it approved from the

competent authority.

6.2 The Contractor is required to furnish the progress of submissions and

approvals of design and drawings on 25th day of every month till the

completion of all the design activities.

7. Excavation & Erection of Poles:

7.1 The Pits for the Poles are to be excavated in the direction of the line, as this

will facilitate the erection of pole and given internal stability. The depth of the

foundations to be excavated for the poles shall be approximately 1/6th

7.2 H Poles are to be erected on almost 10

of the

Pole’s length. The alignment of the Poles are to be set right and the earth-

filling will be done after checking the alignment vertically and earth will be

rammed afterwards properly. th location when the line is going

straight and it is also to be provided wherever there is an angle of deviation in

the line. When the angle of deviation is >60°C, 4 pole structures will be

provided. In case of angle H-Pole, the pits are to be excavated along the bi-

section of the angle of deviation. It will be ensured that the poles are held in

vertical position and earth is filled in the pits and proper ramming is done so

that pole remains in proper position. On every H-Pole, 4 stays are to be

provided along the line i.e. 2 on each direction and in addition two more stays

along the bi-section of the angle of deviation are to be provided as required


depending upon the site conditions as per the drawings attached with the

specifications.

7.3 The stays will be provided at all dead end locations, angle locations and T-Off

points and also on normal locations as wind stays to counter the pressure of

the winds. Normally every fourth pole of the line shall be provided with two

wind stays one on either side of the pole. The angle of the stays will be

generally kept on 30 to 45 degrees depending upon the tension and the

location of the line. Every stay shall be provided with 11 KV Disc Insulators

as per drawing.

7.4 Earthing shall be provided on every 4th

7.5 Number plate shall be provided on each location indicating the No. of

Structure S1, S2 etc. 2 pole and 4 pole structures will be numbered both for

structure Nos. as well as H-Pole /4-pole marking. For example if Ist H-pole

appear at Structure No. 10, plate will be denoted as S-10/H-1. Similarly, if Ist

4-pole appear at structure No. 25, the same will be denoted by S-25/4P-1 & so

on.

pole as per the design attached hereto

in addition to the continuous Earth Wire. H-pole structures will be provided

with 2 No. earthings.

7.6 All unpainted /Un-galvanized iron sections like Channel, Angle/Clamps Stay

sets etc. shall be given 2 coating of Red Oxide before installation to prevent

rusting. To avoid rusting anti-corrosion aluminium paint shall also be

provided.

7.7 One set of 11 KV lightning arrestor shall be provided within 3 KM area. 11

KV G.O. Switch shall be provided on the terminal structure near the grid

S/Station & at the interconnection point with existing feeder to facilitate the

complete isolation of the line.

8. Handling of Conductor and Earth Wire:

8.1 The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for any damage to the poles,

insulators and conductors during transportation & stringing. While running

out the conductors, care shall be taken that the conductors do not touch or rub

against the ground or objects, which could cause scratches or damages to the

strands. The conductors shall be run out of the drums from the top in order to

avoid damage due to chaffing.


8.2 The stringing blocks shall be suspended in a manner to suit the design of the X

arms. Proper T&P shall also be made available to the Employer by the

Contractor for checking the tensions in the guy wires. The drums shall be

provided with a suitable braking device to avoid damages, loose running out

and kinking of the conductor. The conductor shall be continuously observed

for loose or broken strands or any other damage. When approaching end of a

drum length atleast three coils shall be left when the stringing operations are to

be stopped. These coils are to be removed carefully and if another length is

required to be run, a joint shall be made as per the recommendations of the

manufacturers.

8.3 Repairs to Conductors if necessary shall be carried out during the running out

operations with repair sleeves. Repairing of Conductors surface shall be done

only in case of minor damage scuff marks etc. keeping in view both electrical

and mechanical safe requirements. The final conductors shall be cleaned

smooth and without any projections, sharp points cuts, abrasions.

8.4 Conductors Splices shall be made so that they do not crack or get damaged in

the stringing operations. The Contractor shall use only such

equipment/methods during Conductor stringing which ensures complete

compliance in this regard.

8.5 Derricks shall be used where roads, rivers, channels, telecommunications or

overhead power line, railway lines, fences or walls have to be crossed during

stringing operations. It shall be seen that normal services are not interrupted

or damage caused to property. Shut down shall be obtained when working at

crossing of overhead power lines as per para 8.8. Contractor shall be

responsible for proper handling of the Conductor. Earth wire and accessories

in the field.

8.6 The sequence of stringing of Conductors/Earth wire shall be from top to

downwards i.e. conductors will be run out in succession & earth wire will be

strung in the last.

8.7 The proposed 11 KV power lines may run parallel for certain distance with the

existing power lines, which may remain energized during the stringing period.

As a result there is a possibility of dangerous voltage build up due to

electromagnetic and electrostatic coupling in the pulling wire, conductors and

earth wires which although comparatively small during normal operations can


be severe during switching. It shall be Contractor’s responsibility to take

adequate safely precautions to protect his employees and others from this

potential danger.

8.8 The Contractor shall inform the Engineer whenever he wants to avail the

‘Permit to Work’ from the local sub-division for erecting the new 11 KV line

or augmenting the existing 11 KV line. A minimum 48 hours advance notice

in writing for availing the shutdown on any live 11 KV feeder/LT lines shall

be given to the Engineer. The 11 KV LT line on which permit is takenshould

be made clear from all the temporary earth, men and material before

cancellation of the ‘Permit to Work’. It is worth mentioning here that the

‘Permit to Work’ on existing line shall be arranged through the Engineer or his

representative and the same shall also be got cancelled through the same

agency only./ No ‘Permit to Work’ shall be issued on any line directly to

Contractor or his staff from any 33 KV or 66 KV Sub-Station.

9. Stringing of Conductor & Earth Wire:

9.1 The stringing of conductor shall be done by standard stringing method.

9.1.1 After being pulled the Conductor/Earth wire shall not be allowed to hang in

the stringing blocks for more than 6 hours before being pulled to the specified

sag.

9.1.1.1 Conductors creep in respect of ACSR 50 mm2 Conductors are to be

compensated by over tensioning the conductor at a temperature of 21°C or

lower during stringing.

9.1.2 The bidder shall give complete details of the stringing method, which he

proposes to follow. Before the commencement of stringing the Contractor

shall submit the stringing charts for the Conductor and Earth wire for various

temperatures and spans along with equivalent spans to the Engineer for the

approval of the Employer.

9.2 Sagging in Operation:

9.2.1 The Conductor shall be pulled up to the desired sag and left in running blocks

for atleast one hours after which the sag shall be re-checked and adjusted if

necessary before transferring the Conductor from the running blocks to the

polymeric insulators. The conductor shall be clamped within 36 hours of

sagging.


9.2.2 The sag will be checked in the first and the last span of the section in case of

sections upto 8 spans and in one intermediate span also for sections with more

than eight Spans. The sag shall also be checked when the Conductor have

been drawn up and transferred from running clocks to the insulators.

9.2.3 The running blocks when suspended from the structures for sagging shall be

so adjusted that the Conductors on running blocks will be on the same height

as a 11 KV Insulators to which it is to be secured.

At sharp vertical angle, the sag and tensions shall be checked on both sides of

the angle, the conductor wire shall be checked from the running blocks for

equality of tension on both sides.

9.2.4 Tensioning and sagging operations shall be carried out in calm weather when

rapid changes in temperature are not likely to occur.

9.3 Tensioning and Sagging of Conductor and Earth Wire:

The Tensioning and Sagging Operations shall be done in accordance with the

approved stringing chart before the Conductor and Earth wire are finally

attached to the poles through the earth wire clamps and insulators for the

Conductor. The relevant stringing charts for the Conductor and earth wire

should be employed for this purpose.

9.4 Final Checking, Testing and Commissioning:

After completion of the works, final checking of the line and equipment shall

be carried out by the Contractor to ensure that all the foundation works, pole

erection and stringing has been done according to the specifications and as

approved by the Employer. All the works shall be thoroughly inspected

keeping in view the following main points:

a) All the structures are straight & erect and in proper alignment. Sufficient

back filed earth is lying over each pit and it is adequately rammed /

compacted.

b) All bolts are properly tightened and punched / tack welded.

c) The stringing of the Conductors and Earth Wire has been done as per the

approved sag and tension charts and desired clearances are clearly

available.

d) All Conductors and Earth wire accessories are properly installed & fixed.

e) All other requirements to complete the work like fixing of danger plate,

phase plate, number plate, barbed wire etc. are properly installed.


f) The insulation of line as a whole is tested by the Contractor by providing

his own equipment, labour etc. to the satisfaction of the Employer.

g) The line is tested satisfactorily for commissioning purpose.

h) Earth resistance of every earth wire & P/M S/Stn. will be measured and

result shall be supplied and same will also be checked by the Engineer or

his representative.

10. General Technical Conditions :

10.1 The above provisions shall supplement all the detailed technical specifications

and requirements brought out herein. The Contractor’s proposal shall be

based on the use of materials complying fully with the requirements specified

herein.

10.2 Engineering Data:

10.2.1 The furnishing of engineering data by the Contractor shall be in accordance

with the schedule as specified in the technical specifications. The review of

these data by the Employer will cover only general conformance of the data to

the specifications and not a thorough review of all dimensions quantities and

details of the materials or items indicated or the accuracy of the information

submitted. The review of the Employer shall not be considered by the

Contractor as limiting any of his responsibilities and liabilities for mistakes

and deviations from the requirements specified under these specifications.

10.2.2 All engineering data submitted by the Contractor after review by the Employer

shall form part of contract document.

If errors are discovered any time during the validity of the contract then the

Contractor shall be responsible for their consequences.

10.2.3 The quantities worked out here are only tentative. The Contractor shall work

out actual requirement and get it approved from the Engineer-in-Charge. The

payment shall be made on actual basis.

I) In case of availability of space, in the Control Room, for the

installation of only one 11 KV breaker panel & more than one

feeder are to be emanated from the concerned sub-station, the 11

KV breaker panel incoming type shall be installed which shall cater

to the requirement of one or more than one outdoor type VCBs

(kiosk). The 11 KV HT supply shall be extended through 11 KV

underground cable.


II) A- Back Filling of Pits

a) All the locations, (with following exceptions), the pits after

erection of poles shall be back filled with excavated or borrowed

earth in layers taking care to ram the earth in one layer at a time to

the satisfaction of site-in-charge.

:

b) For all the failure containment structures, described earlier &

repeated below, the pits shall be hack filled with excavated /

borrowed earth and broken bricks (Jhama) back properly rammed

to the satisfaction of site-in-charge.

i) At some the tapping points & dead end poles

ii) At all the points where DT is to be installed.

iii) At all the points as per REC construction dwg. No. A-10 (

for the diversion angle of 10-60 degree).

iv) At the distance of 1 km max. from the last Jhama filled

pole structure.

v) Both side poles at all the crossing for main road, nallaha

railway crossings etc.

vi) Al DP structures.

Tapping points & roads where the failure containment

structures is to be erected shall be decided during detailed

engineering.

c) The cost of backfilling including all material /borrowed

earth/Jhama etc. is deemed to be included in the quoted price.

The above clauses shall be read in conjunction with

clause given below:

B- Foundation & Pole Erection

a) The foundation of poles shall be of the following types:-

:

i) Foundation back-filled and rammed with excavated soil and

brick batting for 200 Kg. PCC Poles.

ii) Foundation back-filled and rammed with excavated/borrowed

soil.

b) The Type of foundation for individual poles shall be decided

during detailed engineering. The bidder shall quote their rates


as per the quantity of both types of foundations indicated in the

BPS. The pole erection rate shall include excavation in all

types of soil/rock, back-filling of the foundation pole as

specified, cost of all materials, labour etc.

c) Foundation back-filled and rammed with excavated soil and

brick-batting for 200 Kg, PSC poles - The foundation pit of the

pole should be of size 600 mm x 500 mm x depth. The base of

the foundation shall be either of PCC (1:2:4) of size 400 x 400

x 70 mm or a stone plate of size 400 x 400 x 35 mm duly back-

filled as explained in clause above.

d) Foundation back-filled and rammed with excavated / borrowed

soil and brick batting for 200 Kg. PSC Poles. The foundation

pit of the pole should be of size 600 mm x 400 x depth. The

base of the foundation shall be either of PCC (1:2:4) of size 400

x 400 x 70 mm or a stone plate of size 400 x 400 x 35 mm,

duly back-filled as explained in clause above.

e) It is envisaged that 11 KV line may be traversing marshy & low

laying area for which special type of foundation shall be

required. In such a case, difference in excavation quantity,

concreting & reinforcement between special foundation and

normal foundation shall be part of the package.

f) Erection of Poles: The poles are to be erected in alignment

with utmost care. The poles shall then be lifted to the pit with

the help of wooden supports. The pole shall then be kept in the

vertical position with the help of 25 mm (min.) manila ropes

which shall act as the temporary anchor. The verticality of the

pole shall be checked by spirit level in both longitudinal &

transverse directions. Once, this is done, the back filling /

concreting shall be done in the pit. The temporary anchor shall

be removed only when poles set properly in the foundation.

C- Erection of Stay Sets:

The Contractor shall install the stay set complete in all respect. This

includes excavation of pit size 0.5 m x 0.5 m x 1.6 m in all kinds of

soil including laterite/hard rocks. Stay plate and rod (leaving the top


10 cm) shall be embedded in the pit with PCC in the ratio 1:2:4 (the

volume of PCC shall be 0.5 m x 0.5 m x 0.8 m ). The rest (upper half)

of the pit shall be filled with excavated soil duly compacted layer by

layer. An angle between 30 to 45 degrees shall be maintained between

stay wire and the pole. The stay wire shall be used with a stay

insulator at a height of 5 m above ground level with G.I. turn buckle.

Stay set shall be grouted as per drawing No. PGCIL/RE/Stay-Set.

Cl 11.0: 1. For the Drawings/GTPs/Standards which are not included in the above tender

documents, latest REC standards are to be followed.

2. The technical specifications as given in the tender documents are covering a

range of items, in that case only the material as per the schedule of prices is to be

considered


SECTION VII- B


SECTION – VII-B 1. Drawings: 1.1 All drawings submitted by the Contractor including those submitted at the

time of Bid shall be with sufficient detail to indicate the type, size, arrangement, dimensions, material description, Bill of materials, weight of each component, break-u[p for packing and transportation, fixing arrangement required, the dimensions required for installation and any other information specifically requested in these specifications.

1.2 Each drawing submitted by the Contractor shall be clearly marked with the name of the Employer, the specification title, the specification number and the name of the project. All titles, notings, markings and writings on the drawing shall be in English. All the dimensions should be to the scale and in metric units.

1.3 The Contractor shall submit the necessary detailed route plan or other necessary construction drawings for approval to the Employer within 20 days of Letter of Intent.

1.4 The route plan drawings submitted by the Contractor shall be examined by the Employer as far as practicable within 20 days and shall be modified by the Contractor, if any modifications and/or corrections are required by the Employer. The Contractor shall incorporate such modifications and/or corrections and submit the final drawings for approval. Any delays arising out of failure by the Contractor to rectify the drawings in good time shall not alter the contract completion date.

1.5 The drawings submitted for approval to the Employer shall be in quadruplicate. One print of suet drawings shall be returned to the Contractor by the Employer marked “approved/approved with corrections “. The Contractor shall thereupon furnish the Employer additional prints as may be required along with one reproducible in original of the drawings after incorporating all corrections.

1.6 The work shall be performed by the Contractor strictly in accordance with these drawings and no deviation shall be permitted without the approval of the Employer, if so required.

1.7 All manufacturing, fabrication and erection work under the Scope of Contractor, prior to the approval of the drawings shall be at the Contractor’s risk. The Contractor may make any changes in the design which are necessary to conform to the provisions and intent of the Contract and such changes will again be subject to the approval by the Employer.

1.8 The approval of the documents and drawings by the Employer shall mean that the Employer is satisfied that:

a) The Contractor has completed the part of the Works covered be the subject document (i.e., confirmation of progress of work).

b) The work appears to comply with requirements of specifications.

In no case the approval by the Employer of any document does imply compliance with all technical requirements, nor the absence of errors in such documents.

1.9 The following is the general list of the documents and drawings that are to be approved by the employer:

a) Work Schedule (Master Network) Plan.


b) Sag tensions calculation and sag template curve drawing. c) Pole spotting data.

d) Detailed survey report and profile drawings showing ground clearance and pole locations.

e) Pole earthing Drawing. f) Pole accessories drawings like danger plate, number plate,

phase plates etc. g) Pert Chart.

1.10 Design Improvements : 1.10.1 The Employer or the Contractor may propose changes in the

specification and if the parties agree upon any such changes and the cost implication, the specification shall be modified accordingly.

1.10.2 If any such agreement affects the price and schedule of completion, the parties shall agree in writing as to the extent of any change in the price and schedule of completion before the Contractor proceeds with the change. Following such agreement, the provision thereof, shall be deemed to have been amended accordingly.

1.11 Design Co-ordination. The contractor shall be responsible for the selection and design of

appropriate material/item to provide the best co-ordinated performance of the entire system. The basic design requirements are detailed out in this specification. The design of various components, sub-assembly and assemblies shall be so done that it facilitates easy field assembly and maintenance.

1.12 Design Review Meetings The contractor will be called upon to attend design review meetings

with the Employer and the consultants of the Employer during the period of contract. The Contractor shall attend such meetings at his own cost at Hisar or at mutually agreed venue as and when required. Such review meeting shall be held as & when required.

2. Packing

All the material shall be suitably protected, coated, covered of boxed and created to prevent or deterioration during transit, handling & storage at site till the time of erection. The Contractor shall be responsible for any loss or damage during transportation, handling and storage due to improper packing. The contractor shall include and provide for securely protecting and packing the materials so as to avoid loss or damage during transport during transport by air, sea, rail and road. All packing shall allow for easy removal and checking at site. Wherever necessary, proper arrangement for attaching slings for lifting shall be provided. All packages shall be clearly marked for with sign showing ‘up’ & ‘down’ on.

3. Progress Report

Appropriate visual charts shall accompany the monthly progress report detailed out the progress achieved on all erection activities as compared to the schedules. The report shall also indicate the reasons


for variance between the scheduled and actual progress and the action proposed for corrective measures wherever necessary.

4. Manpower Deployment Report The Contractor shall submit to the employer on the first day of every month a manpower deployment schedule for each activity. The Contractor shall also submit to the employer on the first day of every month a manpower deployment report of the previous month detailing the No. of persons scheduled to have been employed and actually employed. Tools, Tackle and Scaffolding

The Contractor shall provide all the construction equipment, tools, tackle and scaffoldings required for construction, erection and commissioning of the power line covered under the contract. He shall submit a list of all such material of the employer before the commencement of work at site. These tools and tackle shall not be removed from the site without the written permission of the Employer.

First Aid and General Hygiene

The Contractor shall provide necessary first aid & reasonable Hygiene facilities for all his employees, representatives and workmen working at the site Enough number of Contractor’s personnel shall be trained in administering the first aid.

Security

The Contractor shall have total responsibility for all requirement and materials in his custody, stored, loose, semi-assembled and or erected by him at site. The Contractor shall make suitable security arrangements including employment of security personnel to ensure the protection of all materials, equipment and works from theft, pilferage and any other damages and loss.

Materials Handling and Storage: All the supplies under the Contract as well as arriving at Site shall be promptly received, unloaded and transported and stored in the stores by the Contraction. Contractor shall be responsible for examining all the shipment and notify the employer immediately of any damage, shortage, discrepancy etc for the purpose of Employer’s information only. The Contactor shall submit to the Employer every week a report detailing all the receipts during the week. However, the Contactor shall be solely responsible for any shortage or damages in transit, handling and/ or in storage and erection at Site. The Contractor shall maintain an accurate and exhaustive record detailing out the list of all items received by him for the purpose of erection and keep such record open for the inspection of the Employer.


Each package shall be legibly marked by the Contractor/ Supplier at his expenses showing the details such as description and quantity of contents, the name of the consignee and address, the gross and net weight of the package, the name of the Contractor etc.

5. Erection Conditions The following shall supplement the conditions already contained in the other parts of these specifications and documents and shall govern that portion of the work on this Contract to be performed at site. Regulation of local Authorities and Statutes The Contractor shall comply with all the rules and regulations of local authorities during the performance of his field activities. He shall also comply with the Minimum Wages Act, 1948 and the payment of Wages Act (both of the Govt. of India) and the rules made there under in respect of any employee or workman employed or engaged by him or his Sub-Contractor. All registration and statutory inspection fees, if any, in respect of his work pursuant to this Contract shall be to the account of the Contractor. However, any registration, statutory inspection fees lawfully payable under the provisions of the statutory law and its amendments from time to time during erection in respect of the 11 KV line, ultimately to be owned by the Employer, shall be to the account of the Employer. Should any such inspection or registration need to be re-arranged due to the fault of the Contractor or his Sub-Contractor, the additional fees to such inspection and /or registration shall be borne by the Contractor. Contractor’s Field Operation. The Contractor shall keep the Employer informed in advance regarding his field activity plans and schedules for carrying-out each part of the works. Any review of such plan or schedule or method of work by the Employer shall not relieve the Contractor of any of his responsibilities towards the field activities. Such reviews shall also not be considered as an assumption of any risk by the Employer or any of his representatives and no claim of the Contractor will be entertained because of the failure or inefficiency of any such plan or schedule or method of work reviewed. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the safety, adequacy and efficiency of tools and plants and his erection methods. All the materials stored in the open or dusty location must be covered with suitable weather-proof and flameproof covering material as applicable. The Contractor shall be responsible for making suitable indoor storage facilities at various locations to store all items /materials which require indoor storage.

6. Construction Management

Time is the essence of the Contract and the Contractor shall be responsible for performance of his works in accordance with the specified construction schedule. If at any time, the Contractor is falling behind the schedule for reasons attributable to him, he shall take necessary action to make good for such delays by increasing his work force or by working overtime or otherwise to


accelerate the progress of the work and to comply with schedule and shall communicate such actions in writing to the Employer, satisfying that his action will compensate for the delay. The Contractor shall not be allowed any extra compensation for such action.

7. Field Office Records

The Contractor shall set up his site offices at different locations

to facilitate smooth working. The site offices shall be manned by

his supervisors/ other staff. The Contractor shall maintain at his

Site office up-to-date copies of all drawings, specifications and

other supplementary data complete with all the latest revisions

thereto. The Contractor shall also maintain, in addition, the

continuous record of all changes to the above Contract

Documents, drawings, specifications, supplementary data etc.

effected in the field and on completion of his total assignment

under the Contract shall incorporate data to indicate as installed

conditions of the material supplied and erected under the

contract. Such drawings and engineering data shall be

submitted to the Employer in required number of copies.

8. Protection of Property and Contractor’s Liability: The Contractor will ensure provision of necessary safety equipment

such as barriers, sign-boards, warning lights and alarms etc. to provide

adequate protection to persons and property. The Contractor shall be

responsible to give reasonable notice to the Employers and the

Owners of public or private property and utilities when such property

and utilities are likely to get damaged or injured during the performance

of his works and shall make all necessary arrangements with such

owners, related to removal and/or replacement or protection of such

property and utilities.

9. Insurance: The Contractor shall arrange & keep alive all the required insurance

covers for his Employees/third parties as under:-

9.1 Workmen’s Compensation Insurance:


This insurance shall protect the Contractor against all claims applicable

under the Workmen’s Compensation Act, 1948 (Government of India).

This policy shall also cover the Contractor against claims for injury,

disability disease or death of his or his Sub-Contractor’s employees,

which for any reason are not covered under the Workmen’s

employees, which for any reason are not covered under the workmen’s

Compensation Act, 1948. The liabilities shall not be less than:

Workmen’s Compensation As per statutory Provisions

Employee’s Liability As per statutory Provisions

9.2 Comprehensive Automobile Insurance

This insurance shall be in such a form to protect the Contractor

against all claims for injuries, disability, disease and death to members

of public including the Employer’s men and damage to the property of

others arising from the use of motor vehicles during on or off the site

operations, irrespective of the ownership of such vehicles. The

minimum liability covered shall be as herein indicated:

Fatal Injury : Rs. 100,000 each person

: Rs. 200,000 each occurrence

Property Damage : Rs. 100,000 each occurrence

In case the employer is made to pay such compensation, the

Contractor will be liable to reimburse the Employer such amount even

in addition to the compensation indicated above.

9.3 Comprehensive General Liability Insurance

9.3.1 The insurance shall protect the Contractor against all claims arising

from injuries, disabilities, disease or death of members of public or

damage to property of others, due to any act or omission on the part of

the Contractor, its agents, its employees, its representatives and Sub-

Contractors or from riots, strikes and civil commotion.

9.3.2 The above are only illustrative list of insurance covers normally

required and it will be the responsibility of the Contractor to maintain all

necessary insurance coverage to the extent both in time and amount to


take care of all its liabilities either direct of indirect, in pursuance of the

Contact.

10. Protection of Measurements and Reference Points:

The Contractor shall ensure that any finds such as relics, antiques,

coins, fossils, etc. which he may come across during the course of

performance of his works either during excavation or elsewhere, are

properly protect3ed and handed over to the Employees. Similarly, the

Contractor shall ensure that the bench marks, reference points etc.

which are marked either with the help of Employer shall or by the

Employer shall not be disturbed in any way during the performance of

its works. If, any work , is to be performed which disturbs such

reference, the same shall be done only after these are transferred to

other suitable locations under the direction of the Employer. The

Contractor shall provide all necessary materials and assistance to such

relocation of reference points etc.

11. Work and Safety Regulations:

11.1 The Contractor shall ensure safety of all the workmen, materials plant

and equipment belonging to him or to the others, working at the Site.

The Contractor shall also provide for all safety notices and safety

equipment required by the relevant legislations and deemed necessary

by the Employer.

11.2 The Contractor will notify, well in advance to the Employer, its intention

to bring to the site any Container filled with liquid or gaseous fuel or

explosive or petroleum substance or such chemicals which may involve

hazards. The employer shall have the right to prescribe the conditions,

under which such a container is to be stored, handled and used during

the performance of the works and the Contractor shall strictly adhere to

and comply with such instructions. The Employer shall also have the

right, at his sole discretion, to inspect any such container or such

construction plant/equipment for which materials in the container is

required to be used and dif in his opinion, its use is not safe, he may

forbid its use.

No Claim due to such prohibition or towards additional safety

provisions called for by him shall be entertained by the Employer.


Further, any such decision of the Employer shall not, in any way, absolve the

Contractor of his responsibilities under the Laws of land and in case use of

such a Container or entry there of into the Site area is forbidden by the

Employer, the Contractor shall use alternative methods with the approval of

the Employer without any cost implication to the Employer or extension of

work schedule.

11.3 Where it is necessary to provide and/or store petroleum products or

petroleum mixtures and explosives, the Contractor shall be responsible

for carrying out such provision and/or storage in accordance with the

rules and regulations laid down in Petroleum Act, 1934, Explosives Act,

1948 or any other statuary acts in regard there of and amendments

thereof, and petroleum and carbide of Calcium Manual published by

the Chief Inspector of Explosives of India. All such storage shall have

prior approval of the Employer. In case, any approval is necessary

from the Chief Inspector (Explosives) or any statutory authorities, the

Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining the same.

11.4 All equipment used in construction and erection by Contractor shall

meet Indian/International Standards land where such standards do not

exist, the Contractor shall ensure these too be absolutely safe. All

equipment shall be strictly operated and maintained by the Contractor

in accordance with manufacturer’s operation manual and safety

instructions and as per any existing Guidelines/rules in this regard.

11.5 Periodical examinations and all tests for all lifting/hoisting equipment

and tackle shall be carried-out in accordance with the relevant

provisions of Factories Act 1948. Indian Electricity Supply Act and

associated Laws/Rules in force from time to time. A register of such

examinations and tests shall be properly maintained by the Contractor

and will be promptly produced as land when desired by Employer or by

the persons authorized by him.

11.6 The Contractor shall provide suitable safety equipment of prescribed

standard to all employees and workmen according to the need as may

be directed by the Employer who will also have the right to examine

these safety equipment to determine their suitability, reliability,

acceptability and adaptability.


11.7 The Contractor employing more than 250 workman whether temporary,

casual, probationer, regular or permanent or on contract, shall employ

at least one full time officer exclusively as safety officer to supervises

safety aspects of the equipment and workman.

The name and address of such Safety Officer of the Contractor will be

promptly informed in writing to the Employer with a copy to the Safety

Officer-Incharge before he starts work or immediately after any change

of the incumbent is made during currency of the Contract.

11.8 In case any accident occurs during the construction/erection or other

associated activities undertaken by the Contractor, thereby causing

any minor or major or total injury to his employees due to any reason

whatsoever, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to promptly

inform the same to the Employer and also to all the authorities

envisaged under the applicable laws.

11.9 The Employer shall have the right to stop the work, if in its opinion the

work is being carried out in such a way as may cause accidents and

endanger the safety of the persons and /or property. In such cases, the

Contractor shall be informed in writing about the nature of the hazards

and possible injury /accident and he shall remove shortcomings

promptly. The Contractor – after stopping the specific work, can if felt

necessary, appeal against the order of stoppage of work to the

Employer within 3 days of such stoppage of work and the decision of

the Employer in this respect shall be conclusive.

11.10 The Contractor shall not be entitled for any damages /compensation for

stoppage of work due to safety reasons and the period of such

stoppage of work will not be taken as an extension of time for

completion of work and will not be the ground for waiver of any part of

Contractor’s liability for timely completion of the works.

11.11 The Contractor shall follow and comply with all safety rules, relevant

provisions of applicable laws pertaining to the safety of workman,

employees plant and equipment as may be prescribed from time to

time without any demur, protest or contest or reservation. In case of

any conflict between statutory requirement and safety rules referred

above, the most stringent clause shall be applicable.


11.12 If the Contractor fails in providing safe working environment as per

Safety Rules or continues the work even after being instructed to stop

work by the Employer, the Contractor shall promptly pay to the

Employer on demand, compensation at the rate of Rs. 5000/- per day

or part thereof till the instructions are complled with and so certified by

the Employer.

11.13 If the Contractor does not take all safety precautions and /or fails to

comply with the safety Rules as prescribed by the Employer or as

prescribed under the applicable law for the safety of the equipment,

plant and personnel and the Contractor does not prevent hazardous

conditions which may cause injury to his own employees or employees

of other Contractors, or Employer or any other person at site or

adjacent thereto, the Contractor shall be responsible for payment of

compensation in the form of first hand relief as per the following

schedule:-

a) Fatal Injury or Rs. 1,00,000/- :

accident causing per person : Applicable

death : for

death/injury

b) Major injuries or Rs. 20,000/- : to any person

accident causing per person : whosoever

25% or more

Permanent disability :

The contractor,however, shall be responsible for full amount of

compensation admissible as per the law of land

Permanent disability shall have the same meaning as indicated

in Workmen’s Compensation Act. The compensation mentioned

above shall be in addition to the compensation payable to the

workmen/ employees under the relevant provisions of the

Workmen’s Compensation Act and rules framed there under or

any other applicable law as applicable from time to time. In case

the Employer is made to pay any such compensation, the


Contractor will be liable to reimburse the Employer such amount

(s) even in addition to the compensation indicated above.

12. Code Requirements

The erection requirements and procedures to be followed during

the execution of the project shall be in accordance with the

applicable Indian / International standards /regulations, as

indicated in Technical Specifications, good engineering practice,

the Drawings and other applicable Indian codes, laws and

regulations.


SECTION –VII-C

Technical Specification of Equipments

Sr No Description No. 1 PCC Poles 9M (200 kg WL) CSC-VII/R-1/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010 2 ACSR 50 mm2 CSC-X/R-1/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010 3 Stay Wire 7/8 SWG(GSS) CSC-VI/R-1/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010 4 GI wire(GSL 8 SWG) CSC-XVI/R-1/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010 5 MS Nuts and Bolts HSD/S-364/ST-163 6 Porcelain insulators and insulators fittings

for 11 kV overhead power lines CSC-XXIX/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010

7 GO switch CSC-XXVIII/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010 with amendment

8 Lightening Arrestor 9 KV Old specification 9 Barbed wire Old Specification 10 11 kV XLPE Aerial Bunched Cable CSC-LV/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010 11 Heat shrinkable termination kit for 11 kV

Cables CSC-XXXVI/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010

12 25KVA three phase Alu wound T/F CSC-III/R-1/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010 13 16 KVA three phase copper wound T/F CSC-IV/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010 14 Single Phase Energy Meter CSC-IIIL/R-1/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010 15 Three Phase Energy Meter CSC-IIL/R-1/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010 16 MCB For Single Phase Meter CSC-XXXXI/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010 17 MCB For Three Phase Meter CSC-XXXXII/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010 18 LT XLPE Armoured cable CSC-XI/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010 &

CSC-XXXI/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010

of 9

Specification No. CSC-VII-R-I/DH/UH/P&D/2009-10

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

FOR

PCC POLES 8/9 METER LONG

(WL-200 K.G. F.O.S-2.5)

Issue of the Month: May 2010 Common Specifications Committee

(CSC Approval date 23.4.2010) UHVN & DHBVN

of 9

Technical specification for PCC Poles (F.O.S. –2.5) 8/9 M Length

(Working load 200 kg.)

1. Scope:

This specification covers manufacture, assembly, testing at manufacturer’s

works of PCC Poles with an over all length of 8 M and 9 M and working load of

200 kg. at 0.6 M from the top, suitable for use in overhead L.T. lines.

2. APPLICABLE STANDARDS: Except when they conflict with requirements in this specification, the poles

shall comply with the relevant provisions made in the following Indian Standards

Specification or equivalent IEC.

a. IS: 1678-1960, specification for prestressed concrete pole for overhead

power, traction and telecommunication lines.

b. IS: 2905-1966, Methods of test for concrete poles for overhead power and

telecommunication lines.

c. IS: 7321-1974, code of practice for selection, handling and erection of

concrete poles for overhead power and telecommunication lines.

3. CLIMATIC CONDITIONS:

The equipment/material to be supplied against this specification shall be

suitable for satisfactory operation under the following climatic Conditions

i) Location At various locations in the state of Haryana

ii) Maximum ambient temperature (oC) 60 iii) Minimum ambient air temperature (oC) -5 iv) Maximum average daily ambient

temperature (oC) 40

v) Maximum yearly weighed average ambient temperature (oC)

32

vi) Maximum altitude above mean sea level (m)

1000

vii) Minimum Relative Humidity (%) 26 viii) Maximum Relative Humidity (%) 95 ix) Average no of Rainy days/ year 120 x) Average annual rainfall 900 mm xi) Maximum wind pressure 195 kg/m sq. The equipment shall be for use in moderately hot and humid tropical

climate, conducive to rust and fungus growth.

4. Terminology:

For the purpose of this standard the following definitions shall apply:

4.1 Average permanent load:

That fraction of the working load, which may be considered of long duration

over a period of one year.

of 9

4.2 Load factor:

The ratio of ultimate transverse load to the transverse load at first crack

4.3 Transverse: The direction of the line bisecting the angle contained by the conductor at

the pole. In the case of straight run this will be normal to the run of the pole.

4.4 Transverse load at first crack:

For design, the transverse load at first crack shall be taken as not less than

the value of the working load.

4.5 Working load:

The maximum load in the transverse direction that is ever likely to occur,

including the wind pressure on the pole. This load is assumed to act at a point 600

mm below the top with the butt end of the pole planted to the required depth as

intended in the design.

4.6 Ultimate failure:

The conditions existing when the pole ceases to sustain a load increment

owing to either crushing of concrete or snapping of the prestressing tendon or

permanent stretching of the steel in any part of the pole.

4.7 Ultimate transverse load:

The load at which failure occurs, when it is applied at a point 600 mm below

the top and perpendicular to the axis of the pole along the transverse direction with

the butt end of the pole planted to the required depth.

5.0 Materials:

5.1 Cement:

The cement used in the manufacture of prestressed concrete poles shall be

ordinary or rapid hardening Portland cement conforming to IS: 269 –1976

(Specifications for rapid hardening Portland cement).

5.2 Aggregates:

Aggregates used for the manufacture of prestessed concrete poles shall

conform to IS 383-1970 (Specification for coarse and fine aggregates from natural

sources for concrete) the nominal max. size of aggregates shall in no case exceed

12 mm.

5.3 Water:

Water should be free from chlorides, sulphates, other salts and organic

matter. Potable water will be generally suitable.

5.4 Admixtures:

Admixtures should not contain calcium chloride or other chlorides and salts

which are likely to promote corrosion of prestressing steel.

5.5 Pre-stressing Steel:

The pre-stressing steel wires, including those used as untensioned wires,

should conform to IS 1785 (part –I) 1966 (specification for plain hard drawn steel

of 9

wire for prestressed concrete part-I cold drawn stress relieved wire) IS:1785 (part

II)-1967 (specification for plain hard drawn steel wire for prestressed concrete part-

II as drawn wire) or IS: 6003-1970 (specification for indented wire for prestressed

concrete).

5.6 Concrete

The concrete mix shall be designed to the requirements laid down for

controlled concrete (also called design mix concrete) in IS: 1343-1960 (code of

practice for prestressed concrete) and IS: 456-1964 (code of practice for plain and

reinforced concrete), subject to the following special conditions.

a) Minimum works cube strength at 28 days should be at least 420 kg/cm2

b) The concrete strength at transfer should be at least 210 kg/cm2

c) The mix should contain at least 380 kg of cement per cubic meter of

concrete.

d) The mix should contain as low water content as is consistent with adequate

workability. If it becomes necessary to add water to increase the workability,

the cement content also should be raised in such a way that the original

value of water cement ratio is maintained.

6. Welding and Lapping of steel:

The high tensile steel wire shall be continuous over the entire length of the

tendon. Welding shall not be allowed in any case. However, Jointing or coupling

may be permitted/provided the strength of the joint or coupling is not less than the

strength of each individual wire.

7.0 Manufacture:

7.1 All prestressing wires and reinforcements shall be accurately fixed as

shown in the drawings and maintained in position during manufacture. The

untensioned reinforcement, as indicated in the drawing, should be held in

position by the use of stirrups, which should go round all the wires.

7.2 All wires shall be accurately stretched with uniform prestress in each wire.

Each wire or group or wires shall be anchored positively during casting.

Care shall be taken to see that the anchorages do no yield before the

concrete attains the necessary strength.

7.3 Covers:

The cover concrete measured from the outside of the prestressing tendon

shall be normally 20 mm.

7.4 Compacting:

The concrete shall be compacted by spinning, vibrating, shocking or other

suitable mechanical means. Hand compaction shall not be permitted.

7.5 Curing:

The concrete shall be covered with a layer of sacking, canvas, hessian or

similar absorbent material and kept constantly wet up to the time when the

of 9

strength of concrete is at least equal to the minimum strength of concrete at

transfer of prestess. Thereafter, the pole may be removed from the mould and

watered at intervals to prevent surface cracking of the unit, the interval should

depend on the atmospheric humidity and temperature.

7.6 The prestressing wires shall be detensioned only after the concrete has

attained the specified strength at transfer (i.e. 210Kg./cm2). The cubes cast for the

purpose of determining the strength at transfer should be cured, as far as possible,

under conditions similar to those under which the poles are cured. The transfer

stage shall be determined based on the daily tests carried out on concrete cubes

till the specified strength indicated above is reached. Thereafter, the test on

concrete shall be carried out as detailed in IS 1343-1960 (code of practice for

prestessed concrete). The manufacturer shall supply, when required by the

purchaser or his representative, results of compressive test conducted in

accordance with IS 456-1964 (code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete )

on concrete cubes and from the concrete used for the poles. If the purchaser so

desires, the manufacturer shall supply cubes for test purposes and such cubes

shall be tested in accordance with IS: 456 –1964 (code of practice for pre &

reinforced concrete).

The detensioning shall be done by slowly releasing the wires, without

imparting shock or sudden load to the poles. The rate of detensioning may be

controlled by any suitable means either mechanical (screw type) or hydraulic.

The poles shall not be detensioned or released by cutting the prestessing wires

using flames or bar croppers while the wires are still under tension.

8. Earthing: Earthing shall be provided:

a) By having a length of 8 SWG GI wire embedded in concrete during

manufacture and the ends of the wires left projecting from the pole to a

length of 175 mm, at 250 mm from top and 150 mm below ground level.

b) By providing two holes of suitable dimensions 250 mm from top and

150 mm below ground level to enable the GI wire to be taken from the top

hole to the bottom hole through central hollow.

The earth wire shall not be allowed to come in contact with the prestressing wires. 9. Tests

9.1 Transverse strength tests: 9.1.1 Poles made from ordinary Portland cement shall be tested only on the

completion of 28 days and poles made from rapid hardening cement only on

the completion of 14 days after the day of manufacture.

9.1.2 The pole may be tested in either horizontal or vertical position. If tested in

horizontal position, provisions shall be made to compensate for the

of 9

overhanging weight of the pole for this purpose the overhanging portion of

the pole may be supported on a movable trolley or similar device.

9.1.3 The pole shall be rigidly supported at the butt end for a distance equal to the

agreed depth of planting i.e. 1.5m.

9.1.4 Load shall be applied at a point 600 mm from the top of the pole and shall

be steadily and gradually increased to the design value of the transverse

load at first crack. The deflection at this load shall be measured.

A prestressed concrete pole shall be deemed not to have passed the test if

visible cracks appear at a stage prior to the application of the design transverse

load for the first crack.

The load shall then be reduced to zero and increased gradually to a load

equal to the first crack load plus 10% of the minimum ultimate transverse load, and

held up for 2 minutes. This procedure shall be repeated until the load reaches the

value of 80% of the minimum ultimate transverse load and thereafter increased by

5 % of the minimum ultimate transverse load until failure occurs. Each time the

load is applied, it shall be at the point of failure & shall be measured to the nearest

five kilograms.

The pole shall be deemed not to have passed the test if the observed

ultimate transverse load is less than the design.

The pole shall be deemed not to have passed the test if the observed

ultimate transverse load is less than the design ultimate transverse load.

9.2 Measurement of cover: After completion of the transverse strength test, the sample pole shall be

taken and checked for cover. The cover of the pole shall be measured at 3 points,

one within 1.8 meter from the butt end of the pole, the second within 0.6 meter

from the top end the third at an intermediate point and the mean value compared

with the specified value.

The mean value of the measured cover should not differ by more than +/-

1mm from the specified value.

If these requirements are not met, the workmanship with reference to

aligning of the end plates and prestressing wire assembly of mould should be

improved and inspection at production stage tightened suitably.

10 Inspection:

Inspection of material and supervision of tests in accordance with the

relevant ISS is mentioned in column 2 above and supporting drg. and schedules

and approved manufacture specification shall be carried out by the purchaser or

duly authorised representative. The material shall be inspected and tested before

despatch by an authorised representative of the Nigam in respect of quality. The

manufacturer shall provide to the inspecting officer all reasonable facilities without

of 9

charge to satisfy him that the material is being furnished in accordance with the

specifications.

The purchaser or his authorised representative shall have access at all

reasonable time to manufacturer’s work to inspect and witness to tests of the

material manufactured.

The purchaser has the right to have the tests carried out at the cost of

supplier by an independent Govt. agency wherever there is dispute regarding the

quality of material supplied.

11. Stacking

The supplies shall stack the poles in such a way that it is possible for the

inspecting officer to select and inspect the poles, as he may choose to inspect. All

such facilities for taking out the selected poles will be extended by the supplier free

of charge

12. Marking: The pole shall be clearly and indelibly marked with following

particulars either during or after manufacture but before testing at a position so as

to be easily read after erection in position.

a) Month and year of manufacture

b) Transverse strength of pole in kg.

c) Maker’s serial no. and mark.

UHBVN and planting depth will hence forth be embossed on each pole.

Firms give month wise schedule of manufacture against PO to facilitate inspection

during manufacturing process.

Whenever poles are tested out of any lot lying in UHBVN stores, cost of the

poles and testing charges will be charged to stock charge.

Checking of cover & steel Out of every 500 poles, one

may be take for climate

strength, testing, cover

checking after crushing and

checking of un-tensioned /

tensioned wire.

13. GUARANTEE / WARRANTEE The supplier shall be responsible to replace, free of cost, with no

transportation or insurance cost to the Purchaser, up to destination, the whole or

any part of the material which in normal and proper use proves the defective in

quality or workmanship, subject to the condition that the defect is noticed within 18

months from the date of receipt of material in stores OR 12 months from the date

of commissioning whichever period may expire earlier. The consignee or any

other officer of Nigam actually using the material will give prompt notice of each

of 9

such defect to the supplier. The replacement shall be effected by the supplier

within a reasonable time, but not, in any case, exceeding 45 days. The supplier

shall, also, arrange to remove the defective within a reasonable period, but not

exceeding 45 days from the date of issue of notice in respect thereof, failing which,

the purchaser reserve the right to dispose of defective material in any manner

considered fit by him (Purchaser), at the sole risk and cost of the supplier. Any

sale proceeds of the defective material after meeting the expenses incurred on its

custody, disposal handling etc., shall however be credited to the supplier’s account

and set off against any outstanding dues of the purchaser against the supplier.

The warranty for 12/18 months shall be one time.

14. FAKE INSPECTION CALLS In case the supplier makes a fake inspection call i.e., the material is not

found ready by the Inspecting Officer deputed by the Nigam for inspection, the

supplier shall be liable to pay the expenses incurred by the Nigam on this account

subject to minimum of a fixed penalty of Rs. 20, 000/- for each such fake call made

by him.

15. CHALLENGE CLAUSE

The material offered / received after the inspection by the authorized

inspecting Officer may again be subjected to the test for losses or any other

parameters from any testing house / in house technique of the Nigam having

requisite capabilities and facilities. The results if found deviating / unacceptable or

in non-compliance with approved GTP’s, the lot shall be rejected and bidder shall

arrange to supply the within thirty (30) days of such detection at his cost including

to & fro transportation. In addition to this a penalty @ 10% of cost of the rejected

lost of material shall be imposed

General Manager/P&D Cum-Member Secretary CSC UHBVN, Panchkula.

of 9

SCHEDULE OF GUARANTEED AND OTHER TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR PCC POLES (TO BE SUBMITTED BY THE TENDERER). 1. Over length of pole m

2. Working load at 0.6 Meters from top kg.

3. Factor of safety

4. Bottom depth cm

5. Top depth cm

6. Breath cm.

7. No. of tensioned wires per pole no.

8. No. of untensioned wires per pole no.

9. Length of each untensioned wire

10. Concrete quantity m3/pole

11. Steel quantity kg/pole

12. Cement quantity kg/pole

______________________________________________________________________

Page 1 of 9

Specification No. CSC‐X‐RI/DH/UH/P&D/2010‐2011

TECHNICAL SPECIFCATION

FOR

HARD DRAWN STRANDED STEEL CORED

ALUMUINIUM CODUCTORS (20, 30 & 50 mm2)

Issue Month: May 2010 Common Specifications Committee

(CSC approval date 23.4.2010) UHBVN &DHBVN

______________________________________________________________________

Page 2 of 9

Technical Specification for Hard drawn stranded Steel Cored Aluminium Conductor for overhead low, medium 11 kV transmission lines. (20mm2, 30mm2 & 50mm2

) 1. SCOPE:‐ This specification covers the design, manufacture, testing before dispatch, supply & delivery

FOR destination, of ‘Squirrel‐20 mm2’, weasel ‐ 30 mm2’ & Rabbit‐50mm2’ ACSR conductor for use on 11

kV medium and low‐tension overhead power transmission lines.

2. APPLICABLE STANDARD:‐

Except when they conflict with the specific requirements. In these specifications, the conductors

shall comply in all respects with the latest Indian Standard Specification IS: 398‐(part‐II)‐1996, 4826‐

1976. (Galvanized coaling on round steel wires), IS: 1521‐1972 (Method of lenses Testing), IS: 1980 (Reels

& Drums for bare conductors), or the latest version thereof.

3. MATERIAL:‐

The conductor shall be made from the hard drawn Aluminum and galvanized Aluminium steel

wires having mechanical and electrical properties as per clause 4, 5 & 6.The Aluminum and galvanized

steel wires shall have physical constants conforming to clause 3 & 4 respectively of IS: 398/Part‐II‐

1996 or latest version thereof. The hot dipped or electrolytic process galvanized coating on steel wires

may be applied. The uniformity of galvanizing and weight of coating shall be in accordance with IS:

4826‐1976 or latest version thereof. The Steel wires shall have evenly and uniformly coating with

electrolytic highgrade 99.95% purity Zinc complying with latest issue of IS: 209 for Zinc. The steel strands

shall be hot dip galvanized and shall have a minimum Zinc coating of 250gm/m2 after stranding.

4 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS:

The equipment/material to be supplied against this specification shall be suitable for satisfactory

operation under the following climatic Conditions

i) Location At various locations in the state of

Haryana

ii) Maximum ambient temperature (oC) 60

iii) Minimum ambient air temperature (oC) ‐5

iv) Maximum average daily ambient temperature (oC) 40

v) Maximum yearly weighed average ambient

temperature (oC)

32

vi) Maximum altitude above mean sea level (m) 1000

vii) Minimum Relative Humidity (%) 26

viii) Maximum Relative Humidity (%) 95

ix) Average no of Rainy days/ year 120

x) Average annual rainfall 900 mm

xi) Maximum wind pressure 195 kg/m sq.

The equipment shall be for use in moderately hot and humid tropical climate, conducive to rust

and fungus growth.

______________________________________________________________________

Page 3 of 9

5. SIZES:‐

The sizes and properties for stranded steel cored aluminum conductors shall be as under:‐

STRANDED ALUMINIUM CONDUCTORS GALVANISED REINFORCED

Nominal Aluminium area

Stranding & wire diameter

Sectional area of AI

Total sectional area

Approx. Overall dia.

Approx mass

Calculated Resistance at 20oC Max.

Approx Calculated Breaking Load

Al Steel

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 Kg/Km. Ohm/Km KN

20 Squirrel 6/2.11 1/2.11 20.71 24.43 6.33 85 1.374 7.71

30 Weasel 6/2.59 1/2.59 31.21 37 7.77 128 0.9116 11.36

50 Rabbit 6/3.35 1/3.35 52.21 61.90 10.05 214 0.5499 18.60

6. ALUMINIUM WIRES The properties of Aluminum winos to be used in the construction of the stranded wires shall

be as follows:‐

Solid conductors used in the construction of stranded steel reinforce Aluminum Conductors

galvanized

Diameter Cross sectional Nominal Diameter vireo

Mass Resistance at 20oC Max.

Breaking Load before stranding (Max.)

Breaking Load after stranding (Max.)

Nominal Min. Max.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 Kg/Km. Ohm/Km KN

1 2.11 2.09 2.13 3.497 9.45

8.237 0.63 0.60

2 2.59 2.56 2.62 5.269 14.24 5.490 0.89 0.85

3 3.35 3.32 3.38 8.814 23.82 3.265 1.43 1.36

7 STEEL WIRES:‐

The properties of the steel wire to be used in the construction of the stranded Steel Cored

Aluminum Wires be as under:‐

Solid steel wires used in the construction of Aluminium Conductors galvanized, steel

reinforced:‐

Nominal Diameter Cross sectional area or Nominal diameter wire

Mass Breaking load (Min).

Min. Max Before stranding

After stranding

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

mm mm mm mm2 Km/Kg KN KN

2.11 2.07 2.15 3.497 27.27 4.60 4.37

2.59 2.54 2.64 5.269 41.09 6.92 6.57

3.35 3.28 3.42 8.814 68.75 11.58 11.00

8. FREE FROM DEFECTS:‐ The wires shall be smooth and free from inequalities, spills and splits. The finished conductor

shall be smooth, compact, uniform and free from all imperfections including spills & splits, die marks,

scratches, abrasions, scuff marks, kinks, dents, press marks, over‐riding, looseness, pressure and/or

unusual bangle noise, on tapping, material inclusions, white rust, powder formation or black spots,

dirt, grit etc

9. JOINTS IN WIRES AND CONDUCTORS:‐

______________________________________________________________________

Page 4 of 9

Aluminum conductors Steel reinforced:

No joint shall be permitted in the individual Aluminum wires in the outermost layer of the

finished conductor. No two joints shall occur in the aluminum wires closer together than 15 meters of

each other in the complete stranded conductor. During standing no Aluminum wire welds shall be

made for the purpose of achieving the required conductor length.

Steel wires: No joints shall be permitted.

10. STRANDING:‐

i. The wires used in construction of stranded conductor shall before stranding satisfy all the

requirements of this standard for solid wires.

ii) The successive layers shall be stranded in opposite directions. The wires in each layer shall be

evenly and closely stranded round the underlying wire or wires.

iii. Lay ratio: the ratio for aluminum in case of ACSR shall be within limits given below:

No. of Wires Ratio Aluminium wire Lay Ration for Aluminium Wire

Al. Steel Dia of Steel Wire Min Max.

6 1 1.000 10 14

11. TESTS

The sample of individual wires for the tests shall normally be taken before stranding. The

manufacture shall carry out tests on samples taken but at least

from 10% of Aluminum wire spools and 10% of steel wire coils. However,

when desired by the purchaser the test sample should be taken from the

stranded wire. They shall be obtained by cutting 1.2 meters from the outer

ends of the finished conductor form not more than 10% of the finished reels.

The material consumed or destroyed during testing will be to the account of

the supplier. The wires shall comply with the following test as per IS: 398

(Part‐II)‐1996:

Type Tests

i. Measurement of diameters of individual Al. & Steel wiles.

ii. Measurement of Lay‐ratio of each layer.

iii. Breaking load of individual wires.

iv. Ductility test.

v. Wrapping test.

vi. Resistance test.

vii. Galvanizing test.

viii. The type test report(s) submitted by the bidder/ supplier from any NABL accredited laboratory

shall be acceptable for participation of the bidder in the procurement/ empanelment process. In

case NABL accredited laboratory happens to be that of manufacturer itself added precaution

shall be taken to get type test and other tests witnessed in the laboratory by Nigam

representative at the time of acceptance of material.

Acceptance Tests:

i. Visual examination.

ii. Measurement of diameters of individual Al. & Steel wiles.

iii. Measurement of Lay‐ratio of each layer.

iv. Breaking load of individual wires.

______________________________________________________________________

Page 5 of 9

v. Ductility test.

vi. Wrapping test.

vii. Resistance test on Aluminum wires.

viii. Galvanizing test

Routine Tests:

The routine tests shall be done same as acceptance tests and shall be carried out before & after

stranding

12. PACKING & MARKING:‐

The conductor shall be wound in reels on non returnable wooden drums provided with

lagging of adequate strength constructed to protect, the conductor against damage &

displacement during transit, storage and subsequent handing which should be strong enough to

withstand the stresses during handling and transportation.

12.1 PACKING:

The conductor shall be wound in reels on non‐returnable wooden drums, which should be strong

enough to withstand the stresses during handling & transpiration.

12.1.1 The gross mass of various conductors shall not exceed by more than 10% of the values given in

the following table:‐

Conductor size Gross Mass

20mm2Al. Area (7/2.11mm) 1000Kg.

30mm2Al. Area (7/2.59mm) 1000Kg.

50mm2Al. Area (7/3.35mm) 1500Kg.

12.1.2 The nominal wire length shall be 2 KM. but longer lengths shall be acceptable. Short lengths not

less than 1 Km each shall be acceptable to the maximum extent of 10% of the quantity ordered.

12.2 MARKING:

The following information shall be marked on each drum:

a) Manufacturers name.

b) Trade mark if any.

c) Drum or Identification number.

d) Size of conductor.

e) No. of lengths conductor.

f) Gross mass of the packing.

g) Not mass of conductor

h) ISI certification mark, if any.

i) Position of the conductor.

j) Name & Address of the consignee.

k) Month & Year of manufacture.

13 INSPECTION

All tests and inspection shall be made at the place of manufacturer unless otherwise specially

agreed upon by the manufacturer and the purchaser at the time of purchase. The manufacturer shall

afford the inspector representing the purchase all responsible facilities, without charge, to satisfy him

that the material is being furnished in accordance with this specification. The purchaser or his

authorized representative shall have access at all responsible time to manufacture’s works to

______________________________________________________________________

Page 6 of 9

inspect and witness the tests of the conductor being manufactured, As regards correctness of the

length of ACSR Conductor, the same is subject to final checking and measurement by the consignee and

the firm shall be responsible for all the shortages, damages etc. if any. The samples are taken for test

after stranding and if any selected reel fails in the retest, the manufacture may test each and every

reel and submit them for further Inspection. All rejected material should be suitably marked and

segregated.

No material shall be dispatched from its point of manufacture before it has been satisfactorily

inspected and tested unless the Purchaser. In writing waives off the inspection. In the later case also,

the conductor shall be dispatched only after satisfactory testing for all tests specified are completed and

approved by Purchaser. The UHBVN/DHBVN reserves the right to have the tests carried out at the cost of

manufacturer / supplier by an independent agency whenever there is a dispute regarding the quality of

supply.

The acceptance of any quantity of material shall in no way relieve the Supplier of any of his

responsibilies for meeting all requirements of the specifications and shall not prevent subsequent

rejection if such material is later found to be defective

Qty of material out of lot recommended to be physically checked shall be as under:‐

i. For ACSR conductor up to 30mm sq.:

10% subject to a minimum of one drum.

ii. For ACSR conductor above 30mm sq.:

a. The inspecting officer shell select 10% of the drums offered for Inspection at random and

check as under:

i. Gross weight of each drum.

ii. Length of conductor on each drum.

iii. Weight of each empty drum.

iv. The inspecting officer then shall calculate the average weight per KM of the conductor on the

basis of net weight and length of conductor of 10% drums checked as above and shall also

calculate average weight of empty drum.

b. For the balance 90% drums:

i. The inspecting officer shall measure the gross weight of each drum.

ii). After deducting the average weight of one empty drum (a‐iv), the inspecting officer shall find

out the net weight of conductor on each drum.

c. The inspecting officer shall provide his seal on both ends of ACSR

conductor of all the drums offered for inspection as (a) & (b) above.

The inspecting officer shall write in the inspection note the verified

length and weight of conductor of individual drum out of 10% drums as

per ‘a’ above and calculate length and verify gross weight of each drum

as per (b) above. Consignee will take the measurement on the basis of

inspection note received by him.

14 GUARANTED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS:‐

GTP’s of the conductor shall be given in the Appendix‐I attached, herewith the specification. Any

other particulars considered necessary by the supplier might also be given in addition those listed in the

appendix.

16. GUARANTEE / WARRANTEE

______________________________________________________________________

Page 7 of 9

The supplier shall be responsible to replace, free of cost, with no transportation or insurance cost

to the Purchaser, up to destination, the whole or any part of the material which in normal and proper use

proves the defective in quality or workmanship, subject to the condition that the defect is noticed within

18 months from the date of receipt of material in stores OR 12 months from the date of commissioning

whichever period may expire earlier. The consignee or any other officer of Nigam actually using the

material will give prompt notice of each such defect to the supplier. The replacement shall be effected by

the supplier within a reasonable time, but not, in any case, exceeding 45 days. The supplier shall, also,

arrange to remove the defective within a reasonable period, but not exceeding 45 days from the date of

issue of notice in respect thereof, failing which, the purchaser reserve the right to dispose of defective

material in any manner considered fit by him (Purchaser), at the sole risk and cost of the supplier. Any

sale proceeds of the defective material after meeting the expenses incurred on its custody, disposal

handling etc., shall however be credited to the supplier’s account and set off against any outstanding dues

of the purchaser against the supplier. The warranty for 12/18 months shall be one time.

17. FAKE INSPECTION CALLS In case the supplier makes a fake inspection call i.e., the material is not found ready by the

Inspecting Officer deputed by the Nigam for inspection, the supplier shall be liable to pay the expenses

incurred by the Nigam on this account subject to minimum of a fixed penalty of Rs. 20, 000/‐ for each

such fake call made by him.

18. CHALLENGE CLAUSE The material offered / received after the inspection by the authorized inspecting Officer may

again be subjected to the test for losses or any other parameters from any testing house / in house

technique of the Nigam having requisite capabilities and facilities. The results if found deviating /

unacceptable or in non‐compliance with approved GTP’s, the lot shall be rejected and bidder shall arrange

to supply the within thirty (30) days of such detection at his cost including to & fro transportation. In

addition to this a penalty @ 10% of cost of the rejected lost of material shall be imposed

General Manager/P&D Cum‐Member Secretary CSC UHBVN Panchkula

______________________________________________________________________

Page 8 of 9

GUARANTED TECTIICAL PARTTCULARS PF CONDUCTOR

1. Code word.

2. Maker’s name, address and country.

a.) Aluminum rods.

b.) Steel wires/reels.

c.) Complete conducer.

3. Stranding and wire diameter.

a) Aluminum.

b) Steel.

4. Nominal equivalent copper area in sq. mm.

5. Nominal equivalent Aluminum area in sq. mm.

6. Gross sectional area in sq. mm of.

a) Aluminum strand.

b) Steel Strand.

c) Conductor strand.

7. Actual Aluminum area in sq. mm.

8. Diameter of complete conductor in mm.

9. Minimum breaking load in KV. Before After

Stranding Stranding

a) Aluminum wire.

b) Steel wire.

10. Minimum breaking load of conductor.

11. Purely of Aluminum rods.

12. Zinc coating.

a) Number of 1 minute dips.

b) Weight of zinc coating.

c) Process of Galvanizing.

d) Quality of Zinc.

13. Maximum working tension of conductor.

14. Mass in Kg per Km

a) Aluminum.

b) Steel.

c) Conductor

15. Resistance in Ohms/Km at 20’C

a) Aluminum.

b) ACSR Conductor. 16. a) Continuous max. cement rating of conductor in still air at 50 C

ambient Temperature‐Amps.

b) Temperature rise for above current in Degree C.

17. Modulo us of elasticity (Practical) of conductor.

18. Co‐efficient of linear expansion.

a) Aluminum.

a) Steel.

b) Conductor. 19. Percentage of carbon in steel wire rods.

______________________________________________________________________

Page 9 of 9

20. Standard length. 21. Tolerance if any in standard length. 22. Initial and final sags and tension and string charts whether furnished. 23. No. of standards length in one reel/drum. 24. Dimension of the reel. 25. Mass of the conductor in one reel/drum in Kg. 26. Mass of the reel drum. 27. Gross mass of reel/drum including wt. of the conductor. 28. Standard according to which the conductor will be manufacture and tested. 29. Other particulars if any. 30. Whether Test Certifiable enclosed. Yes/No 31. Joints in Strands

a) Steel b) Aluminum of.

c) Method of making joints.

d) Ultimate Tensile strength of joint.

Name & Address of Supplier

______________________________________________________________________

Page 1 of 4

Specification No. CSC-VI-R-I/DH/UH/P&D/2010-11


FOR

GSS WIRE OF 7/8 SWG (4MM)

Issue of the Month: Common Specifications Committee

(CSC approval date 23.4.2010) UHVN & DHBVN

______________________________________________________________________

Page 2 of 4

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR GSS WIRE OF 7/8 SWG 4 mm and 7/14 SWG (2.24mm) 1. SCOPE:

This specification covers the manufacture, testing and inspection of GSS Wire of sizes 7/8

SWG / (4mm) and 7/14 SWG (2.24mm).

2. STANDARDS:

The GSS wires shall conform to IS: 2141-1979, IS-4826 (1979) and 2633 (1964) or the latest

version thereof.


The equipment/material to be supplied against this specification shall be suitable for

satisfactory operation under the following climatic Conditions


Haryana


iii) Minimum ambient air temperature (oC) -5


v) Maximum yearly weighed average ambient temperature

(oC)

32







The equipment shall be for use in moderately hot and humid tropical climate, conducive to

rust and fungus growth.

TECHNICAL PARTICULARS:

In case where joints are permitted they shall be made by welding or brazing. Joints in the

same wire shall be departed by a length not less then that indicated at point (III) under “ Technical

parameters” (clause 4) and joint in the different wires shall not be less than 15 M apart.

______________________________________________________________________

Page 3 of 4

4. TESTS:

The tests as per IS: 2141-1979 or its latest version including the tests for chemical analysis is

provided therein shall be carried out. The zinc coating of the galvanized wire shall be as specified in IS:

4826/1979 with latest amendments and testing shall be carried out as specified in ISS: 2633/1964 or

the latest amendment thereof.

5. INSPECITON:

The material shall be inspected and tested before dispatch by an authorized representative of

the Nigam in respect of quality. In case the supplier is not in position to get these tests carried out at his

works, such tests may got be carried out by him at any Govt. recognized test agency at his own

expenses.


Inspecting Officer deputed by the Nigam for inspection, the supplier shall be liable to pay the

expenses incurred by the Nigam on this account subject to minimum of a fixed penalty of

Rs. 20, 000/- for each such fake call made by him.

7 . TEST CERTIFICATES:

The supplier shall supply one set of test certificates from a recognized Govt. agency in respect of

quality as per IS: 2141-1979 with latest amendments thereof for approval of the purchaser.

8. MARKING :

Each coil of GSS wire shall be marked legibly with the:

a. Manufacturer’s name or trade mark.

b. Lot number and coil number.

c. A brief description and quality of material.

d. Weight of the coil.

e. ISI certification mark may also be marked.

9. PACKING:

The supplier shall be responsible for proper packing of material so as to avoid any damage

during the transport and storage and to ensure correct dispatch to the destination. The length of strand

shall be as per ISS.

______________________________________________________________________

Page 4 of 4

10. PLACE OF MANUFACTURE:

The name and place of manufacture should be indicated in the tender.


The material offered / received after the inspection by the authorized inspecting Officer

may again be subjected to the test for losses or any other parameters from any testing house / in

house technique of the Nigam having requisite capabilities and facilities. The results if found

deviating / unacceptable or in non-compliance with approved GTP’s, the lot shall be rejected and

bidder shall arrange to supply the within thirty (30) days of such detection at his cost including to &

fro transportation. In addition to this a penalty @ 10% of cost of the rejected lost of material shall

be imposed

General Manager/P&D Cum-Member Secretary CSC UHBVN Panchkula.

of 6

______________________________________________________________________

Specification No. CSC-XVI-R-I/DH/UH/P&D/2010-11


FOR

GI WIRE

Issue of the Month: Common Specifications Committee

(CSC approval date 23.4.2010) UHVN & DHBVN

______________________________________________________________________

Page 2 of 6

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR G.I. WIRE

1. SCOPE:

This specification covers the manufacture, testing and inspection of G.I. wires.

2. APPLICABLE STANDARDS:

Except when they conflict with the specific requirements of this specification, the G.I. wires

shall comply with the provisions of IS: 280-1978 and IS: 7887-1975 or the latest version thereof.


The equipment/material to be supplied against this specification shall be suitable for

satisfactory operation under the following climatic Conditions

i) Location At various locations in the

state of Haryana


iii) Minimum ambient air temperature (oC) -5


v) Maximum yearly weighed average ambient

temperature (oC)

32







The equipment shall be for use in moderately hot and humid tropical climate, conducive to

rust and fungus growth.

4. TECHNICAL PARICULARS:

I ) Size of G.I. wire 4mm dia

II ) Tensile strength 56 to 95 kgf per sq.mm

III ) Quality Hard

______________________________________________________________________

Page 3 of 6

5. MATERIAL :

5.1 The wires shall be drawn from the wire rod confirming to IS: 7887-1975 or the latest

version thereof.

5.2 The requirement for chemical composition for the wires shall confirm to IS: 7887.

5.3 The wires shall be sound, free from split surface flaws, rough jagged and imperfect edges

and other detrimental defects on the surface of the wires.

6. GALVANISING:

The wires shall be galvanized with Heavy coating as per IS: 4826-1979 or the latest

version thereof.

7. TOLERANCE IN DIAMETER:

The tolerance on nominal diameter at any section of wire shall not exceed (+) (-) 2.5%.

Further, the maximum difference between the diameter at any two cross- Sections of wires shall

not exceed 2.5%.

8. TESTS :

The following tests shall be carried out in accordance with IS: 280-1978 or the latest

version thereof as per sampling criteria stipulated therein.

1. Dimensional check (dia) refer clause 7 above.

2. Visual inspection regarding freedom from defects-refer clause 5.3 above.

3. Tensile test.

4. Wrapping test.

5. Coating test-refer clause 6 above.

6. Chemical composition.

9. TEST CERTIFICATES:

The supplier shall supply from any Govt. recognized test agency the test certificates for the

material offered as per IS: 280-1978 or the latest version thereof for the approval of purchaser.

If the G.I. wire is bearing ISI marking then the certificate from the approved Govt. agencies will not

be required. It will not however obviate the necessity of inspection /testing by the inspecting officers

of the Nigam.

______________________________________________________________________

Page 4 of 6

10. INSPECITON:

The material shall be inspected and tested before dispatch as IS: 280-1978 or latest

version thereof by an authorized representative of the Nigam. In case the supplier is not in a

position to get these tests carried out at his works such tests may be got carried out by him at any

Govt. recognized tests agency at his own expenses.

11. PACKING :

The wires shall be supplied in 50-70 kg. Coils, each coils having single continuous length.

Each coil of wire shall be suitably bound and fastened compactly and shall be protected by suitable

wrapping.

12. MARKING:

Each coil shall be provided with a label fixed firmly on the inner part of the coil bearing the

following information.

1. Manufacture’s name or trade mark.

2. Lot number and coil number.

3. Size.

4. Grade.

5. Mass.

6. Length.

7. Material may also be marked with ISI certification mark.


Inspecting Officer deputed by the Nigam for inspection, the supplier shall be liable to pay the

expenses incurred by the Nigam on this account subject to minimum of a fixed penalty of

Rs. 20, 000/- for each such fake call made by him.

14. PLACE OF MANUFACTURE :

The name and place of manufacture should be given in the tender.

______________________________________________________________________

Page 5 of 6


The material offered / received after the inspection by the authorized inspecting Officer

may again be subjected to the test for losses or any other parameters from any testing house / in

house technique of the Nigam having requisite capabilities and facilities. The results if found

deviating / unacceptable or in non-compliance with approved GTP’s, the lot shall be rejected and

bidder shall arrange to supply the within thirty (30) days of such detection at his cost including to &

fro transportation. In addition to this a penalty @ 10% of cost of the rejected lost of material shall

be imposed

General Manager/P&D Cum-Member Secretary CSC UHBVN, Panchkula.

______________________________________________________________________

Page 6 of 6

GUARATEED TECHNICAL DATA:

1. Tensile strength. 2. Quality. 3. Galvanized. 4. Min. weight of one coil.


SPECIFICATION NO. HSD/S-364/ST-163

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR BLACK

HEXAGONAL M.S. BOLTS AND NUTS. OFFICE OF THE

CHIEF ENGINEER/PLG. & CONST. TRANSMISSION DESIGN DTE., HARYANA STATE ELECY. BOARD,

IDYUT NAGAR, HISAR.

ISSUE OF MONTH :__________


1.

Technical Specification for Black Hexagonal M.S. Bolts & Nuts.

SCOPE :

This specification covers the manufacture, testing before despatch,

supply and delivery F.O.R. destination of black hexagonal MS Bolts & Nuts

of various sizes.

2.

Unless otherwise modified in this specification, the bolts and nuts shall

comply with Indian Standard Specifications IS: 1363 - 1967 as amended from

time to time.

APPLICABLE STANDARDS :

3.

CLIMATIC CONDITIONS :

All the material is required to work satisfactorily under the following

site conditions :

3.1 Max. temperature 47.50

3.2 Min. temperature -2.

C 50

3.3 Max. relative humidity 100%

C

3.4 Min. relative humidity 26%

3.5 Average No. of rainy days Nearly 120 days.

Per Annum. 3.6 Average annual rain fall 900 mm 3.7 Average number of dust storms days /Annum 35 3.8 Isoceraunic level 45

3.9 Max. wind pressure 195Kg /m2

3.10 Altitude above mean sea Less than 1000 Mtrs. Level. 3.11 Pollution Moderate

4.

Full threaded bolts shall not be used. The bolts and nuts shall have

hexagonal heads which shall be neatly finished concentric and square with the

shank and free from burrs, scale and other defects. Threads in nuts shall not be

torn or ragged and shall be of proper contour. The fits of the nuts shall be

WORKMANSHIP :


such that there will be no locking of the nuts. Nuts and Bolts of the same size

shall be interchangeable. The thread of nuts & bolts shall have coarse pitch

screw threads as per I.S.S. - 4218-1967 or its latest amendments and shall

meet with all applicable technical supply conditions covered under this

standard.

5.

5.1

PARTICULARS OF MATERIAL :

The mechanical properties of bolts covered in this standard shall

conform to the property clause 4.6 and those for nuts shall conform to the

property clause 4 specified in IS: 1367-1967 or its latest edition.

MECHANICAL PROPERTIES :

6. GRADE :

Bolts & Nuts covered in this specification shall conform to Black

Grade B, specified in IS: 1367-1967.

7.

Black Bolts & Nuts covered in this specification shall be designated as

per table I of IS : 1363-1967.

DESIGNATION :

8.

The dimensions for black bolts & nuts shall be as given in table 2 & 3.

DIMENSIONS :

The bolts and nuts shall have coarse pitch screw threads

conforming to IS : 4218-1967 (ISO Metric Screw Threads).

Preferred length diameter combinations for black hexagonal bolts are

given in table-4 IS : 1363-1967.

9.

9.1 The method of sampling and acceptance criteria of black hexagonal

Bolts and Nuts shall be in accordance with IS: 2614-1964.

REQUIREMENTS :

9.2 The Bolts & Nuts conforming to this standard shall comply with the

requirements of IS: 1367-1967 in regard to requirements not specified in this

standard.

10

All types of tests including routine tests shall be carried out according to IS :

1367-1967 or its latest amendment.

TESTS :

11.

The material shall be inspected and tested before despatch by

authorised representative of the Board in respect of its quality. The

INSPECTION :


manufacturer shall provide to the inspecting officer, of the purchaser, all

reasonable facilities, without charge, to satisfy him that the material is being

furnished in accordance with the specification. The purchaser or his authorized

representative shall have access at all reasonable times to manufacturer’s

works to inspects and witness the tests of the material manufactured.

The purchaser has the right to have the tests carried out at the cost of

the supplier by an independent Govt, agency, whenever there is dispute

regarding the quality of material supplied.

12.

The tenderer shall state the place of manufacture, testing and name of

the manufacturer of the various items included in his tender.

PLACE OF MANUFACTURE :

13.

The supplier shall be responsible for suitable packing of all the

material and marking on the consignment, so as to avoid any damage during

transport and storage and to ensure correct despatch to the destination. The

packing shall be conforming to the requirement laid down in IS: 3256-1965 or

its latest amendment.

PACKING AND TRANSPORT :

14.

Illustrated and descriptive literature on the material offered must be

submitted along with the tender.

DRAWING AND LITERATURE :

15.

No assistance whatsoever for arranging the raw material for

manufacture of Bolts & Nuts shall be provided by the purchaser. The delivery

shall not be dependent upon availability of raw material.

RAW MATERIAL :

16.

The material shall be marked with the ISI certification mark.

MARKING :

The sealed container of bolts & nuts shall be marked with: a) Manufacturer name & trade mark. b) Place of manufacturers. c) The name & designation of consignee ( to be furnished by the

purchaser). d) Ultimate destination as required by the purchaser. e) The marking shall be stencilled in delible ink on gunny bags. f) Net weight with description of material.

Sd/- Superintending Engineer/Design,

for Chief Engineer/P&C, Transmission, Design Directorate, HSEB, Hisar.


ANNEXURE ‘A’

Sr. No. Description

Quantity Required

1. Black Hexogonal M.S. Bolts Rs. ________________ 2. Black Hexagonal M.S. Nuts Rs. ________________


TECHNICALSPECIFICATION FOR

11 KV LIGHTNING ARRESTOR.


TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR 11 KV LIGHTNING

ARRESTER FOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 5 KA, SERIES “B”. 1.

SCOPE :

This specification covers the design, manufacture, testing, inspection at

manufacturer’s works & delivery of 11 KV lightning arrestors.

2.


The material shall conform in all respects to the relevant IEC standards with latest amendments thereof. The bidder shall use ISS where corresponding IEC is not available. However, where both the standards are available, IEC will be used. IEC or other National Standards are permitted where these are equivalent or superior to IEC. In such cases salient points of difference between the standards adopted and the IEC standards shall be clearly brought out in the relevant schedule Four copies of such standards with authentic English translation shall be finished alongwith the offer.

3.


The equipment is required to operate satisfactorily under the following

site conditions :

TEMPERATURE :

A) Maximum temperature of air 50 Degree C B) Minimum temperature of air -2.5 Degree C.

RELATIVE HUMIDITY :

A) Maximum 100% B) Minimum 26% Isoceraunic Level 45


Average rainfall per year 900 mm Altitude Below 1000 M. Above sea level. Maximum wind pressure 150 Kg./Sq.m. No. of rainy days per year Nearly 4 months In a year.

4.

TECHNICAL PARTICULARS :

The Lightning Arrestors shall be of Metal Oxide Gapless type suitable

for outdoor installation on 11000 volts, 50 cycles per ;second, 3 phase

A.C. system with neutral solidly grounded. The highest line to line

system voltage should be 12.0 KV (rms) and other particulars are as

under :

A) Voltage rating in KV RMS 9 KV rms.

B) Nominal discharge current rating 5 KVA.

C) Maximum residual test voltage specified 34 KV peak with

8/20 micro second

current waves.

5.

DRAWINGS :

The tendered along with tender, should offer dimensional drawings and

illustrated descriptive literature of the equipment.

6.

TESTS :

The type routine and acceptance as per IS : 3010 (Part-III)/IEC Ch-4

(1991) with latest version thereof shall be carried out.


7.

INSPECTION :

The material shall be inspected and tested before despatch by an

authorized representative of the Nigam in respect of quality. The

manufacturer shall provide the necessary facilities for such inspection.

In case the supplier is not in a position to get these test carried out at

his works, such tests may be got carried out by him at any Govt.

recognized testing agency at his own expense.

8.

TEST CERTIFICATES :

The supplier shall supply certificates as per IS –3070/99 –4 with latest

amendment thereof from a recognized Government agency for

approval of the purchaser.

9.

MARKING :

Each lightning arrestor shall be provided with a name plate or plae

legibly and indelibly marked with the name or trade mark of the

manufacturer and country of Manufacture rated voltage, nominal

discharge current, type destination and serial number of the Lightning

Arrestor, identification mark on each separately housed unit to enable

it to be replaced in correct position after a multi unit arrestor has been

dismantled should also be marked ISI certification mark may also be

marked.

10.

GUARANTEED & TECHNICAL PARTICULARS :

The ;tenderers shall supply the relevant information and technical

particulars called for in the schedule of guaranteed and technical

particulars as per Annexure –‘A’.

11.

QUALITY ASSURANCE :


To ensure that the goods/equipment under the scope of this contract

whether manufactured at the bidder’s works or at its sub-contractor’s

premises or at any other place of work are manufactured following

Quality Assurance Program. Such programs shall be outlined by the

bidder and shall be submitted along with the bid. A quality assurance

program of the bidder submitted by the bidder must cover the

following.

11.1 The bidder’s organization structure for the management and

implementation of the proposed quality assurance program.

11.2 Documentation control system.

11.3 Qualification data of key personnel.

11.4 The procedure for purchase of material parts, components and

selection of sub-contractor including vendor analysis, source

inspection, incoming raw materials inspection, verification of materials

purchased etc.

11.5 A quality plan detailing out the specific quality control procedure

adopted or controlling the quality of equipment during manufacturing.

11.6 System of quality audits.

12.

QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAM :

The quality assurance program shall be discussed with the successful

bidder after the award of the contract and the final version mutually

agreed between the purchaser and the bidder shall form a part of the

Contract Agreement signed between the purchaser and the bidder.


ANNEXURE –A

GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS.

1. Rated Lightning Arresters Voltage.

2. Rated Lightning Arresters Current.

3. Maximum continuous operating voltage.

4. Maximum residual voltage with 8/20 microsecond wave at

2.5 KA

5.0 KA

10.0 KA

1. High current short duration withstand current ( .4/10 microsecond

wave)

2. Maximum energy discharge capability.

3. Maximum steep current impulse Residual Voltage at 5 KA

discharge current.

4. One minute power frequency withstand voltage for arrester

housing.

a. Dry

b. Wet

5. Total creepage distance of arrester.

6. Temporary over voltage withstand capability.

0.1 second.

1.0 second.

10.0 second.


SECTION VII-D

DRAWINGS

UTTAR & DAKSHIN HARYANA BIJLI VITRAN NIGAM

Specification No. CSC- XXIX/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010

TECHNICALSPECIFICATION

FOR

PORCELAIN INSULATROS AND INSULATORS

FITTINGS FOR 11 KV OVERHEAD POWER LINES

Issue of the Month:

Common Specifications Committee UHBVN & DHBVN

Page 1 of 11

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PORCELAIN INSULATORS AND INSULATORS FITTINGS FOR 11 KV OVERHEAD LINES: 1. SCOPE :

This specification covers the details of the porcelain insulators and insulator fittings for use on 11 KV overhead power lines met with in rural Electric distribution systems.

2. APPLICABLE STANDARDS :

Except when they conflict with the specific requirements of this specification, the insulators shall comply with the Indian Standard Specification IS: 731 – 1971 or the latest version thereof and the insulator fittings shall comply with the Indian Standard Specification IS: 2486 (Part-I), IS – 2486 (Part-II) 1974 & IS: 3188 or the latest version thereof or equivalent international standards.

3. CLIMATIC CONDITIONS :

The equipment is required to operate satisfactory under the following site conditions:

1. Max. ambient air temperature 600C

2. Min. ambient air temperature (-)50C

3. Average Daily Max. ambient temperature 400C

4. Max. yearly weighted average ambient temperature

320C

5. Max. altitude above mean sea level (Meters) 1000

6. Minimum Relative Humidity (%age) 26

7. Max. Relative Humidity (%age) 95

8. Avg. No. of Rainy days/year 120

9. Avg. annual rainfall 900 mm

10. Maximum wind pressure 195 Kg./m Sq. 4. GENERAL REQUIREMENT :

4.1 The porcelain shall be sound free from defects thoroughly vitrified and smoothly glazed.

4.2 Unless otherwise specified, the glaze shall be brown in colours. The

glaze shall cover all the porcelain parts of the insulator except those areas which serve as support during firing or are left unglazed for the purpose of assembly.

4.3 The design of the insulator shall be such that stresses due to

expansion and contraction in any part of the insulator shall not lead to deterioration. The porcelain shall not engage directly with hard metal.

Page 2 of 11

4.4 Cement used in the construction of the insulator shall not cause

fracture kby expansion or loosing by contraction and proper care shall be taken to locate the individual parts correctly during cementing. The cement shall not give rise to chemical reaction with metal fittings and its thickness shall be as uniform as possible.

4.5 The insulators should preferably be manufactured in automatic

temperature controlled kilns to obtain uniform baking and better electrical & mechanical properties.

5. CLASSIFICATION AND DIMENSIONS :

5.1 Both pin & strain insulators shall conform to type B of IS: 731.

5.2 The dimension of pin insulators shall be as shown in the drawings.

5.3 The strain insulators shall be ball & socket type or Tongue & clevis type, as required by the purchaser. The dimensions of these insulators shall be as per IS: 2486 (Part-II).

6. TEST VOLTAGES :

The test voltages of insulators shall be as under:

Highest system voltage

Visible discharge test

Wet power frequency withstand test.

Power frequency puncture withstand test (Pin Insulators)

Power frequency puncture withstand test (Strain Insulators)

Impulse voltage withstand test.

KV (rms)

12

KV (rms) 9 KV (rms) 35

KV (rms) 105

KV (rms) 1.3 times the actual dry flash over voltage of insulator

KV (Peak) 75

7. FAILING LOAD :

7.1 Electro mechanical failing load (for Pin Insulators only). The

insulators shall be suitable for a minimum failing load of 5 KN applied

in transverse direction.

7.2 Electro mechanical failing load (for strain insulators only). The

insulators shall be suitable for a minimum failing load of 45 KN

applied in axially.

Page 3 of 11

8. CREEPAGE DISTANCE :

The maximum creepage distance shall be as under:

Heavily polluted Atmosphere Highest system voltage

Normal & moderately

polluted atmosphere

Pin Insulator strain insulator

12 KV 230 mm 320 mm 400 mm

Higher value of creepage distance has been specified for strain

insulators as these are normally used in horizontal position in 11 KV

lines.

9. TESTS:

The insulators shall comply with the following tests as per IS – 731 or

equivalent international standards.

9.1 TYPE TESTS :

The following shall constitute the type tests:

A) Visual examination.

B) Verification of dimensions.

C) Impulse voltage withstand test.

D) Wet power frequency voltage withstand test.

E) Temperature cycles test.

F) Electro – mechanical failing load test. (for strain insulator only).

G) Mechanical failing load test. (for Pin Insulator only).

H) Puncture test.

I) Porosity test.

J) Galvanizing test.

K) Visible discharge test.

L) 24 hours mechanical strength test. (for strain insulators only).

9.2 ACCEPTANCE TESTS :

The test samples after having withstood the routine test shall be

subjected to the following acceptance tests in the order indicated

below:

Page 4 of 11

A) Verification of dimensions.

B) Temperature cycle tests.

C) Electro mechanical failing load test (for strain insulator only).

D) Puncture test (for strain insulator only).

E) Porosity test and.

F) Galvanizing test.

9.3 ROUTINE TESTS :

The following test shall be carried out as routine tests:

A) Visual examination.

B) Mechanical routine test (for strain insulator only).

C) Electrical routine test. (for strain insulator only).

10. MARKING: 10.1 Each insulator shall be legibly and indelibly marked to show the

following: A) Name or trade mark of the manufacturer. B) Month and year of manufacture. C) Min. failing load in KN. D) ISI certification mark, if any.

10.1.1 Marking on porcelain shall be printed and shall be applied before firing.

11. PACKING :

All insulators (without fittings) shall be packed in wooden crates

suitable for easy and rough handling land acceptable for rail

transport, where more than one insulator is packed in a crate

wooden separators shall be fixed between the insulators to keep

individual insulator in position without movement within the crate.

PART-B INSULATOR FITTINGS :

12. SCOPE :

This specification covers details and test requirements for: 1) Pins for 11 KV Pin Insulators. 2) Fittings for strain insulators.

Page 5 of 11

13. APPLICABLE STANDARD :

Pins shall comply with the requirements of IS: 2486 (Part – I & II)

with latest amendments. Fitting for strain insulator shall comply with

the requirements of IS: 2486, Part-I to IV with latest amendments or

equivalent international standards.

14.1 Pins for Pin Insulators.

14.1.1 General requirements :

The pins shall be a single piece obtained preferably by the process

of forging. They shall not be made by joining, welding, shrink fitting

or any other process from more than one piece of material. They

shall be of good finish, free from flaws and other defects. The finish

of the cellar shall be such that a sharp angle between the cellar and

the shank is avoided.

All ferrous pins, nuts & washer except those made of stainless

steel shall be galvanized. The threads of nuts & tapped holes shall

be cut after galvanizing and shall be well oiled or greased.

14.2 DIMENSIONS :

Pins shall be of small steel head type S-I as per IS : 3486 (Part – II)

having stalk length of 165 mm and shank length of 150mm with

minimum failing load of 5 KN.

14.3 TEST :

Insulator pins shall comply with the following test as per IS: 2486

(Part-I) or equivalent international standards.

14.3.1 ACCEPTANCE TEST :

a) Checking of threads on heads.

b) Galvanizing test.

c) Mechanical test.

14.3.2 ROUTINE TEST :

Visual examination test.

14.3.3 TYPE TEST :

a) Checking of threads on heads.

b) Galvanizing test.

c) Mechanical test.

d) Visual examination test.

Page 6 of 11

15. STRAIN INSULATORS SETS :

15.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS :

All forging and casting shall be of good finish and free from laws and

other defects. All edges on the outside of fittings such as at the eye,

clevis & holes, shall be rounded. All parts of different fittings which

provide for interconnection shall be made such that sufficient

clearance is provided at the connection point to ensure free

movement and suspension of the insulator string assembly. All eye

and clevis connections shall be free but the care shall be taken that

too much clearance between eye & the tongues of the clevis is

avoided.

All ferrous fittings and the parts other than those stain less

steel, shall be galvanized, small fittings like spring washers, nuts etc.

may be electroplated with zinc.

15.1.1 TYPE :

Clevis and tongue type insulator set shall be supplied, the nominal

dimensions of the clevis and tongue type insulator set shall be as

given in IS: 2486.

15.1.2 TESTS :

Strain insulator sets shall comply with the following tests as per IS:

2486 (Part – I).

15.1.2.1 TYPE TESTS :

A) Mechanical test.

B) Electrical resistance test (for tension clamps only).

C) Heating cycles test (for tension clamps only).

15.1.2.2 SAMPLE TEST :

A) Dimensional.

B) Galvanizing check electroplating test.

15.1.2.3 ROUTINE TEST :

A) Visual check.

B) Mechanical test.

15.2 STRAIN CLAMPS :

Suitable aluminum alloys clamps shall be provided alongwith the

fittings to suit ACSR conductors 7/2. 11 mm – 7/3. 35mm. The

ultimate strength of clamps should not be less than 3000 Kgs.

Page 7 of 11

16. MARKING :

16.1 The caps and clamps shall have mark on them with the following

information :

a) Name or trade mark of the manufacture.

b) Country of manufacture.

17. PACKING :

17.1 For packing of GI pins, strain clamps & related hardware, double

gunny bags or wooden cases if deemed necessary shall be

employed. The heads & threads portions of pins & the fittings shall

be properly protected against damage. The gross weight of the

packing shall not normally exceed 50 Kg. Different fittings shall be

packed in different bags or cases and shall be complete with their

minor accessories fitted in place. All nuts shall be hand tightened

over the bolts & screwed up to the farthest point.

17.2 The packages containing fittings may also be marked with the ISI

certification mark.

18. TEST & TEST CERTIFICATES :

The tenderers shall submit Photostat copies of all the tests including

type test as prescribed in the relevant ISS from any accredited

laboratory

19. GUARANTEED & OTHER TECHNICAL PARTICULARS :

These particulars shall be furnished strictly as per Annexure –‘A’ in

duplicate. Any deviation from this specification shall be clearly

brought out separately.

20. PLACE OF MANUFACTURE :

The tender shall state the place of manufacturer, testing and name of

the manufacturer of the various items included in his Tender.

21. INSPECTION :

Inspection of material and supervision of test in accordance with the

relevant standards as mentioned in clause 2 & 13 above and

supporting drawing and schedules, and approved manufacturer

specification shall be carried out by the purchaser or his duly

authorized representative. The material shall be inspected and

tested before dispatch by an authorized representative of the

DHBVN in respect of quality. The manufacturer shall provide to the

Page 8 of 11

inspecting officer all reasonable facilities without charge to satisfy

him that the material is being furnished in accordance with the

specification.

The purchaser or his authorized representative shall have access to

all reasonable time to manufacturer’s works to inspect and witness

the test of the equipment manufactured.

The purchaser has the right to have the tests carried out at the cost

of supplier by an independent Govt. agency wherever there is a

dispute regarding the quality of material supplied.

The manufacturer shall be responsible to pay penalty of Rs

20,000/- for each occasion at which the fake inspection call has

been made or the material is rejected during testing/inspection

by the authorized agency/representative of the Nigam. This

penalty would be in addition to the expenses incurred by the

Nigam in deputing the Inspecting Officer, carrying out such

inspection.

22. Challenge Clause:-

The material offered/received after the inspection by the authorized

inspecting officer may again be subjected to the test for or any

parameter from any testing house/in-house technique of the Nigam &

the results if found deviating un-acceptable or not complying to

approved GTPs the bidder shall arrange to supply the replacement

within thirty (30) days of such detection at his cost including to & fro

transportation. In addition , penalty @10% of cost of the inspected lot

of material shall be imposed.

23. Warranty Period:-

The supplier shall be responsible to replace, free of cost, with no

transportation or insurance cost to the purchaser, up to destination,

the whole or any part to the material which in normal and proper use

proves the defective in quality or workmanship, subject to the

condition that the defect is noticed within 18 months from the date of

receipt of material in stores or 12 months from the date of

commissioning whichever period may expire earlier. The consignee

or nay other officer of Nigam actually using the material will give

Page 9 of 11

prompt notice of each such defect to the supplier. The replacement

shall be effected by the supplier within a reasonable time, but not, in

any case, exceeding 45 days. The supplier shall, also, arrange to

remove the defective within a reasonable period, but not exceeding

45 days from the date of issue of notice in respect thereof, failing

which, the purchaser reserve the right to dispose of defective

material in any manner considered fit by him (purchaser), at the sole

risk and cost of the supplier. Any sale proceeds of the defective

material after meeting the expenses incurred on its custody, disposal

handling etc., shall however be credited to the supplier’s account and

set off against any outstanding dues of the purchaser against the

supplier. The warranty for 12/18 months shall be one time.

Director/Technical-I, UHBNV, Panchkula

Director/Project,DHBVN, Hisar

CGM/PD&C, UHBVN, Panchkula

CGM/P&D, DHBVN, Hisar.

FA & CAO/MM, UHBNV, Panchkula

FA & CAO/MM, DHBVN, Hisar

GM/P&D, UHBNV, Panchkula

GM/P&D, DHBVN, Hisar

Page 10 of 11

ANNEXURE –A

GURANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF PORCELAIN INSULATORS FOR 11 KV OVERHEAD POWER LINE :

1. Maker’s name and country.

2. Nominal voltage.

3. Highest voltage.

4. Dry one minute power frequencies withstand voltage.

5. Wet Dry one minute power frequencies withstand voltage.

6. Power frequencies withstand voltage.

7. Impulse withstand voltage (1/50 second positive waves ).

8. Visible discharge test voltage.

9. Impulse flashover voltage (1/50 micro second positive waves).

10. Impulse flashover voltage (1/50 micro second negative waves).

11. Dry flashover voltage.

12. Wet flashover voltage.

13. Min. failing load.

14. Minimum creepage distance.

15. Weight per unit.

16. Size of insulators.

17. Standard to which the insulator shall be manufactured and tested.

18. Tolerance in dimensions, if any.

Page 11 of 11


C:\Documents and Settings\Administrator\Desktop\14-12-09\PDC\CSC-XXV to XXXI\CSC-XXVIII.docPage 1 of 8

Specification No. CSC- /DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010


OF

“11 kV 400 A GO SWITCHES”

Issue Month: Common Specifications

Committee UHBVN & DHBVN



TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR 11 kV 400 A GANG OPERATED SWITCHES

1. SCOPE This specification covers the design, manufacture, testing at manufacturer’s works of supply & delivery of 11KV 400 A G.O. switches complete with manually operated equipment and accessories required for their satisfactory operation for their use on distribution sub-station and tapping/sectionalizing points of 11 KV lines.

2. APPLICABLE STANDARDS & DESCRIPTION i) All material used for manufacturing 11 KV G.O. Switches i.e. 11 KV Post

Insulators, G.I.Pipe, MS Channel, Brass Male/Female contacts & Arcing Horns shall comply with the Indian Standard Specification IS: 2544, IS: 5340 (Part-III) and IS: 9921 (Part I to V). However, Material manufactured as per any other international standard offering material, quality and workmanship of equivalence or better shall also be acceptable. The detailed description of equipment shall be as under:

ii) 11 KV, 400 Amps, triple pole gang operated, outdoor type, single throw, single

break tilting type manually operated. Air Break Switches, suitable for vertical mounting on structures 6 meters above ground level fitted with 2 no. 11 KV Post Insulators per phase, i.e. 6 no. Post Insulators per switch of standard make conforming to latest versions of IS-2544 & IS-5350 (Part-III) complete with fixed & moving contacts base of gun metal cast/, duly electroplated and jaw (U) fixed with spring able strips. The movable contacts i.e. blades will be made of gunmetal/brass/copper casting, duly electroplated. Multi-bolt type clamps of non-ferrous metal will be provided for incoming and outgoing connections. Fixed and moving contacts complete with G.I. Arcing horns fitted on 11KV Post Insulators will be mounted on suitable MS Channel (Vertical). Phase coupler bar will be of 32mm diameter galvanized iron pipe. Operating rod shall be of 25 mm inner diameter and 32 mm outer diameter G. I. Pipe having free length of 5100 mm excluding the length of handle. The sizes of rods used for arcing horns would be 2 SWG M.S. The complete equipment shall be as per latest version of IS-9921 (Part-I to V). MS Channel, C.I. casting for lever and side plates are to be hot dipped Galvanized as per relevant ISS. All other ferrous parts including nuts, bolts and washers are to be hot dipped galvanized. All Current carrying nuts, bolts and washers are to be hot dipped galvanized. The equipment supplied shall also conform to detailed specification with guaranteed technical particulars and approved drawings attached herewith.

3. PARTICULARS OF SYSTEM. The switches shall be used on three-phase 11 KV 50 Hz A.C. Power system having solidly grounded neutral.

4. CLIMATIC CONDITIONS: The equipment/material to be supplied against this specification shall be suitable for satisfactory operation under the following climatic Conditions


ii) Max ambient temperature (deg.c) - 60 iii) Min ambient air temperature (deg. c) -5 iv) Max average daily ambient temperature

(deg. c) 40



v) Max. yearly weighed average ambient temperature (deg. C)

32

vi) Max. altitude above mean sea level (Meters)

1000

vii) Minimum Relative Humidity (%age ) 26 viii) Max. Relative Humidity (%age) 95 ix) Avg. no of Rainy days/ year 120 x) Avg. annual rainfall 900mm xi) Maximum wind pressure 195 Kg./m2

The equipment shall be for use in moderately hot and humid tropical climate, conducive to rust and fungus growth.

5. Rating Nominal system voltage 12 KV Rated voltage 11 KV Rated current 400 Amps. Rated Frequency 50 HZ Peak current in closed position. 46 KA One minute power frequency withstand voltage between

I) Earth & poles 28 KV (rms) ii) Across terminal of open switch. 32 KV (rms)

Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage between

I) Poles & Earth. 75 KV (Peak) ii) Across terminal of open switch. 85 KV (Peak)

Min. short time current 18.42 KA for 1 second.

6. SWITCH INSULATION Insulation to ground, insulation between open contacts and insulation between phases of the completely assembled G.O. Switches shall be capable of withstanding the dielectric test voltages specified in IS-9921-Part-IV. Insulation between open contacts of a pole shall at least be 15 % more than the insulation between the live parts of pole to ground, so that If any flashover occurs when switch is open, it shall be to the ground. All insulators provided to form a stack shall conform to the relevant Indian Standard Specifications. The porcelain shall be homogeneous and free from all cavities and flaws. Design of insulators shall ensure ample insulation, mechanical strength and rigidity for satisfactory operation under site conditions. The design shall also ensure that the losses caused by capacitive current or conduction through dielectric are minimum and that leakage due to moist and dirty insulators surfaces is least. All metal caps and supports shall be cemented to the porcelain whereas the blades and contact blocks shall be bolted to the metal parts of the insulators thus making the replacement of damaged insulators easy. All ferrous metal parts, flanges, bolts and nuts etc. shall be galvanized. The porcelain post insulators should be from the leading manufacturers like LAMCO, CGL, OBLEM, ELPRO, Raychem RPG, WS, Jayashree, only.

7. G.O. SWITCH OPERATION AND OPERATING MECHANISM The switches shall be suitable for local manual operation. The Operating mechanism shall comprise of operating pipe with intermediate couplings and manual operating handle. Height of operating handle may vary from 1000 to 1300mm. The operating mechanism shall give good mechanical leverage with minimum loose/lost motions. There shall be suitable pad-locking arrangement for both ‘ON and OFF’ positions.



8. BEARING Graded cast rocking type levers supported on side plates/fabricated type as per drawings. Bearing housing shall be weather proof and facilities shall be provided for easy lubrication.

9. PACKING & TRANSPORTATION. The supplier shall be responsible for suitable packing of all the material and marking on the consignment to ensure correct dispatch to the destination. All G.O. Switches shall be packed suitably capable of withstanding rough handling for transportation to the various consignees so as to avoid any shortage and damage occurring during transit. Separators shall be fixed between the post insulators and other breakable parts of GO Switch and also between individual GO Switches so as to prevent relative movement to avoid damage. All the labels used on each packing shall be of tin securely bounded with wire and shall have the descriptive marking stamped thereon. All GO Switches damaged during transportation shall be to the suppliers account.

10. DESIGN FEATURE

10.1 Contact System

The male and female contacts assemblies shall be of sturdy construction and design to ensure

I. Electro dynamic withstand ability during short circuits. II. Thermal withstand-ability during short circuits. III. Constant contact pressure even when the live parts of the insulator stacks are

subject to tensile stresses due to linear expansion of connected bus bar of flexible conductors either because of temperature variation or strong winds.

IV. Self-wiping action during closing and opening. V. Self-alignment assuring closing of the switch without calling for any

adjustment.

10.2 Temperature Rise Maximum temperature attained by any part of the isolating switches when in service at site under continuous and exposed continuously to the direct rays of sun and the air having temperature of 60 degree centigrade shall not exceed the permissible limits fixed by latest edition IS-9921 (Part-I to V). Maximum temperature rise under the above noted condition should not exceed the permissible limits when corrected for the difference between ambient temperature at site and the reference ambient temperature in IS-9921 (Part-I to V).

10.2.1 Arcing horns

A set of adjustable arcing horns made from 2 SWG G. I. Wire shall be mounted on each insulator stack of G.O. Switch. The supplier shall supply a graph showing impulse and power frequency spark over voltage for various gap settings of arcing horns.

11. CURRENT CARRYING PARTS All current carrying parts shall be of non-ferrous metal or alloys and shall be designed to limit sharp points/edges. Design of isolating contacts shall permit easy maintenance and renewal of contacts.

12. NAME PLATES The switches shall be provided with a nameplate, which contains the information in accordance with IS-9921 (part I to V). The name plates will be weather and rust proof.



13. COMPLETENESS OF EQUIPMENT All fittings, accessories or apparatus which may not have been specially mentioned in this specification but which are otherwise necessary for satisfactory working of G.O. switches shall be deemed to have been included in the scope of supply.

14. TYPE TESTS The principle components of G.O switches shall be Type Tested as per relevant clauses of IS-9921 (part-I to V) or latest version there of. Two sets of copies of Type Test certificates carried out only at CPRI, ERDA, NPL or any other Govt. of India approved lab / testing house shall be accepted. Further type tests carried out from the said testing houses on similar equipment, not earlier than 3 years on date of opening of bids shall be acceptable. Bids not accompanied with copies of Type Test certificates from CPRI, ERDA, NPL or any other Govt. of India approved lab / testing house, are liable to be rejected. The firm shall state the testing facilities available at their works.

The following shall comprise type tests. (a) Tests to verify the insulation level, including withstand tests at power-

frequency voltage on auxiliary equipment. (b) Tests to prove that the temperature rise of any part does not exceed the

limits.

(c) Tests to prove the capability of the disconnector or earthing Switch to carry the rated peak withstand current and the rated short-time withstands current.

(d) Tests to prove the short circuit making capacity of earthing switches. (e) Tests to prove satisfactory operation and mechanical endurance.

15. ROUTINE TESTS Routine tests as per latest edition of IS-9921 (part-I to V) shall be carried out at works of the manufacturer.

The following shall comprise Routine tests:- (a) Power frequency voltage dry test. (b) Measurement of the resistance of the main circuit. (c) Operating test.

Copies of Routine test certificates shall be supplied along with the acceptance tests carried out in the presence of purchaser’s authorized representative. All tests reports shall be submitted and shall be got approved by the purchaser or his authorized representative before dispatch.

16. INSPECTION Testing and inspection of material in accordance with the relevant ISS as mentioned in clause ‘Applicable standards’ above and as per drawings approved by the purchaser, shall be carried out by the purchaser or his duly authorised representative at works of the manufacturers. The manufacturer shall provide to the inspecting officer all reasonable facilities without charge to satisfy him that the material is being furnished in accordance with the specification. The purchaser or his authorised representative shall have access at all reasonable times to manufacturer’s works to inspect and witness the tests of the equipment manufactured.



The purchaser has the right to have the tests carried out at the cost of the supplier by an independent Govt. agency, wherever there is a dispute regarding the quality of material supplied.

17. Drawings The bidder shall submit two sets of detailed dimensional drawing indicating there in the material used for various components. Manufacture of material shall not be commenced before receipt of approved drawings from the purchaser. Material not complying with dimensional drawings shall be rejected.

18. Guaranteed Technical Particulars Guaranteed Technical Particulars as detailed in Annexure – I shall be submitted along with the Tender. Tenders with out accompanying GTP’S shall not be accepted.


The supplier shall be responsible to replace, free of cost, with no transportation or insurance cost to the Purchaser, up to destination, the whole or any part of the material which in normal and proper use proves the defective in quality or workmanship, subject to the condition that the defect is noticed within 18 months from the date of receipt of material in stores OR 12 months from the date of commissioning whichever period may expire earlier. The consignee or any other officer of Nigam actually using the material will give prompt notice of each such defect to the supplier. The replacement shall be effected by the supplier within a reasonable time, but not, in any case, exceeding 45 days. The supplier shall, also, arrange to remove the defective within a reasonable period, but not exceeding 45 days from the date of issue of notice in respect thereof, failing which, the purchaser reserve the right to dispose of defective material in any manner considered fit by him (Purchaser), at the sole risk and cost of the supplier. Any sale proceeds of the defective material after meeting the expenses incurred on its custody, disposal handling etc., shall however be credited to the supplier’s account and set off against any outstanding dues of the purchaser against the supplier. The warranty for 12/18 months shall be one time.

20. CHALLENGE CLAUSEThe material offered/received after the inspection by the authorized inspecting officer may again be subjected to the test for losses or any other parameter from any Testing House/in-house technique of the Nigam & the results if found deviating un-acceptable or not complying to approved GTP's the bidder shall arrange to supply the replacement within thirty (30) days of such detection at his cost including to & fro transportation. In addition to this penalty @10% of cost of the inspected lot of material shall be imposed. This issues with the approval of Common Specifications Committee. General Manager/P&D Cum-Member Secretary CSC UHBVN Panchkula



Annexure-I GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR 11KV, 400 Amps G.O. SWITCHES

G.O. SWITCHES:-

1. Name of manufacturer

2. No. of breaks per pole.

3. No. of poles

4. Rated voltage

5. Rated frequency

6. Rated current

7. Minimum short time current (KA for 1sec.)

8. Max. temp. rise of contacts

9. Material of moving contact

10. Material of arcing horns

11. Material and size of operation handle & rod

12. Size of base channels

13. Type of bearings.

14. Minimum clearance between phases

15. Minimum clearance between phases & earth.

16. 1.2/50 microsecond Impulse withstand voltage

i) Across isolating distance

ii) Between poles and earth.

17. One minute power frequency withstand voltage

(B) POST INSULATORS

18. Name of manufacturer

19. Type of insulators

20. Height of the insulator:

21. Creepage distance (Min.)

22. Weight of each unit



23. Flash over voltage:

(i) Dry power frequency

(ii) Wet power frequency

(iii) Impulse withstand voltage of 1.2/50 micro seconds(+ve)

(iv) Impulse withstand voltage of 1.2/50 micro seconds(-ve)

24. Withstand voltages

(i) Power frequency one minute dry withstand voltage

(ii) Power frequency one minute impulse wet withstand voltage

(iii) Impulse withstand voltage micro seconds (+ve polarity)

(iv) Impulse withstand voltage of 1.2/50 micro seconds (-ve polarity)

25. Power frequency puncture withstand voltage of unit

26. Cantilever strength upright position

27. Cantilever strength in under hung position

Tensile strength Name of Signatory with stamp

Subject: Amendment in Technical Specification of 11 kV 400 A GANG OPERATED SWITCHES

Sr. No. Clause No. Existing Amended

1. 6. SWITCH

INSULATION

The porcelain post insulators should be from the leading manufacturers like LAMCO, CGL, OBLEM, ELPRO, Raychem RPG, WS, Jayashree, only

The porcelain post insulators should be of any make , however , separate type test for 11 kV post insulator shall have to be supplied by the supplier in addition to the overall type test being submitted for GO switch as a complete unit


TECHNICALSPECIFICATION FOR

11 KV LIGHTNING ARRESTOR.


TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR 11 KV LIGHTNING

ARRESTER FOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 5 KA, SERIES “B”. 1.

SCOPE :

This specification covers the design, manufacture, testing, inspection at

manufacturer’s works & delivery of 11 KV lightning arrestors.

2.


The material shall conform in all respects to the relevant IEC standards with latest amendments thereof. The bidder shall use ISS where corresponding IEC is not available. However, where both the standards are available, IEC will be used. IEC or other National Standards are permitted where these are equivalent or superior to IEC. In such cases salient points of difference between the standards adopted and the IEC standards shall be clearly brought out in the relevant schedule Four copies of such standards with authentic English translation shall be finished alongwith the offer.

3.


The equipment is required to operate satisfactorily under the following

site conditions :

TEMPERATURE :

A) Maximum temperature of air 50 Degree C B) Minimum temperature of air -2.5 Degree C.

RELATIVE HUMIDITY :

A) Maximum 100% B) Minimum 26% Isoceraunic Level 45


Average rainfall per year 900 mm Altitude Below 1000 M. Above sea level. Maximum wind pressure 150 Kg./Sq.m. No. of rainy days per year Nearly 4 months In a year.

4.

TECHNICAL PARTICULARS :

The Lightning Arrestors shall be of Metal Oxide Gapless type suitable

for outdoor installation on 11000 volts, 50 cycles per ;second, 3 phase

A.C. system with neutral solidly grounded. The highest line to line

system voltage should be 12.0 KV (rms) and other particulars are as

under :

A) Voltage rating in KV RMS 9 KV rms.

B) Nominal discharge current rating 5 KVA.

C) Maximum residual test voltage specified 34 KV peak with

8/20 micro second

current waves.

5.

DRAWINGS :

The tendered along with tender, should offer dimensional drawings and

illustrated descriptive literature of the equipment.

6.

TESTS :

The type routine and acceptance as per IS : 3010 (Part-III)/IEC Ch-4

(1991) with latest version thereof shall be carried out.


7.

INSPECTION :

The material shall be inspected and tested before despatch by an

authorized representative of the Nigam in respect of quality. The

manufacturer shall provide the necessary facilities for such inspection.

In case the supplier is not in a position to get these test carried out at

his works, such tests may be got carried out by him at any Govt.

recognized testing agency at his own expense.

8.

TEST CERTIFICATES :

The supplier shall supply certificates as per IS –3070/99 –4 with latest

amendment thereof from a recognized Government agency for

approval of the purchaser.

9.

MARKING :

Each lightning arrestor shall be provided with a name plate or plae

legibly and indelibly marked with the name or trade mark of the

manufacturer and country of Manufacture rated voltage, nominal

discharge current, type destination and serial number of the Lightning

Arrestor, identification mark on each separately housed unit to enable

it to be replaced in correct position after a multi unit arrestor has been

dismantled should also be marked ISI certification mark may also be

marked.

10.

GUARANTEED & TECHNICAL PARTICULARS :

The ;tenderers shall supply the relevant information and technical

particulars called for in the schedule of guaranteed and technical

particulars as per Annexure –‘A’.

11.

QUALITY ASSURANCE :


To ensure that the goods/equipment under the scope of this contract

whether manufactured at the bidder’s works or at its sub-contractor’s

premises or at any other place of work are manufactured following

Quality Assurance Program. Such programs shall be outlined by the

bidder and shall be submitted along with the bid. A quality assurance

program of the bidder submitted by the bidder must cover the

following.

11.1 The bidder’s organization structure for the management and

implementation of the proposed quality assurance program.

11.2 Documentation control system.

11.3 Qualification data of key personnel.

11.4 The procedure for purchase of material parts, components and

selection of sub-contractor including vendor analysis, source

inspection, incoming raw materials inspection, verification of materials

purchased etc.

11.5 A quality plan detailing out the specific quality control procedure

adopted or controlling the quality of equipment during manufacturing.

11.6 System of quality audits.

12.

QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAM :

The quality assurance program shall be discussed with the successful

bidder after the award of the contract and the final version mutually

agreed between the purchaser and the bidder shall form a part of the

Contract Agreement signed between the purchaser and the bidder.


ANNEXURE –A

GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS.

1. Rated Lightning Arresters Voltage.

2. Rated Lightning Arresters Current.

3. Maximum continuous operating voltage.

4. Maximum residual voltage with 8/20 microsecond wave at

2.5 KA

5.0 KA

10.0 KA

1. High current short duration withstand current ( .4/10 microsecond

wave)

2. Maximum energy discharge capability.

3. Maximum steep current impulse Residual Voltage at 5 KA

discharge current.

4. One minute power frequency withstand voltage for arrester

housing.

a. Dry

b. Wet

5. Total creepage distance of arrester.

6. Temporary over voltage withstand capability.

0.1 second.

1.0 second.

10.0 second.

DAKSHIN HARYANA BIJ LI VITRAN NIGAM

Office of the Chief General Manager/P&D, Vidyut Sadan, Vidyut Nagar, His ar-125005

Tel: 01662-221285, 221830 (GM/P&D) Fax: 01662-220481

Technica l Spec ifica tion

For

GALVANISED STEEL BARBED WIRE Chief General Manager / P&D, DHBVN, His ar

Is s ue of the Month: Page 94 of 129

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR GALVANISED STEEL BARBED WIRE

1. SCOPE: This Specification covers the manufacture, testing & inspecting of galvanised steel barbed wire (glidden type) formed with 2 line wires twisted together, one containing the barbs.

2. APPLICABLE STANDARD: Except when they conflict with the specific requirements in this specification, the conductors shall comply in all respect with the Indian standard specification No. IS: 278 (1978) & 4826 (1979) or the latest version thereof.

3. CLIMATIC CONDITIONS: The Barbed wire is required to work satisfactorily under the

following climatic conditions:- 0

3.1 Max. temperature 50 C

3.2 Min. temperature - 2.5 C 3.3 Max. relative humidity 100%

0

3.4 Min. relative humidity 26%

3.5 Average number of rainy days Nearly Nearly 120 days.

3.6 Average annual rain fall 900 mm

3.7 Average number of dust storms days per annum 35

3.8 Isoceraunic level 45

3.9 Max. wind pressure; 195 Kg/ Sq meter.

3.10 Altitude above mean sea level less than Less than 1000 Mtrs.

4. TECHNICAL PARTICULAR: (i) Nominal dia meter of line wire:

(ii) Nominal dia meter of point wire:

(iii) Nominal distane between two barbs:

(iv) Weight of completed barbed wire:

(v) Tensile strength of wire

(vi) Minimum breaking load of completed Barbed wire

2.24 mm + 0.08 mm

2.00 mm + 0.08 mm

75 mm + 12 mm

Max. 106 g/M

Min. 97 g/m

40 to 60 Kg f/mm

300 Kgf.

5. TESTS : The tests as per IS:278/1978 including the tests for chemical analysis provided therein shall be carried out.

The uniformity of zinc coating sPhagell1b19 otfe4s6t6ed as specified in IS: 4826-1979.

6. TEST CERTIFICATE: The supplier shall supply one set of certificates from recognized govt. agency in respect of quality as per IS: 278-1979 with latest amendments for approval of the purchaser.

7. MARKING: Each coil of barbed wire shall be legibly marked with the name of the manufacturer, the type of the barbed wire, the diameter of the line & point wire/barb spacing and length & weight of the coil. Barbed wire may also be marked with IST certification mark.

8. INSPECTION: All tests & inspection shall be made at the place of manufacture unless otherwise especially agreed upon by the manufacturer and the purchaser at the time of purchase. The manufacturer shall afford the inspector /representing of the purchaser all reasonable facilities, without charge, to satisfy him that the material is being furnished in accordance with this specification. The purchaser or his authorised representative shall have access at all reasonable times to manufacturer’s works to inspect & witness tests of the conductor being manufactured. As regards correctness of the length of galvanized steel barbed wire, the same is subject final checking and measurement by the consignee & the firm shall be responsible for all shortages, damages etc, if any.

9. GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS : Guaranteed technical particulars of the barbed wire should be given in the Annexure ‘A’ attached herewith the specification. Any other particulars considered necessary by the supplier may also be given in addition to these listed in the Annexure.

10. PACKING & WEIGHT OF COIL: The barbed wire shall be supply in coils weighting 15 Kgs to 30 Kgs.

** Page 120 of 466

Annexure ‘A’

GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF GALVANISED STEEL BARBED WIRE

1. Code word.

2. Maker’s name address & country

3. Nominal dia meter of line wire

4. Nominal distance between two barbs:

5. Tensile strength of wire.

6. Minimum breaking load of barbed wire.

7. Weight of complete barbed wire.

8. Nominal dia meter of point wire.

9. Standard length.

10. Tolerance, if any.

11. Standard to which confirm. i)

Galvanising.

ii) Barbed wire.

12. Other particulars, if any.

_______________________________________________________________________

Page 1 of 10

Specification No. CSC- 55/DH/UH/P&D/2010-2011

TEHNCIAL SPECIFICATION

FOR

HT AERIAL BUNCHED CABLE

WITH

XLPE INSULATION

Issue Month: Sep. 2010 Common Specifications Committee

UHBVN &DHBVN

_______________________________________________________________________

Page 2 of 10

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR X-LINKED POLYPTHYLENE INSULATED

AND PVC SHEATHED H.T. AERIAL BUNCHED CABLES.

1. SCOPE:

This specification covers manufacture, testing before dispatch, supply and

delivery of ISI marked, 11 KV grade XLPE insulated screened all Aluminium

conductor and PVC sheathed power cables conforming to IS-7098 (Part-

Ii)/1985 with up to date amendments, suitable for solidly earthed system

manufactured with dry cure technology (Nitrogen gas i.e with inert gas

curing during using CCV system or with STOPLAS).

2. APPLICABLE STANDARDS

The cable covered under this specification shall conform in all respect with

the latest editions of IS-14255: 1995, IS:7098 (Part-II)/1985, IS-398 (part-4)

1979, IS:10810(series)& IS: 8130-1984 or IEC equivalent thereof. The

aluminium conductor complying to IS: 8130-1984 shall be used.


The material to be supplied against this specification shall be

suitable for satisfactory operation under the following climatic Conditions


Haryana ii) Maximum ambient temperature (oC) 60 iii) Minimum ambient air temperature (oC) -5 iv) Maximum average daily ambient temperature

(oC) 40


32

vi) Maximum altitude above mean sea level (m) 1000 vii) Minimum Relative Humidity (%) 26 viii) Maximum Relative Humidity (%) 95 ix) Average no of Rainy days/ year 120 x) Average annual rainfall 900 mm xi) Maximum wind pressure 195 kg/m sq.

The material shall be for use in moderately hot and humid tropical

climate, conducive to rust and fungus growth

4. CONDUCTORS:

The Aluminium conductors shall comply with the requirements as specified

in IS-8130-1984 with up to date amendments. The stranded conductor

shall be clean and reasonably uniform in size and shape and its surface

shall be free from sharp edges. Not more than two joints shall be allowed in

any of the wires form and every complete length of conductor and no joint

shall be within 300 mm of any other joint in the same layer. Joints shall be

brazed, silver soldered or electric or gas welded. No joint shall be made in

the conductor once, it has been stranded.

_______________________________________________________________________

Page 3 of 10

5. INSULATION:

The insulation shall be chemically cross linked polyethylene conforming to

the physical, electrical and ageing properties as required in the

specification, cross-linking may be done by exposure to organize peroxide

with nitrogen curing CCV line, method with the intention to ensure lowest

free formation. Only natural unfilled compound shall be used for insulation

of cables. The average thickness of insulation when measured in

accordance with relevant clause of the specification shall not be less than

the standard thickness value specified. The smallest of the measured

values of thickness shall not fall below the standard thickness values as

specified in IS:7098 (Part-II) / 1985 by more than 0.1+0.1 standard

thickness in mm.

6. SCREENING:

The screening of insulated cables shall consist of conductor screening and

insulation screening.

i) Screening materials:

Two types of materials may be used for screening of cables non-metallic

and metallic.

ii) Conductor screening:

Conductor screening shall be non-metallic and shall consist of either semi-

conducting compound or a layer of extruded-semi-conducting linked

ploythine compound of thickness not less than 0.5mm.

iii) Insulation screening:

The insulation screening shall consist of non-metallic semi-conducting part

in combination with a metallic part. Non-metallic part shall be applied either

directly over the insulation of each core and shall consist of either a semi-

conducing tape or a layer of extruded semi-conducting compound or a

combination of these materials.

iv) Metallic Screening

The metallic part shall be applied over the individual core. Metallic

screening shall consist of copper tape sheath and shall be non-magnetic

when applied to either in single core or multi-core cables. For single core

cables, armouring shall constitute the metallic part of the screening.

7. OUTER SHEATH:

Over the armouring the cable shall be provided with extruded PVC outer

sheath. The composition of the PVC compound for outer sheath shall be

Pre-Type ST2 of IS-5831-1984. The colour of the outer sheath shall be

black. The average thickness of the sheath shall not be less than the

standard values specified in the IS when measured as laid in IS-7098 (Part-

II) / 1985. The smallest thickness of the measured values of sheath shall

_______________________________________________________________________

Page 4 of 10

not fall below the standard value, (s) specified, by more than 0.2+0.2 (ts)

mm.

8. CORE IDENTIFICATION:

The core identification shall be done by providing coloured strip under

Copper Tape.

9. MESSENGER WIRE:

Messenger wire, shall consist of Aluminium alloy wires. Aluminium alloy

wires, shall be as per IS:398 (Part-IV) / 1978 and wing shall be tested as

per relevant IS.

10. LAYING UP:

Three Power Cores shall be twisted over bare messenger wire with right

hand direction of lay. This will form the Aerial Bunched Cable.

11. TESTS:

11.1 Copies of the type test certificates in respect of all the type-tests as per

IS:7098 (Part-2) / 1985 for similar type of XLPE cables, from any

Government recognized testing labs shall be submitted along with the

tender.

11.1.2 LIST OF TYPE TESTS:

a) TESTS ON CONDUCTOR:

i) Tensile test (for Aluminium)

ii) Wrapping test (for Aluminium)

iii) Resistance test

b) Test for thickness of insulation and sheath.

c) Physical tests for insulation.

i) Tensile strength and elongation at break.

ii) Ageing in air oven.

iii) Hot test.

iv) Shrinkage test.

v) Water absorption (Gravimetric)

d) Physical tests for outer sheath:-

i) Tensile strength and elongation at break.

ii) Ageing in air oven.

iii) Shrinkage test.

iv) Hot deformation.

e) Bleeding and blooming test (for outer sheath).

f) Partial discharge test.

g) Bending test.

h) Dielectric power factor test:

i) As a function of voltage

ii) As a function of temperature

_______________________________________________________________________

Page 5 of 10

i) Insulation resistance (Volume resistivity) test.

j) Heating cycle test.

k) Impulse withstand test.

l) High voltage test.

m) Flammability test

11.2 List of type test for messenger wire: a) Breaking load test on individual Aluminium Alloy wire.

b) Resistance test.

c) Elongation test.

12.2. ACCEPTANCE TESTS:

The following shall be carried out as acceptance tests:

a) Tensile test (for Aluminium)

b) Wrapping test (for Aluminium)

c) Conductor resistance test.

d) Test for thickness of insulation and sheath.

e) Partial discharge test (for screened cables only)

f) High voltage test.

g) Hot set test for insulator.

h) Tensile strength and elongation at break test for insulation and sheath.

i) Insulation resistance (Volume resistively) test

13. ROUTINE TESTS:

The following shall be carried out as routine tests:

a) Conductor resistance test (for Aluminium and copper)

b) Partial discharge test (for screened cables only)

c) High voltage test.

Type test / acceptance test / routine tests and or other test required as per

relevant Indian Standard shall be got conducted.

14. INSPECTION:

An authorized representative of the Nigam shall inspect, examine and test

the equipment/material in respect of quality, size and ratings as per relevant

ISS/IEC with latest amendments at the manufacturers’ works during or after

the manufacture of goods prior to dispatch on receipt of a clear notice of

minimum two weeks in advance to be reckoned from the date of receipt of

the same by the purchaser. No material will be allowed to be dispatched

without prior inspection and approval. The inspecting officer of the

purchaser may also inspect the material during the course of manufacture.

In case, inspection of any consignment is waived off by the purchaser, the

supplier will be required to furnish the requisite test certificates (for

acceptance as well as routine tests) for approval. It will be the responsibility

of the supplier to make adequate arrangements for testing of material at

_______________________________________________________________________

Page 6 of 10

their works without any additional charge to the purchaser. All testing

instruments and appliances will be made available and material

destroyed/consumed during testing will be to the account of the supplier.

The purchase reserves the right to carry out Type Test as per Indian

Standard Specifications with latest version thereof. These tests will be

carried out at an Independent & recognized test house/agency/laboratory.

All expenses whatsoever for carrying out these tests shall be to the

supplier’s account. The purchaser has the right to have the tests carried

out at any Govt./Recognized Test agency in case of dispute in quality, size

and ratings as per relevant ISS.

15 FAKE INSPECTION CALLS

In case the supplier makes a fake inspection call i.e., the material is not

found ready by the Inspecting Officer deputed by the Nigam for inspection,

the supplier shall be liable to pay the expenses incurred by the Nigam on

this account subject to minimum of a fixed penalty of Rs. 20,000/- for each




transportation or insurance cost to the Purchaser, up to destination, the

whole or any part of the material which in normal and proper use proves the

defective in quality or workmanship, subject to the condition that the defect

is noticed within 78 months from the date of receipt of material in stores or

72 months from the date of commissioning whichever period may expire

earlier. The consignee or any other officer of Nigam actually using the

material will give prompt notice of each such defect to the supplier. The

replacement shall be effected by the supplier within a reasonable time, but

not, in any case, exceeding 45 days. The supplier shall, also, arrange to

remove the defective within a reasonable period, but not exceeding 45 days

from the date of issue of notice in respect thereof, failing which, the

purchaser reserve the right to dispose of defective material in any manner

considered fit by him (Purchaser), at the sole risk and cost of the supplier.

Any sale proceeds of the defective material after meeting the expenses

incurred on its custody, disposal handling etc., shall however be credited to

the supplier’s account and set off against any outstanding dues of the

purchaser against the supplier. The warranty for 72/78 months shall be one

time.

17. SEQUENTIAL MARKING:

Supplier shall provide non erasable sequential marking on one core of AB

Cable at every one metre distance before assembly of different cores to

_______________________________________________________________________

Page 7 of 10

form the cable. However, the length of cable for acceptance shall be based

on length of finished cable and not on the basis of sequential marks.

18. PACKING & MARKING:

The cable shall be supplied in suitable non-returnable wooden drums of

suitable size in standard lengths subject to a tolerance of +/- 5%. The cable

shall be wrapped with polythene under wooden covering. Each meter

length shall be embossed with the trade name of manufacturer and the

work “UHBVN CABLE”.

The ends of the cable shall be sealed by means of non-hygroscopic sealing

material. In addition to this each drum shall carry the following information

either stenciled on flange or label attached to it.

a) Manufacturer’s name.

b) Trade mark, if any.

c) A reference to ISS i.e. IS-7098 (Part-II) / 1985.

d) Length of the cable on the drum.

e) Voltage grade and type of the cable.

f) Colour of outer sheath.

g) Nominal cross-sectional area of the cable conductor.

h) Purchase order No. & Date.

i) Name and address of consignee.

j) Number of cores.

k) Gross weight of packed and net weight of the power cable.

l) Drum No. & its direction of rotation (with an arrow)

m) Year of manufacture.

n). ISI MARK. ISI mark cable shall be preferred.

19 FAKE INSPECTION CALLS



the supplier shall be liable to pay the expenses incurred by the Nigam on

this account subject to minimum of a fixed penalty of Rs. 20,000/- for each




transportation or insurance cost to the Purchaser, up to destination, the

whole or any part of the material which in normal and proper use proves the

defective in quality or workmanship, subject to the condition that the defect

is noticed within 78 months from the date of receipt of material in stores or

72 months from the date of commissioning whichever period may expire

earlier. The consignee or any other officer of Nigam actually using the

material will give prompt notice of each such defect to the supplier. The

_______________________________________________________________________

Page 8 of 10

replacement shall be effected by the supplier within a reasonable time, but

not, in any case, exceeding 45 days. The supplier shall, also, arrange to

remove the defective within a reasonable period, but not exceeding 45 days

from the date of issue of notice in respect thereof, failing which, the

purchaser reserve the right to dispose of defective material in any manner

considered fit by him (Purchaser), at the sole risk and cost of the supplier.

Any sale proceeds of the defective material after meeting the expenses

incurred on its custody, disposal handling etc., shall however be credited to

the supplier’s account and set off against any outstanding dues of the

purchaser against the supplier. The warranty for 72/78 months shall be one

time.



inspecting officer may again be subjected to the test for losses or any other

parameter from any Testing House/in-house technique of the Nigam & the

results if found deviating un-acceptable or not complying to approved GTP's

the bidder shall arrange to supply the replacement within thirty (30) days of

such detection at his cost including to & fro transportation. In addition to this

penalty @10% of cost of the inspected lot of material shall be imposed.

22. SCHEDULE OF GUARANTEED AND GUIDING TECHNICAL PARTICULARS:-

The tenderers must supply the detailed guaranteed and other technical

particulars as detailed in Appendix-I. For values, use of ‘Dash’ ‘Do’ ‘Blank’ or

‘As per ISS/IEC’ will not be entertained.

General Manager/P&D Cum-Member Secretary CSC

UHBVN Panchkula.

_______________________________________________________________________

Page 9 of 10

APPENDIX-I GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR HT AERIAL BUNCHED CABLE WITH CROSS - LINKED POLYETHYLENE (XLPE) INSULATION & BARE MESSENGER WIRE (FOR NEUTRAL & EARTHING)

S.N. Particulars HT Aerial Bunched Cables

Size-1 Size-2 Size-3 Size…..

so on 1 Maker’s name & address 2 Rated voltage 3 Phase conductor details

i) No. of phase conductors ii) Nominal cross-sectional area of

each conductor-mm²

iii) No. & size of strands (mm) iv) Minimum tensile strength of

each strand-N/mm²

v) Diameter of compacted conductor along with tolerance (mm).

vi) Approximate mass (Kg/Km) vii) Maximum DC resistance at 20o

C (Ohm/Km)

viii) Insulation thickness (mm) ix) Standard to which this material

conforms

4. Messenger (Neutral conductor) i) Nominal sectional area of each

conductor in mm²

ii) No. & size of strands (mm) iii) Diameter of compacted

conductors along with tolerance (in mm)

iv) Approx. mass (Kg/Km) v) Minimum Tensile strength in KN vi) Max. DC resistance at 20o C

(Ohm/Km)

vii) Standard specification to which this material conform

5 Insulation of phase conductor i) Material ii) Whether all properties as

mentioned in the technical Specifications are guaranteed if not indicate deviations in properties

iii) Standard specification to which this material shall conform

6 Finished cable (complete bunched cable)

i) Overall diameter (approx.) in mm

_______________________________________________________________________

Page 10 of 10

ii) Total mass (approx.) in Kg/Km

7. Drum i) Tare weight of drum ii) Whether drum is wheel mounted iii) Standard specification to which

drum shall conform

8 Standard length of each cable and its tolerance

9 i) Total length of cable in a drum and its tolerance

ii) Mass of finished cable in a drum and its tolerance

10. Whether material bears ISI certification mark

11 Serial number of ISI license and its validity

12. Max. Continuous current carrying capacity

13. Max. Continuous conductor temperature due to load

14 Embossing

15 Any other particulars

(Suppliers Name & Address)


Specification No. CSC-XXXVI/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010


OF

HEAT SHRINKABLE / PUSH ON TYPE

TERMINATIONS FOR 11 KV XLPE CABLES

Issue of the Month: Jan. 2010


Page 1 of 10

1. SCOPE :-

This specification covers the design, manufacture, assembly and testing of heat shrinkable/push on type terminations suitable for 11 KV 3-core XLPE insulated, screened, armoured, with aluminium conductor cables suitable for earthed system and confirming to IS:7098(Part-II)-1985 with latest amendment, if any.

2. STANDARD :-

The performance as well as type test requirements of all type of kits referred under scope shall conform to stipulations of IS : 13573/1992 or VDE-0278 with latest amendments, if any.

All the electrical & physical parameters of terminations should also

conform to the corresponding parameters of XLPE cables referred under ‘SCOPE’ of this specification, as per IS: 7098 (Part-II)-1985 (with latest amendments, if any) or equivalent international standards..

3. CLIMATIC CONDITIONS :-


2. Min. ambient air temperature C -5OC

3. Average Max. Daily ambient temperature 400C

4. Max. yearly weighed average ambient temperature

320C






10. Maximum wind pressure 195 Kg./m Sq.

4. REQUIREMENT :-

The heat shrinkable/push on type terminations offered shall be of proven design and make, which have already been extensively used ;and fully type tested.

5. GENERAL REQUIREMENT :-

The purpose of this specification is to specify the performance requirements of termination kits for the use on 50 C/S 3 phase system with earthed neutral for working voltage of 11 KV. Earthing arrangement shall be as per relevant standard and details of earthing arrangement offered shall be submitted alongwith the tender.

Page 2 of 10

5.1 The material to be used should be inert and capable of resisting

degradation during the service of cable system. The kit shall be provided with protection against rodents and termite attack.

5.2 Heat Shrinkable Type (Terminations) : 5.2.1 The term heat shrinkable refers to extruded or moulded polymeric

materials which are cross-linked to develop elastic memory and supplied in expanded or otherwise deformed size/shape, subsequently heating in a non-constrained state to a temperature above the shrink temperature resulting in the material recovering or shrinking to its original shape.

5.2.2 Since the sealant or adhesives (to be used for environment sealing)

between the ;heat shrinkable materials and XLPE cables shall be exposed to high electrical stresses, they must be track resistant.

5.2.3 The heat shrinkable polymer materials being used for external

leakage insulation between the high voltage of conductors and grounds should be weather resistant.

5.2.4 All cuts/nicks inadvertently occurred to XLPE insulation must be

rendered discharge free by using suitable discharge suppression compound.

5.2.5 The heat shrinkable tubing may be either extruded or moulded

type. 5.2.6 Higher thickness of heat shrinkable sleeves shall be preferable to

counter erosion due to pollution. 5.3 Push on type (Terminations only) : 5.3.1 Rubber components should be made from proven quality of tuber

with tested curing properties. 5.3.2 The semi conducting portion of the stress cone should be

vulcanized with insulation so that both semi conducting and insulation portion becomes an integrated part.

5.3.3 The stress cone must ;be of proven design of stress control. 5.3.4 The moulding of rubber components should be aimed to achieve a

smooth finish on interior and exterior of the components. 5.3.5 The stress cone should probably be reusable type. 5.3.6 In case of outdoor terminations, the suitable provision for covering

the cable cores with re-useable protective system from the crotch seal to the bottom of stress cone should be made.

Page 3 of 10

5.4 Other Requirements : 5.4.1 Proper stress control, stress grading and non tracking arrangement

in the terminations shall be offered by means of proven methods, details of which shall be elaborated in the offer. Detailed sectional view of assemblies shall be submitted alongwith the offer.

5.4.2 The kits offered shall provide the total environment sealing, the

details of which shall be offered alongwith the offer. 5.4.3 Provision for effective screening over each core be made and

bidders shall categorically conform this aspect in their offer. 5.4.4 The material and components not specifically stated in the

specification, but which are essential for satisfactory operation of the equipments shall be included without any extra cost.

5.4.5 The terminations shall be of better tracking resistant properties and

fully reliable earthing system to maintain continuous contact with screening/armouring as the case may be.

5.4.6 The armour earthing arrangement shall form part of the termination. 5.4.7 Terminations shall have provision for shield connections and

earthing. 5.4.8 The kits shall be suitable for storage without deterioration at a

temperature upto 50oC for more than 5 years. 5.4.9 The fault level (as well as duration) withstand capability of

terminations should be strictly matching with these parameters of cables for which the kits are intended to be used.

5.4.10 The words DHBVN/UHBVN alongwith trade name of manufacturer,

month/year of manufacturer, size etc. shall be embossed/engraved or suitably marked with indelible ink/paint for the purpose of identification.

5.4.11 Suitable creepage extension/rain protection sheds for outdoor

termination shall be provided. 5.4.12 The adequate provisions for eliminating the chances of entrapment

of air at the steps formed by semicon screen shall be made. 5.4.13 The gripping tubing (termination boot) for the cable where

trifurcation takes place, shall also be part of kit and covered under scope of this supply of this specification.

5.4.14 Name of sub-supplier for the raw material and standard according

to which their raw material are tested, must be furnished alongwith the offer.

Page 4 of 10

5.4.15 Detailed kit contents, whether manufactured by the bidder or bought from outside (with name of sub vendor) for each component must be indicated in the offer.

5.4.16 The; terminations shall be supplied in kit forms. All insulating and

sealing materials, consumable items, conductor fittings, earthing arrangements and lugs etc. shall be included in the individual kit.

5.4.17 An instruction manual in English, indicating the complete

method/procedure to be adopted for installation of kits, preferably with more and more diagrams/pictorial presentation shall be supplied with each kit. Various items quantity there of against each kit must be indicated in the instruction manual.

6. GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS :-

The terminations shall have same electrical and thermal characteristics as those of cables with which these are intended to be used. The tenderers must furnish the guarantee technical particulars for each type/size of kit ;in Annexure-‘A’.

7. CONSUMABLES OR RE-USABLE PUSH ON TYPE KITS :-

The details of consumable viz-a-viz reusable parts for each size of push on type (indoor/outdoor separately) termination must be supplied on a separate sheet. The %age of consumables for reusing these kits must be indicated for each size.

8. DRAWINGS :-

Complete detailed dimensional drawings showing all details of kit contents/bill of material for each size type.

Note : Any tender without complete guaranteed technical particulars and dimensional drawings shall be liable for rejection :

9. TRAINING :-

In case of placement of an order against this tender enquiry, the tenderer shall have to impart free of cost demonstration to selected number of Nigam personnel by installing few kits any where in Haryana, places of Purchaser’s discretion. If required, supplier may have to give free of cost practical training regarding installation of their product in NiIgam training institutes also.

Page 5 of 10

10. TESTS :-

10.1 Type tests :

The termination kits of offered design should have been got tested from NABL accredited laboratory as per relevant standards with latest version.

10.2 Acceptance Tests :

Initially the following tests shall constitute as acceptance tests :- i) Dimensional checking as per approved drawings. ii) Volume resistivity test for various components. iii) AC High voltage test after installation of terminations (as per IS :

13573/1992 or VDE-0278) on appropriate cable. iv) Dielectric strength of major components. v) D.C. High voltage test. vi) Tracking resistance. vii) Ultimatic Elongation.

The scope to include more type tests as acceptance tests shall be decided after processing the offers of various bidders/after knowing the details of testing facilities for type tests available with various tenders.

IMPORTANT : The tenderers must specifically mention in their offer about the details of testing facilities for various type test as per IS : 13573/1992 and or VDE-0278, available at their works, failing to do so, the offer is liable to be rejected on the presumption that adequate testing facilities are not available with them.

ROUTINE TESTS :- The following tests shall constitute routine test : i) Dielectric strength. ii) Density. iii) Heat shock. iv) Shrinkage ratio. The tenderer must specify the details of routine tests (being conducted at their works ) alongwith the standard applicable, in their offer. The routine test certificates shall be furnished alongwith the inspection call for each offered lot.

11. INSPECTION :

The material shall be made, inspected and tested in the presence of the authorized representative of the Nigam at the manufacturer’s/suppliers works at the cost of the suppliers. In case the supplier is not in a position to get these tests carried out at his works,

Page 6 of 10

then the material should be got tested in the presence of authorized inspecting officer of Nigam from any other testing agency or from the Govt. recognized testing agency. All the expenses incurred to this effect shall be borne by the supplier. The purchaser or his authorized representative shall have access at all reasonable times to the manufacturer’s works to inspect and witness the tests. The purchaser have the right to have the tests carried out at the cost of the supplier by an independent agency wherever there is dispute regarding the quality of the material supplied.

The manufacturer shall be responsible to pay penalty of Rs 20,000/- for each occasion at which the fake inspection call has been made or the material is rejected during testing/inspection by the authorized agency/representative of the Nigam. This penalty would be in addition to the expenses incurred by the Nigam in deputing the Inspecting Officer, carrying out such inspection.

12. PACKING AND TRANSPORT :

The supplier shall be responsible for suitable packing of all the kits of material and marking on the consignment, so as to avoid any damage during transport and storage and to ensure correct dispatch to the destination.


The material offered/received after the inspection by the authorized inspecting officer may again be subjected to the test for or any parameter from any testing house/in-house technique of the Nigam & the results if found deviating un-acceptable or not complying to approved GTP’s the bidder shall arrange to supply the replacement within thirty (30) days of such detection at his cost including to & fro transportation. In addition , penalty @10% of cost of the inspected lot of material shall be imposed.


The supplier shall be responsible to replace, free of cost, with no transportation or insurance cost to the purchaser, up to destination, the whole or any part to the material which in normal and proper use proves the defective in quality or workmanship, subject to the condition that the defect is noticed within 24 months from the date of receipt of material in stores or 18 months from the date of commissioning whichever period may expire earlier. The consignee or nay other officer of Nigam actually using the material will give prompt notice of each such defect to the supplier. The replacement shall be effected by the supplier within a reasonable time, but not, in any case, exceeding 45 days. The supplier shall, also, arrange to remove the defective within a reasonable period, but not exceeding 45 days from the date of issue of notice in respect thereof, failing which, the purchaser reserve the right to dispose of defective material in any manner considered fit

Page 7 of 10

by him (purchaser), at the sole risk and cost of the supplier. Any sale proceeds of the defective material after meeting the expenses incurred on its custody, disposal handling etc., shall however be credited to the supplier’s account and set off against any outstanding dues of the purchaser against the supplier. The warranty for 18/24 months shall be one time.









Page 8 of 10

ANNEXURE-‘A’ SCHEDULE OF GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR TERMINATIONS OUTDOOR / INDOOR TERMINATION KIT H.S. PUSH ON 1. Manufacturer’s name & Address.

2. Sr. No. & name and country of origin.

3. Voltage grade.

4. Type of kit offered.

5. Applicable standards.

6. Size.

7. Material of tubing/moulded part/self amalgamating tape etc.

8. Insulation time.

9. Curing time.

10. Time required for energisation after completion of termination.

11. Special devices required, if any.

12. Kit storage temperature (Degree centigrade).

13. (a) Shelf life of kit.

(b) Design life of kit.

14. List lof contents of kit (to be furnished separately)

15. Material used for stress control.

16. Dielectric strength of insulation material (KV/mm).

17. Materials used in encapsulating compound and environmental sealing.

18. Class of kit.

19. Whether test reports, drawings land instruction leaf lets are enclosed.

20. Volume resistivity.

i) Stress control tubing.

ii) Non tracking tubing.

21. Relative permitivity.


ii) Non tracking tubing.

22. Water absorption.


ii) Non tracking tube.

23. Tracking resistance.

Page 9 of 10

i) Stress control tube.


24. Tensile strength.

i) Stress control tube.


25. Ultimate elongation

(a) Stress control tube.

(b) Non tracking tube.

Note : While giving details of technical parameters under Sr. No. 20 to 25 above,

the reference of applicable relevant ISS/international standard must be indicated.

Page 10 of 10

______________________________________________________________________

Page 1 of 26

1

Specification No. CSC-III-R-I/DH/UH/P&D/2010-11


FOR

Outdoors types Distribution Transformers of

11 kV/433-250 V Class upto and including 100 kVA

i.e (25 kVA to 100 kVA) with CSP (completely self protected)

features

Issue Month: May, 2010 Common Specification Committee

(CSC Approval date 23.4.2010) UHBVN & DHBVN

______________________________________________________________________

Page 2 of 26

2

OUTDOOR TYPE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS OF 11 kV/433-250 V CLASS UP TO AND INCLUDING 100 kVA i.e (25,63 & 100 kVA) WITH CSP (COMPLETELY SELF PROTECTED) FEATURES

1. Scope:

This specification covers, engineering, manufacture, assembly, stage testing,

inspection and testing before supply, ready to use besides delivery at site of oil immersed,

naturally cooled 3 phase 11 kV/433-250 V completely self protected Distribution

Transformers for outdoor use along with metallic enclosure housing LV bushing & MCCB

(if provided) with sealing facility.

1.1. It is not the intent to specify completely herein all the details of the design and

construction of equipment. However the equipment shall conform in all respects to

high standards of engineering, design and workmanship and shall be capable of

performing in continuous commercial operation upto the Bidder’s guarantee, in

manner acceptable to the purchaser, who will interpret the meanings of drawings

and specification and shall have the power to reject any work or material which, in

his judgment is not in accordance therewith. The offered equipment shall be

complete with all components necessary for their effective and trouble free

operation. Such, components be deemed to be within the scope of Bidder’s supply

interceptive of whether those are specifically brought out in this specification and /

or the commercial order or not.

1.2. Standard Ratings:

The standard Ratings shall be 25, 63 and 100 kVA.

2. STANDARDS:

2.1. The material shall conform in all respects to the relevant Indian /International

standard Specification, with latest amendments thereof some of them are listed below:

Title India standard

International& Internationally recognized standard

Specification for power Transformer outdoor distribution Transformer upto including 100 KVA

ISS-2026/1977 ISS-1180

IEC 76

Specification for Copper wire rod IS-12444 ASTM B-49

Specification porcelain Transformer bushing

ISS-3347/1967 DIN 42531, 23,3

Specification for Transformer oil ISS-335/1983 BS 148, D-1473, D-1533-1934 IEC Pub 296-1969

Specification for colors for ready mixed paints porcelain bushings

ISS-5/1961

Specification for High voltage porcelain bushings

ISS-2099/1973 IEC Pub 296-1969

Specification for Low voltage bushings ISS-7421/1974 Specification for outdoor Bushings ISS-3347 DIN 42531 to 33 Specification for Al wire rods ISS-5484 ASTM B-233

Insulating Kraft Paper ISS-9335 IEC 554

Specification for Insulating press Board ISS-1576 IEC 641

Guide for loading of Oil immersed T/Fs ISS- 6600/1972 IEC-76

______________________________________________________________________

Page 3 of 26

3

The bidder shall use ISS, however, where this standard is not available

corresponding IEC may be followed.

Material conforming to ISS or the internationally accepted standards, which

ensure equal or higher quality than the standards mentioned above, would also be

acceptable. In case the Bidders who wish to offer material conforming to the standards,

salient points of difference between the standards adopted and the specific standards

shall be clearly brought out in relevant schedule. Four copies of such standards with

authentic English translations shall be furnished along with the other.

3. SERVICE CONDITIONS:-

The Distribution Transformers & other equipment/material to be supplied against

this specification shall be suitable for satisfactory operation under the following climatic

Conditions as per IS-2026 (Part-I) latest revision


ii) Maximum ambient temperature (oC) 60 iii) Minimum ambient air temperature (oC) -5 iv) Maximum average daily ambient temperature

(oC) 40


32

vi) Maximum altitude above mean sea level (m) 1000 vii) Minimum Relative Humidity (%) 26 viii) Maximum Relative Humidity (%) 95 ix) Average no of Rainy days/ year 120 x) Average annual rainfall 900 mm xi) Maximum wind pressure 195 kg/m sq.

The equipment shall be for safe operation in moderately hot and humid tropical


4. PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS:-

The transformers shall be suitable for outdoor installation with three phase

50 Hz, 11 KV system in which the neutral is effectively earthed and they should be suitable

for service under fluctuations in supply voltage upto plus 10 to minus 15%.

Sr. No. Item 1 Continuous rated

capacity 25 KVA 63 KVA 100 KVA

2 System voltage (max.)

12.5 KV 12.5 KV 12.5 KV

3 Rated voltage HV 11 KV 11 KV 11 KV 4 Rated voltage LV 433-250 V 433-250 V 433-250 V 5 Line current HV 1.31 A 3.306 A 5.25 A 6 Line current LV 33.33 A 84.0 A 133.0 A 7 Frequency 50c/s +5% 50c/s +5% 50c/s +5% 8 No. of phases Three Three Three 9 Connection HV Delta Delta Delta 10 Connection LV Star

(Neutral Brought

out)

Star (Neutral Brought

out)

Star (Neutral Brought

out) 11 Vector group Dyn-II Dyn-II Dyn-II 12 Type of cooling ONAN ONAN ONAN 13 changing

arrangement Not

applicable Not

applicable Not

Applicable

______________________________________________________________________

Page 4 of 26

4

14 Noise level at rated voltage and frequency

45 db 45 db 45 db

Permissible temperature rise over ambient i) if top oil measured by thermometer

35 Deg. C 35 Deg. C 35 Deg. C

ii) if winding measured by resistance

40 Deg.C 40 Deg.C 40 Deg.C

15

Maximum clearances i) HV phase to phase (phase to earth (mm) ii) LV phase to phase (phase to earth

-----AS per IS-1180 Latest-----

-----255 140---

---------75 40----

5. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS:

5.1. MATERIAL – CRGO METAL

5.1.1. The core shall be stack / wound type generally of high grade rolled grain

annealed steel lamination having low loss and good grain properties, coated

with hot oil proof insulation, bolted together and to the frames firmly to

prevent vibration or noise. The complete design of core must ensure

permanency of the core losses with continuous working of the transformers.

The value of the maximum flux density allowed in the design and grade of

lamination used be clearly stated in the offer.

The bidder should offer the core for inspection and approval by the purchaser

during manufacturing stage. Bidder’s shall give notice for inspection with the

following documents as applicable as a proof towards use of prime core material.

5.1.1.1. Invoice of the supplier

5.1.1.2. Mills Test Certificate

5.1.1.3. Packing List

5.1.1.4. Bill of Loading

5.1.1.5. Bill of entry certificate to customs

5.1.2. Core clamping for CRGO Stacked core.

5.1.2.1. MS channel shall be used on top and bottom

5.1.2.2. Core channel on LV side to be reinforced at equidistance, if

holes/cutting is done for LT lead in order to a avoid bending of

channel.

5.1.2.3. MS channel shall be painted with varnish or oil resistant paint

5.1.2.4. Clamping & Tie-rods shall be made of HT steel and shall be

parkarised.

______________________________________________________________________

Page 5 of 26

5

5.1.3. Core clamping for CRGO wound core.

5.1.3.1. Core clamping shall be with top and bottom U-shaped core clamps

made of sheet steel clamped HT steel tie rods for efficient clamping

5.1.3.2. MS core clamps shall be painted with varnish or oil-resistant paint.

5.1.3.3. Suitable provision shall be made in the bottom core clamp/ bottom

plate of the transformer to arrest movement or the active part.

5.1.4. The transformers core shall be suitable for over fluxing (due to

combined effect of voltage and frequency) upto 12.5% without

injurious heating at full load conditions and shall not get saturated.

The Bidder shall furnish necessary design data in support of this

situation.

5.1.5. No load current shall not exceed 2% of full load current and will be

measured by energizing the transformer at 433 volts, 50c/s on the

Secondary. Increase of voltage of 433 volts by 12.5% shall not

increase the no load current disproportionately high. Test for

magnetic balance by connecting the LV phase by phase to rated

phase voltage and measurement of an, bn, cn voltage will be carried

out.

5.1.6. ‘’The core material should be imported directly from the reputed

manufacture. Core material shall be processed by slitting only. Core

cutting/slitting be done in front of inspecting officers deputed by

UHBVN”. Details of the core shall be filled & supplied as per

Annexure-II.

5.2. AMORPHOUS METAL.

5.2.1. The core shall be high quality Amorphous ribbons having very low

loss formed into wound cores of rectangular shape, bolted together to

the frames firmly to prevent vibration or noise. The complete

design of core must ensure permanency of the core loss with

continuous working of the transformers. The value of the flux density

allowed in the design shall be clearly stated in the offer. Curve

showing the properties of the metal shall be attached with the offer.

5.2.2. Core Clamping for Amorphous metal Transformers.

5.2.2.1. Core clamping shall be with top and bottom U-shaped core clamps

made of sheet steel clamped HT steel tie rods for efficient clamping.

5.2.2.2. MS core clamps shall be painted with varnish or oil-resistant paint.

5.2.2.3. Suitable provision shall be made in the bottom core clamp/ bottom

plate of the transformer to arrest movement of the active part.

5.2.3. The transformers core shall be suitable for over fluxing (due to

combined effect of voltage and frequency) upto 12.5% without

injurious heating at full load conditions and shall not get saturated.

______________________________________________________________________

Page 6 of 26

6

The Bidder shall furnish necessary design data in support of this

situation.

5.2.4. No load current shall not exceed 2% of full load current and will be


Secondary. Increase of voltage of 433 volts by 12.5% shall not

increase the no load current disproportionately high. Test for

magnetic balance by connecting the LV phase by phase to rated

phase voltage and measurement of an, bn, cn voltage will be carried

out.

NOTE:

I) Wherever variable prices are provided IEEMA formula should be applicable

in such a way that indices applicable for CRGO are used for amorphous

material also since the indices for latter are not declared by IEEMA.

II) The value of maximum flux density allowed shall be 1.6 T.

5.3. WINDINGS:-

5.3.1. Material: Double paper covered insulated electrolytic Aluminium

Conductor for windings and electrolytic copper for leads.

5.3.2. LV winding shall be in even layers so that the neutral formation will

be at top.

5.3.3. The winding construction of single HV coil wound over LV coil is

preferable.

5.3.4. Inter layer insulation shall be Epoxy dotted Kraft paper.

5.3.5. Proper bonding of inter layer insulation with the conductor shall be

ensured. Test for Bonding Strength to be conducted.

5.3.6. Dimensions of winding coils are very critical. Dimensional tolerances

for winding coils shall be with in limits as specified in GTP.

5.3.7. Vertical ducts and spacers shall be provided within each coils for H.V

and L.V winding.

5.3.8. Current density for HV and LV coils. This should not be more than 1.5

A/sq. mm. for windings & 0.8 A/sq. mm for leads.

5.4. Oil: - The insulating oil shall comply with the requirements of relevant

standards IS 335/1993 or BS: 148.

5.5. Losses: The total losses (includes no-load & load losses) at 50% and

100% loading equivalent to BEE 4-Star rating shall not exceed the values

given below:

Voltage Ratio kVA Rating Max. losses at 50% (Watts)

Max. losses at 100% (Watts)

11000/433 25 190 635 11000/433 63 340 1140 11000/433 100 475 1650

______________________________________________________________________

Page 7 of 26

7

The above losses are maximum allowable and here would not be any

positive tolerance. Bids with higher losses than the above specified values would be

treated as non-responsive.

Bidders are requested to quote the price as FOR destination on standard

losses. The Bid will be evaluated on the basis of standard losses instead of Equated

capitalized cost. No benefit of low losses to the bidder in case the losses are less than

standards losses at any time.

5.5.1. Percentage Impedance:

The value of Impedance of transformer at 75 Deg. C shall be 4.5% subject to the

tolerance specified in the standard IS: 2026-1977.

5.5.2. Temperature rise

The temperature rise over ambient shall not exceed the limits described below:

i) Top oil temperature rise measured by thermometer: 35 deg. C

ii) Winding temperature rise measure by resistance: 40 deg. C

Bids not meeting the above limits of temperature rise will be treated as non-responsive.

5.6. PENALTY FOR NON PERFORMANCE:

5.6.1. Purchaser reserves the right to reject any transformer during the test at

supplier’s works, if it is found that actual measured losses are more than the

values quoted by the bidder

5.6.2. Transformer with temperature rise and impedance beyond the Guaranteed

values.

5.6.2.1. Purchaser reserves the right to reject any transformer during the test at

supplier’s works, if the temperature rise exceeds the guaranteed values.

5.6.2.2. Purchaser reserves the right to reject any transformer during the test at

supplier’s works, if the impedance values differ from the guaranteed values including

tolerance.

5.6.2.3. Purchaser also reserves the right to retain the rejected transformer and take it

into service until the Bidder replaces it with a new transformer at no extra cost.

The delivery as per contract will be counted when the new transformer as per

specification is provided by the manufacture.

5.7. INSULATION MATERIAL:-

5.7.1. Material:-Electrical grade insulation Kraft papers and press Boards of standard

should be used. For the use standard material the names of following firms have been

approved.

Sr. No. Name of insulating material

Name of the firms

1 Press board a. Senapathy whitely b. Raman Board

2 Craft paper a. Ballarpur b. Padamjee c. Triveni d. M/s Skytouch Tapes Ltd., Mumbai. e. M/s KLIM Enterprises, Mumbai. f. M/s Vijaya Mercantile Ltd. New Delhi. g. M/s Badri Enterprises, New Delhi.

______________________________________________________________________

Page 8 of 26

8

3 Press pahn paper Senapathy whitely 4 Gaskets a. New cork

b. Talbros c. M/s Skytouch Tapes Ltd., Mumbai. d. M/s KLIM Enterprises, Mumbai. e. M/s Vijaya Mercantile Ltd. New Delhi. f. M/s Badri Enterprises, New Delhi.

5.7.2 All spacers, axial wedges / runners used in windings shall be made of

pre-compressed pressboard-solid, conforming to type B 3.1 of IEC 641-3-2.

In case of cross-over coil winding of HV all spacers shall be properly

sheared and dovetail punched to ensure proper locking. All axial wedges/

runners shall be properly milled to dovetail shape so that they pass through

the designed spacers freely. Insulation shearing, cutting, milling and

punching operations shall be carried out in such out in such a way, that

there should not be any burr and dimensional variations.

5.8. TANK:- The rectangular transformer tank can be with radiator

fins/rounded or elliptical cooling tubes. The main tank of the

transformers shall be made of good quality steel having a minimum

thickness of sides of the tanks 3.15 mm and a minimum thickness of

5.0 mm for top and bottom plates. The tank shall be capable of

withstanding a pressure up to 0.8 kg/cm2 and (-) 0.3 kg/cm2 for 30

minutes and 10 minutes respectfully. The word “UHBVNL

PROPERTY” shall be engraved on the top cover plate and side of the

tank body. No negative tolerance shall be allowed.

5.8.1. For Rectangular plain tank:-

5.8.1.1. The transformer tank shall be of robust construction rectangular in

shape and shall be built up of tested MS sheets.

5.8.1.2. The internal clearance of tank shall be such that, it shall facilitate easy

lifting of core with coils from the tank without dismantling L.V bushings.

5.8.1.3. All joints of tank and fittings shall be oil tight and no bulging should

occur during service. The tank design shall be such that the core and

windings can be lifted freely. The tank plate shall be of such strength

that the complete transformers when filled with oil may be lifted bodily

by means of lifting lugs. Inside of tank shall be painted with varnish/

Hot oil.

5.8.1.4. Manufacturer should carry out all welding operations as per relevant

ASME standards and submit a copy of the welding procedure

qualifications and welder performance qualification certificates to the

customer.

5.8.1.5. The four walls of the tank shall be made of Two ‘’L’’ shaped sheets

(without joints) fully welded at the corners from inside so that the joint is

______________________________________________________________________

Page 9 of 26

9

stronger due to V-shape welding fillet and also outside of the tank for

withstanding a pressure of 0.8 kg/cm2 for 10 minutes.

5.8.1.6. The tank shall be reinforced by welded angle on all the outside walls

on the edge of the tank to form two equal compartments. Permanent

deflection when the tank without oil is subject to a vacuum of 525 mm

of mercury for rectangular tank and 760 mm of mercury for round tank,

shall not be more than 4 mm in accordance with clause 22.5 of IS:1180

(Part-I/1989) upto 750 mm length and 6mm upto 1250 mm length. The

tank shall further be capable of withstanding a pressure of 0.8 kg/cm2

(g) and a vacuum of 0.3 kg/cm2 (g) without any deformation.

5.8.1.7. The radiators can be of tube type or fin or pressed type steel type to

achieve the desired cooling to limit the specified temperature rise. The

transformer shall be capable of giving continuous rated output without

exceeding the specified temperature rise Bidder shall submit the calculation

sheet.

5.8.1.8. Lifting lugs: 4 Nos. welded heavy duty lifting lugs of MS flat 8 mm thick

(min) suitably reinforced by vertical supporting flat welded edgewise below

the jug on the side wall.

5.8.1.9. Pulling lugs: 4 Nos. of welded heavy duty pulling lugs of MS plate 8

mm thick (mm) shall be provided to pull the transformer horizontally.

5.8.1.10. Top cover fixing bolts of G.I adequately spaced and 6mm Neoprene

bonded cork gaskets conforming to IS 42332 part-II shall be placed

between tank and cover. The bolts outside tank shall have 2 flat washers &

one spring washer.

5.8.1.11. Pressure release value as standard fitment shall be provided on the top

of tank of transformer which should operate at a pressure of 0.3 to 0.5 kg/cm2.

5.8.2. CONSERVATOR: -

On Transformers of ratings upto 100 KVA with rectangular plain tank

the provision of conservators is optional with the clarification that:-

the transformer with conservator shall comply with IS: 1180 Part-I (Non

sealed type)

the transformers without conservator shall comply with IS:1180 Part-II

(Sealed type)

When a conservator is provided oil gauge and the plain or

dehydrating breathing devise shall be fixed to the conservator which shall also be

provided with a drain plug and a filling hole (1¼”) normal size thread) with cover.

The capacity of a conservator tank shall be designed keeping in view the total

quantity of oil and its contraction and expansion due to temperature variations, In

addition the cover of main tank shall be provided with an air release plug to enable

______________________________________________________________________

Page 10 of 26

10

air trapped within to be released, unless the conservator is so located as to

eliminate the possibility of air being trapped within the main tank.

The inside diameter of the pipe connecting the conservator to the

main tank should be within 20 to 50 mm and it should be projected into the

conservator so that its end is approximately 20 mm above the bottom of the

conservator so as to create a sump for collection of impurities. The minimum oil

level (corresponding to -5 deg C) should be above the sump level.

5.9. SURFACE PREPARATION & PAINTING.

5.9.1. General

5.9.1.1. All paints shall be applied in accordance with the paint manufacturer’s

recommendations. Particular attention shall be paid to the following:

5.9.1.1.1. Proper storage to avoid exposure as well as extremes of

temperature.

5.9.1.1.2. Surface preparation prior to painting.

5.9.1.1.3. Mixing and thinning.

5.9.1.1.4. Application of paints and the recommended limit of time intervals

between coats.

5.9.1.1.5. Shelf life for storage.

5.9.1.2. All paints when applied in a normal full coat, shall be free from runs,

sags, wrinkles, patchiness, brush marks or other defects.

5.9.1.3. All primers shall be well marked into the surface, particularly in areas

where painting is evident, and the first priming coat shall be applied as

soon as possible after cleaning. The paint shall be applied by airless

spray according to manufacture’s recommendations. However,

whenever airless spray is not possible, conventional spray be used with

prior approval of purchaser.

5.9.1.4. The supplier shall prior to painting nameplates, lettering gauges sight

glasses, light fittings and similar such items.

5.9.2. Cleaning and Surface preparation

5.9.2.1. After all machining, forming and welding shall been completed, all steel

work surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned of rust, scale, welding slag or

spatter and other contamination prior to any painting.

5.9.2.2. Steel surfaces shall prepared by Short blast cleaning or Chemical by

Seven Tank process including Phosphating to the appropriate quality.

5.9.2.3. The pressure and volume of the compressed air supply for blast cleaning

shall meet the work requirement and shall be sufficiently free from all water

contamination to ensure that the cleaning process is not impaired.

5.9.2.4. Chipping, scraping and steel wire brushing using manual or power driven

tools cannot remove firmly adherent mill-scale shall only be used where

______________________________________________________________________

Page 11 of 26

11

blast cleaning is impractical. Manufacture to explain such areas in his

technical offer clearly.

5.9.3. Protective Coating:

5.9.3.1. As soon as all items have been cleaned and within four hours of the

subsequent drying. They shall be given suitable anti-corrosion protection.

5.9.4. Paint Material.

Followings are the types of paint that may be suitably used for the items to

be painted at shop and supply of matching paint to site:

5.9.4.1. Heat resistant paint (Hot oil Proof) for inside surface.

5.9.4.2. For external surfaces one coat of Thermo Setting powder paint or 1 coats

of Zinc chromate primer followed by 2 coats of Synthetic Enamel

/Polyurethane base paint. These paints can be either air-drying or stoving.

The coating of inside surfaces shall be made with heat resistant paint

5.9.4.3. The colour of the finishing coats shall be dark admiral gray conforming to

No. 632 of ISS-5 of 1961

5.9.5. Painting procedure

5.9.5.1. All painting shall be carried out in conformity with both Specification and

with the paint manufacture’s recommendation. All paints in anyone

particular system, whether shop or site applied, shall originate from one

paint manufacture.

5.9.5.2. Particular attention shall be paid to the manufacturer’s instructions on

storage, mixing, thinning and pot life. The paint shall only be applied in the

manner detailed by the manufacture’s e.g. brush, roller, conventional or

airless spray and shall be applied under the manufacture’s recommended

condition Minimum and maximum time intervals between coating shall be

closely followed.

5.9.5.3. All prepared steel surfaces should be primed before visible re-rusting

occurs or within 4 hours whichever is sooner.

5.9.5.4. Chemical treated steel surface shall be primed as soon as the surface is

dry and while the surface is still warm.

5.9.5.5. Where the quality of film is impaired by excess film thickness (wrinkling,

mud cracking or general softness) the Supplier shall remove the

unsatisfactory paint coating and apply another. As a general rule, dry film

thickness should not exceed the specified minimum dry film thickness by

more than 25%. In all instances where two or more coats of the same paint

are specified, such coating may or may not be of contrasting colours.

5.9.5.6. Paint applied to items that are not be painted shall be removed at

Supplier’s expense, leaving the surface clean, unstained and undamaged.

______________________________________________________________________

Page 12 of 26

12

5.9.6. Damaged Paintwork

5.9.6.1. Any damage occurring to any part of a painting scheme shall be made

good to the same standard of corrosion protection and appearance as that

originally employed.

5.9.7. Any damage paint work shall be made good as follows:

5.9.7.1. The damaged area, together with an area extending 25 mm around its

boundary, shall be cleaned down to bare metal.

5.9.7.2. A priming coat shall be immediately applied, followed by a full paint finish

equal to that originally applied and extending 50 mm around the perimeter

of the original damage.

5.9.7.3. The repainted surface shall present a smooth surface. This shall be

obtained by carefully chamfering the paint edges before and after priming.

5.9.8. Dry Film Thickness

5.9.8.1. To the maximum extent practicable the coats shall be applied as a

continuous film of uniform thickness and free of pores. Overspray, skips,

runs, sags and drips should be avoided. The different coats may or may not

be of the same colour.

5.9.8.2. Each coat of paint shall be allowed to harden before the next is applied as

per manufacturer’s recommendation.

5.9.8.3. Particular attention must be paid to full film thickness at edges.

5.9.8.4. The requirements for the dry film thickness (DFT) of paint and the

materials to be used shall be as given below.

Sr. No.

Paint Type Area to be painted

No. of coats Total Dry film thickness (mm)

1 Thermo setting paint Inside

Inside outside

01 01

20 microns 60 microns

2 Liquid paint a) Zinc chromate (primer) b) Synthetic Enamel/ Poly Urethene (Finish coat) c) Hot oil paint

Outside Outside inside

01 02 01

30 microns 25 microns each 35/ 10 microns

5.10. BUSHINGS:

5.10.1. The bushings shall conform to the relevant standards specified and shall be

outdoor. The bushing rods and nuts shall be made of brass material 12 mm

diameter for both HT & LT. The HT bushings shall be fixed to the transformers on

side with straight pockets and in the same plane or the top cover but LT bushing

shall be provided on the side of the tank. The tests as per latest IS 2099 and

IS7421 shall be conducted on the transformer bushings.

______________________________________________________________________

Page 13 of 26

13

5.10.2. For 11 KV, 17.5 KV class bushings shall be used and for 0.433 KV, 1.1KV

class bushings shall be used. Bushings of plain shades as per IS-3347 shall

be mounted on the side of the Tank and not on top cover.

5.10.3. Dimensions of the bushings of the voltage class shall conform to the

Standards specified.

5.10.4. A minimum phase to phase clearance of 75 mm for LV (upto 1.1 KV

bushings) and 255 mm for HV bushings shall be obtained with the bushing

mounted on the transformer.

5.10.5. The bushings shall be fixed on sides with pockets in the same plane or on

the top cover. Arcing horns or lightning arrestors shall be provided on HV

bushings.

5.10.6. Brazing of all inter connections; jumpers from winding to bushing shall have

cross section larger than the winding conductor. All the Brazers shall be

qualified as per ASME, Section-IX.

5.10.7. The bushings shall be of reputed make supplied by those manufacturers

who are having manufacturing and testing facilities for manufacture of

insulators.

5.10.8. The terminal arrangement shall not require a separate oil chamber not

connected to oil in the main tank.

5.10.9. The LV bushings & micro-processor based MCCB with time current

characteristics in compliance with IS:6600 (if provided) shall be housed

within the metallic enclosure with sealing arrangement so as to avoid any

possibility of tapping of supply from the bushing terminal. The enclosure

shall be made with sheet metal of thickness not less than 2mm and powder

coated. Enclosure shall have provision for pad locking arrangements.

5.11. Terminal connectors: The HV bushing stems shall be provided with suitable

terminal connectors so as to connect the jumper without disturbing the bushing

stem. Connectors shall be with eye bolts so as to receive 55 mm2 conductor for

HV. Terminal connectors should must be type tested as per IS : 5561.

5.12. Terminal markings

High voltage and Low voltage phase windings shall be marked both in the

terminal boards inside the tank and on the outside with capital letter IU, IV, IW and

low voltage winding for the same phase marked by corresponding small letter 2u,

2v, 2w. The neutral point terminal shall be indicated by the letter 2n.Neutral

terminal to be brought out and connected to local grounding terminal by an

Earthing strip.

5.13. FITTINGS:

The following standard fittings shall be provided.

5.13.1. Rating and terminal marking plates non-detachable

5.13.2. Ear thing terminal with lugs -2Nos.

______________________________________________________________________

Page 14 of 26

14

5.13.3. Lifting lugs for main tank & top cover.

5.13.4. Terminal connectors on the HV & for LV bushings-Lugs, glands

(being covered in the box)

5.13.5. Thermometer pocket with cap -1 No.

5.13.6. Air release device

5.13.7. HV bushings -3 Nos.

5.13.8. LV bushings - 4 Nos.

5.13.9. Pulling lugs – 4 Nos.

5.13.10. Stiffener angle 40x40x5 mm and vertical strip of 50x5 mm flat

5.13.11. Radiators – No. & length may be mentioned (as per heat dissipation

calculations)

5.13.12. Arcing horns or 9 KV 5 KVA lighting arrestors on HT side -3 Nos.

5.13.13. Prismatic Oil level gauge.

5.13.14. Drain cum sampling valve

5.13.15. Oil filling hole having p. 1- ¼“thread with plug and drain valve on the

conservator

5.13.16. Silica gel breather

5.13.17. Base channel 75x40 mm.

5.13.18. Pressure relief device.

5.13.19. The supplier shall be responsible to replace, free of cost, with no

transportation or insurance cost to the Purchaser, up to destination, the whole or

any part of the material which in normal and proper use proves the defective in

quality or workmanship, subject to the condition that the defect is noticed within 78

months from the date of receipt of material in stores or 72 months from the date of

commissioning whichever period may expire earlier. The consignee or any other

officer of Nigam actually using the material will give prompt notice of each such

defect to the supplier. The replacement shall be effected by the supplier within a

reasonable time, but not, in any case, exceeding 45 days. The supplier shall, also,

arrange to remove the defective within a reasonable period, but not exceeding 45

days from the date of issue of notice in respect thereof, failing which, the purchaser

reserve the right to dispose of defective material in any manner considered fit by

him (Purchaser), at the sole risk and cost of the supplier. Any sale proceeds of the

defective material after meeting the expenses incurred on its custody, disposal

handling etc., shall however be credited to the supplier’s account and set off

against any outstanding dues of the purchaser against the supplier. The warranty

for 72/78 months shall be one time.

5.14. FASTENERS:

All bolts, studs, screw threads, pipe threads, bolt heads and nuts shall

comply with the appropriate Indian Standards for metric threads, or the technical

equivalent.

______________________________________________________________________

Page 15 of 26

15

Bolts or studs shall not be less than 6 mm in diameter except when used for

small wiring terminals.

All nuts and pins shall be adequately locked. Wherever possible bolts

shall be fitted in such a manner that in the event of failure of locking resulting in the

nuts working loose and falling off, the bolt will remain in position.

All ferrous bolts, nuts and washers placed in outdoor positions shall

be treated to prevent corrosion, by hot dip galvanizing, except high tensile steel

bolts and spring washers which shall be electro-galvanised / plated. Appropriate

precautions shall be taken to prevent electrolytic action between dissimilar metals.

Each bolt or stud shall project at least one thread but not more than three

threads through the nut, except when otherwise approved for terminal board studs

or relay stems. If bolts nuts are placed so that they are inaccessible by means of

ordinary spanners, special spanners shall be provided.

The length of the screwed portion of the bolts shall be such that no screw

thread may form part of a shear plane between members.

Taper washers shall be provided where necessary.

Protective washers of suitable material shall be provided front and back or

the securing screws.

2 No., anti-theft fasteners of steel on two diagonally opposite corners of the

tank shall be provided. All nuts & pins shall be adequately locked.

5.15. MOUNTING ARRANGEMENT :

The under base of all transformers shall be provided with two 75X40 mm

channels 460 mm long with holes to make them suitable for fixing on a platform or

plinth

5.16. OVERLOAD CAPACITY

The transformers shall be suitable for loading as per IS: 6600/ 1972

6. TESTS :

a) All the equipment offered shall be fully type tested by the bidder or his collaborator

as per the relevant standards including the additional type tests mentioned at

clause 6.2. The type test must have been conduced on a transformer of same

design. The Bidder shall furnish four sets of type test reports along with the offer.

Offers without type test reports will be treated as Non-responsive.

The type test certificates should not be more than three years old on the date of bid

opening.

b) Special tests other than type and routine tests, as agreed between

purchaser and Bidder shall also be carried out as per the relevant standards.

c) The requirements of site tests are also given in this clause.

6.1. ROUTINE TESTS:

6.1.1. Ratio, polarity and phase sequence.

6.1.2. No Load current and losses at service voltage and formal frequency.

______________________________________________________________________

Page 16 of 26

16

6.1.3. Load losses at rated current and normal frequency.

6.1.4. Impedance Voltage test.

6.1.5. Resistance of windings at each tap, cold (at or near the test bed temp.)

6.1.6. Insulation resistance.

6.1.7. Induced over voltage withstand test.

6.1.8. Separate source voltage withstand test.

6.1.9. Neutral current measurement.

6.1.10. Oil samples (one sample per lot) to comply with IS 1866.

6.1.11. Measurement of 50% load & 100% load losses and magnetizing current at

rated frequency and at 90%, 100% and 110% voltage.

6.1.12. Flux balance test.

6.2. TYPE TESTS TO BE CONDUCTED ON ONE UNIT:

In addition to the Tests mentioned in para 6.1 following Tests shall be conducted.

6.2.1. Temperature rise test for determining the maximum temperature rise after

continuous full load run. The ambient temperature and time of test should

be stated in the test certificate.

6.2.2. Impulse voltage test: As per Clause No. 13 (With chopped wave) of IS -

2026 part-III latest version. BIL for 11KV shall be 95 KV Peak instead of 75

KV.

6.2.3. Air Pressure Test: As per CI. - 22.5 of IS- 1180/part-I/1989.

6.2.4. Short Circuit withstand test: Thermal and dynamic ability.

6.2.5. Magnetic Balance Test

6.2.6 The prototype transformer on which type test got conducted shall be

supplied to UHBVN/ DHBVN duly sealed after completion of type testing in

the beginning itself before commencement of supply. The bidder shall

furnish an affidavit that all his balance transformers shall meet with

prototype in all respects (internal & external). The Nigam can randomly

select any transformer & verify the internal / external details with the

prototype sample at any time during warranty period.

Type test certificates for the tests carried out on prototype of same

specifications shall be submitted along with the bid.

The purchase may select any transformer from the offered lot for inspection

during subsequent lots for carrying out temperature rise test from any Govt.

approved lab. Further the purchaser may select the transformer for type tests

randomly. The type test report(s) submitted by the bidder/ supplier from any NABL

accredited laboratory shall be acceptable for participation of the bidder in the

procurement/ empanelment process. In case NABL accredited laboratory happens

to be that of manufacturer itself added precaution shall be taken to get type test

and other tests witnessed in the laboratory by Nigam representative at the time of

acceptance of material.

______________________________________________________________________

Page 17 of 26

17

6.3. TESTS AT SITE: The purchaser reserves the right to conduct all tests on

Transformer after arrival at site and the manufacturer shall guarantee test

certificate figures under actual service conditions.

6.4. ACCEPTANCE TESTS: The transformers shall be subjected to the following

routine/acceptance test in presence of purchaser’s representative at the place of

manufacture before dispatch without any extra charges. The testing shall be

carried out in accordance with IS: 1180 and IS: 2026 with latest amendments.

6.4.1. Checking of weights, dimensions, fitting and accessories, tank sheet

thickness, oil quality, material, finish and workmanship as per GTP/QA Plan

and contract drawings.

6.4.2. Physical verifications of core coil assembly and measurement of flux density

of one unit of each rating, in every inspection with reference to short circuit

test report.

6.4.3. All tests as specified in clause 6.1

6.4.4. One transformer per lot shall be tested at NABL accredited independent

laboratory for performance measurement at free of cost.

6.5. TOLERANCES: Unless otherwise specified herein the test value of

transformers supplied would be within the tolerance permitted in the relevant

standards. No positive tolerance is allowed on guaranteed 50% Load and 100%

Load losses.

7. INSPECTION:

All tests and inspection shall be made at the place of manufacturer

and unless other wise especially agreed upon the manufacturer and the purchaser

at the time of purchase. The manufacturer shall afford the inspector representing

the purchaser all reasonable facilities, without charge to satisfy him that the

material is being furnished in accordance with specification.

The bidder shall give 15 days (for local supplies) and 30 days (in

case of foreign bidders) advance information to enable the purchaser to depute his

representative for witnessing acceptance routine tests.

The manufacturer shall provide all services to establish and maintain

quality of workman ship in his works and that of his sub-contractors to ensure the

mechanical/electrical performance of components, compliance with drawings,

identification and acceptability of all materials, parts and equipment as per Nigam

intends to purchase only High Quality material. For this purpose stringent testing of

the material can be done. Inspection can be got done from third party Inspection

agency or from Nigam’s own officers. Nigam reserves the right of 100% testing of

the transformers. The details of source of material shall be supplied duly filled as

per Annexure-III.

______________________________________________________________________

Page 18 of 26

18

8. QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN:

8.1. The Bidder shall furnish following information along with his bid. Information

shall be separately given for individual type of material offered.

8.1.1. Statement giving list of important raw materials, names of sub-supplies for

the raw materials, list of standards according to which the raw materials are

tested. List of tests normally carried out on raw materials in the presence of

Bidder’s representative, copies of test certificates.

8.1.2. Information and copies of test certificates as in (1) above in respect of

bought out accessories.

8.1.3. List of manufacturing facilities available.

8.1.4. Level of automation achieved and list of areas where manual processing

exists.

8.1.5. List of areas in manufacturing process, where stage inspections are

normally carried out for quality control and details of such test and inspection.

8.1.6. List of testing equipment available with the bidder for final testing of

equipment along with valid calibration reports shall be furnished with the bid.

Manufacturer shall posses 0.1 class instruments for measurement of losses.

8.1.7. Quality Assurance Plan (QAP) with hold points for purchases inspection as

per Annexure.

8.2. The successful Bidder shall within 30 days of placement of order submit

following information regarding list of new materials as well as bought out

accessories and the names of sub-suppliers selected from those furnished

along with offer.

9. DOCUMENTATION:

The Bidder shall furnish along with the bid the dimensional drawings of the

stems offered indicating all the fittings.

9.1. Dimension’s tolerances

9.2. Weight of individual components and total weight.

10. PACKING & FORWARDING:

10.1. The packing shall be done as per the manufacturer’s standard practice.

However, it should be ensured that the packing is such that, the material

would not get damaged during by Rail/ Road/ Sea.

10.2. The marking on each package shall be as per the relevant IS.

11. MANDATORY SPARES:

Mandatory spares shall be supplied as per the purchaser’s requirement.

12. COMPLETELY SELF PROTECTED (CSP) FEATURES

The transformers shall have the following CSP features:

12.1. Internal HV fuse on the HT side of transformer:

Specification for the HV fuse: Expulsion/any other suitable type of

fuse placed in series with the primary winding. The fuse is mounted normally inside

______________________________________________________________________

Page 19 of 26

19

of the primary bushing for the three phases and it is connected to the high voltage

winding through a terminal block. This has to protect that part of the electrical

distribution system, which is ahead of the distribution transformers from faults,

which occur inside the distribution transformers i.e. either on the windings or some

other part of the transformers. It shall be ensured that the fuse does not blow for

faults on the secondary side (LT side) of the transformer i.e. the blowing

characteristics of the fuse and LT breaker shall be so coordinated such that the

fuse shall not blow for any faults on the secondary side of the transformer beyond

LT breakers and those faults shall be cleared by the LT breaker only.

12.1.1. Internally mounted oil immersed LT breaker on the LV side of the

transformer:

12.1.1.1. 3 Pole LT circuit breaker: All LT faults after the breaker shall be clear

by this breaker. As such it shall be designed for perfect coordination with the

HT fuse link. The bidder shall furnish the time/current characteristics of LT

circuit breaker of 11 KV fuses for various current multiples.

The two characteristics shall be drawn on the same sheet to indicate coordination

between the circuit breaker and fuse. The Bidder shall carry out coordination test as

indicated above and this forms one of the tests as for acceptance test.

The breaker shall be coordinated thermally with the transformer design to follow

closely the variations of coil acceptance test.

The breaker shall be coordinated thermally with the transformer design to follow

closely the variations of coil temperature due to fluctuating load and ambient

temperatures.

This is to be accomplished by connecting the breaker in series between the

secondary windings and the secondary bushings. The breaker shall be located in the

same oil as the core and coil assembly so that the bimetal are sensitive to the temperature

of oil as well as the load current

The circuit breaker shall also be closed and opened manually standing on ground.

The current carrying parts of breakers shall be copper plus a set of copper tungsten

current interrupting contacts.

The cross section of the current carrying parts of the breakers shall withstand the

full load current at a current density not more than 2.5 A/Sq.mm (for additional mechanical

strength the area should be more).

2.1.1.2. Unity P.F. &

12.1.1.3. 0.8 P.F.

12.1.1.4. 125% load

12.1.1.5. 100% load

12.1.1.6. 75% load

12.1.1.7. 50% load

12.1.1.8. 25% load

12.1.1.9. Regulation at

______________________________________________________________________

Page 20 of 26

20

The bidder may offer microprocessor based MCCB with line current characteristics

confirming to IS:156600 of appropriate rating & good quality from reputed manufacturer in

the metal-box of the distribution transformer instead of internal LV breaker.

NOTE: - The breaker-trip setting shall be done considering loading of 130% loading for 6

hours duration at an average ambient temperature of 400 C for internal breaker as well

as MCCB (if provided).

14.0 Transformer & Metallic box Sealing facility

The transformer should have facility to seal the transformers Top

Plate & its body and also the Metal box, housing the LV bushing and MCCB (if provided)

along with the transformer. The metal box shall have pad-lock arrangement & complete

protection from dirt, rain-water & other pollutants & shall comply to IP:53 protection or

better.

15.0 RATING AND TERMINAL MARKING PLATES:

There shall be rating plates on the transformer containing the information specified

in clause 15.2 of IS: 2026-1977 (part-i). 50% & 100% load losses of the transformer

should also be mentioned on the rating plate. The following additional information must

also be punched on the plate and imposed two opposite sides of the body of T/F.

i) Purchase Order No & Date.

ii) Date of inspection.

iii) Make

v) Guarantee period

4-Star rating label in accordance with colour design, logo etc., shall be provided on the transformer as per the design / recommendations of Bureau of Efficiency (BEE). 16.0 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS The guaranteed technical particulars of the transformer shall be given by

the tenderer (Annexure-I) along with the tender. Tenders without GTPS shall be out rightly

rejected

17.0 CHALLENGE CLAUSE The material offered / received after the inspection by the authorized

inspecting Officer may again be subjected to the test for losses or any other parameters

from any testing house / in house technique of the Nigam having requisite capabilities and

facilities. The results if found deviating / unacceptable or in non-compliance with approved

GTP’s, the lot shall be rejected and bidder shall arrange to supply the within thirty (30)

days of such detection at his cost including to & fro transportation. In addition to this a

penalty @ 10% of cost of the rejected lost of material shall be imposed

General Manager/P&D Cum-Member Secretary CSC UHBVN Panchkula.

______________________________________________________________________

Page 21 of 26

21

ANNEXURE-1

GUARANTEED & OTHER PARTICULARS FOR DISTRIBUTION

TRANSFORMERS

(To be furnished by the Manufacturer)

SI.N Description 25 KVA 63 KVA

100KVA

1. Make & Manufacturer

2. Place of Manufacture

3. Voltage in KVA 11000/433 V 11000/433 V 11000/433 V

4. Rating in KVA 25 KVA 63 KVA 100 KVA

5. Core Material used and Grade

a) Flux density

b) Over fluxing without

saturation (Curve to be furnished

by the Manufacturer in support

of his claim)

6. Maximum temperature rise of

a) Windings by resistance method

b) Oil by Thermometer

7. Magnetizing (No load) Current at

a) Normal Voltage

b) Maximum Voltage

8. Core loss in watts

a) Normal Voltage

b) Maximum Voltage

9. Resistance of Windings at 20 deg. C

(with 5% tolerance)

a) HV Winding (ohms)

b) LV Winding (ohms)

10. Full load losses (watts) at 75 deg. c

11. Total Losses at 100% load at 75 deg. c

12. Total Losses at 50% load at 75 deg. c

13. Current density used for

a) HV Winding

b) LV Winding

14. Clearances

a) Core & LV

b) LV & HV

c) HV Phase to Phase

______________________________________________________________________

Page 22 of 26

22

d) End insulation clearance to Earth

e) Any point of winding to tank

15. Efficiency at 75 deg. C.

a) Unity P.F. &

b) 0.8 P.F

1) 125 % load

2) 100 % laod

3) 75 % load

4) 50 % load

5) 25 % load

16. Regulation at

a) Unity P.F.

b) 0.8 P.F. at 75 deg. C

17. % Impedance at 75 deg. C

18. Flash Test

HV 28 KV/ 50 HZ for 1 minute

LV 3 KV/ 50 HZ for 1 minute

19. Over potential Test Double Voltage &

20. Double frequency for 1 minute

21. Impulse test

22. Weight content of

a) Core Lamination (min.)

b) Windings (min.)

c) Tank & Fittings (Thickness of side walls & thickness of top/bottom plate of DT) d) Oil

e) Oil qty (min.)

f) Total Weight

23. Oil Data

1. Qty for first filling (mm)

2. Grade of oil used

3. Maker’s name

4. BDV at the time of filling

24. Transformer:

1) Overall length X breadth X height

2) Tank length X breadth X height

3) Thickness of plates for

a) Side plate (min.) b) Top & Bottom plate (min.) 25. Radiation:

1) Heat dissipation by tank walls exclusive & bottom 2) Heat dissipation by cooling tube

______________________________________________________________________

Page 23 of 26

23

3) Dia. & thickness of cooling tube 4) Whether calculation sheet for selecting cooling

area to ensure that the transformer is capable

of giving continuous rated output without exceeding

temperature rise is enclosed.

26. Inter layer insulation provided in design for

1) Top & bottom layer

2) In between all layer

3) Details of end insulation

4) Whether wedges are provide at 50 % turns of the HV coil

27. Insulation materials provided

a) For Conductors (1) HV (2) LV

b) For Core

28. Material and Size of the wire used

1) HV

a) SWG/mm

b) Dia

2) LV

a) Strip size.

b) No. of Conductors in parallel.

c) Total area of cross section (sq. mm.)

29. Is the name plate gives all particulars as required in Tender

30. MCCB (if provided) as per Nigam latest technical specification.

31. Whether BEE recommended 4-star Label Plate fixed on the DT

32. Particulars of Bushings HV/ LV

i) Maker’s name

ii) Type IS-3347/IS- 1180

iii) Rating as per I.S.

iv) Dry power frequency voltage withstand test

v) Wet power frequency voltage withstand test

Note: The following shall be specifically confirmed 1. Whether the offer conforms to the limits of impedance mentioned in the specification 2. Whether the offer conforms to the limits of temperature rise mentioned in the specification. 3. Whether the losses of the transformers offered are within the limits specified 4. Whether the transformers offered is already type for the design and test reports enclosed.

______________________________________________________________________

Page 24 of 26

24

ANNEXURE-II

ADDITIONAL DETAILS

SI. No. Description

1. Core Grade

2. Core diameter ( mm)

3. Gross Core area (cm)

4. Net Core area (cm)

5. Flux density (Tesla)

6. Wt. of Core (kg.)

7. Loss per kg. of Core at the

Specified Flux density (Watts)

8. Core window height

9. Center to center distance of the core (mm)

10. No. of LV. Turns

11. No. of HV turns

12. Size of LV Conductor bare/ covered (mm)

13. Size of HV conductor bare/ covered (mm)

14. No. of parallels

15. Current density of LV winding amps/sq.mm.

16. Current density of HV winding amps/ sq.mm

17. Wt. of the LV winding for Transformer kg.

18. Wt. of the HV winding for Transformer kg.

19. No. of LV Coils/phase

20. No. of HV coils/phase

21. Height of LV Windings mm

22. Height of HV Windings mm

23. ID/OD of LV Winding mm

24. ID/OD of HV winding mm

25. Size of the duct in LV winding mm

26. Size of the duct in HV winding mm

27. Size of the duct between HV & LV mm

28. HV winding to LV winding clearance mm

29. HV winding to tank clearance mm

30. Calculated impedance %

31. HV to earth creepage distance mm

32. LV to earth creepage distance mm

______________________________________________________________________

Page 25 of 26

25

ANNEXURE-3

SOURCE OF MATERIALS/PLACES OF MANUFACTURE TESTING AND

INSPECTION

SI. No. Item Source of Material Place of Place of testing and Manufacture

inspection

1. Laminations

2. Aluminium Conductor

3. Insulated winding wires

4. Oil

5. Press Boards

6. Kraft Paper

7. MS Plated / Angles/ Channels

8. Gaskets

9. Bushing HV/ LV

10. Paints

______________________________________________________________________

Page 26 of 26

26

ACRONYMS

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

--

Reference Abbreviations Name and Asset

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

--

IEC International Electro Technical

Commission Bureau Central de la

Commission Electro Technique

International, Rue de verembe

Geneva, Switzerland.

ISO International Organization for

Standardization.

Danish Board of Standardization

Aurchoegyej-12

DK-2900, Heerpup

DENMARK

ISS Indian Standard Bureau of

Indian Standards

Nanak Bhawan

9, Bahadur Shah Zafar Marg,

NEW DELHI-110002, INDIA

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

--

UHBVN & DHBVN CSC SPECS


Specification No. CSC-IV/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

FOR

11/0.433 KV 6.3, 10, 16, 20 COPPER WOUND CSP TYPE

& 40 KVA

ALUMINIUM WOUND CSP TYPE,

(WITH COMPLETELY SELF PROTECTED)

DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS

General Manager/P&D, General Manager/P&D, DHBVN, Hisar UHBVN/DHBVN, Panchkula

Issue of the Month: APRIL.2009

C:\Documents and Settings\Administrator\Desktop\28-01-10\PDC\CSC -IV.doc Page 1 of 27



TECHNICAL SPECIFICTIONS FOR 11/0.433 KV 6.3, 10, 16 & 20 KVA COPPER WOUND & 40 KVA ALUMINIUM WOUND, WITH COMPLETELY SELF PROTECTED DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS 1. SCOPE

This specification covers the engineering, design, manufacture and

testing, stage inspection, testing before supply & delivery of 6.3, 10, 16 &

20 KVA Copper wound & 40 KVA Aluminium wound distribution

transformers, with CSP features required for outdoor sub-stations in

earthed neutral, electric distribution with Normal / System Voltage of 11/12

KV.

The offered material shall be complete with all components necessary for

their effective & trouble free operation. Such components shall be deemed

to be within scope of bidder’s supply irrespective of whether these are

specifically brought out in the specifications.

2. STANDARDS.

The transformer shall conform in all respects to IS-1180:2026 as amended

from time to time except where specified otherwise. The fittings and

accessories shall also comply generally with the requirement of the latest

edition of the respective IS.

3. SERVICE CONDITIONS:-

The Distribution Transformers & other equipment/material to be supplied against this specification shall be suitable for satisfactory operation under the following climatic Conditions as per IS-2026 (Part-I) latest revision i) Location At various locations

in the state of Haryana

ii) Max ambient temperature (deg.c) - 60

iii) Min ambient air temperature (deg. c) -5

iv) Max average daily ambient temperature (deg. c)

40

v) Max. yearly weighed average ambient temperature (deg. C)

32

vi) Max. altitude above mean sea level (Meters)

1000

vii) Minimum Relative Humidity (%age ) 26

viii) Max. Relative Humidity (%age) 95

ix) Avg. no of Rainy days/ year 120

x) Avg. annual rainfall 900mm

xi) Maximum wind pressure 195 Kg./mm Sq.

The equipment shall be for use in moderately hot and humid tropical


4. TYPE AND RATING

The transformers shall have core type construction and oil immersed,

naturally air cooled and shall be suitable for outdoor service as step down

transformers. The rating and electrical characteristics of the transformers

shall be as follows:-



1) Continuous Capacity 6.3, 10, 16, 20 & 40 KVA

2) Rated HT Voltage 11 KV

3) Rated LT Voltage 433-250 Volts

4) Frequency 50 Hz + 5%

6) Connection (HT) Delta

7) Connection (LT) Star

8) Vector Group Dyn-11

9) Type of Cooling ONAN

5. TEMPERATURE RISE

Each transformer shall be capable of operating continuously at its normal

rating without exceeding following temperature rises with the above

service conditions given in clause 3 :-

i) 35oC in oil by thermometer. ii) 40oC in winding by resistance. iii) Hot Spot temperature not to exceed 95oC when calculated over an

annual weighted average temperature of 35o C as per IS: 2026 (Part-II Clause 4.9.4)

The limit of temperature rise mentioned above will have to be satisfied by

the manufacturer by carrying the Heat Run test by feeding losses

calculated at 100o C corresponding to the rated current.

6. LOSSES AND IMPEDANCE VALUES: 6.1 The losses at 50% & 100% load shall not exceed the value given in the

following table: - KVA

Rating Max. losses at 50% load in

Watts at 75oC Max. losses at 100% load in Watts at 75oC

6.3 53 245

10 98 300

16 135 440

20 157 535

40 200 920

The losses are maximum allowable and there would not be any plus

tolerance. No weightage in prices for offers with lower losses shall be

given for these sizes of transformers.

6.2 IMPEDANCE The percentage impedance at 75oC shall be up to 4.5% subject to

tolerance as per IS: 2026-1977.

6.3 (a) FLUX DENSITY Flux density at normal voltage shall not be more than 1.60 Tesla. (b) OVER FLUX Over flux in the transformer core shall be limited to 12.5% to ensure that in

the event of over voltage to the extent of 12.5%, the core does not get saturated.

(c) NO LOAD CURRENT No load current at 100% voltage and 50 Hz shall not be more than 2% of

the full load current and shall be subject to tolerance as per ISS. No. load current at V/F=112.5% of normal V/F shall not exceed 4%. The supplier shall furnish necessary design data in support of this stipulation.



7. PROTECTION AGAINST TRANSIENTS

In order to ensure that the transformers will withstand

lightening/disturbances, the impulse withstand strength of transformers

windings shall not be less 75 KV peak (1.2/50 micro second positive

wave).

8. INSULATION RESISTANCE OF WINDINGS: The minimum insulation resistance values in Mega Ohms between

winding and earth when the transformer is filled with oil should be:

Insulation Resistance in Mega Ohms between winding to earth.

20oc 30oC 40oC 50oC 60oC

11000 Volts (HV) 800 400 200 100 50 433 Volts (LV) 400 200 100 50 25 Insulations Resistance in Mega Ohms between HV & LV windings:- HV & LV 1600 800 400 200 100 9. TEST VOLTAGE: Transformers shall be capable of withstanding the

power frequency and impulse test voltage prescribed below:-

Nominal system voltage

Highest system voltage

Impulse Test Voltage

Power frequency voltage

11 KV (rms) 12 KV (rms) 75 KV (peak) 28 KV (rms)

10. OVERLOAD CAPACITY: The safe overload capacity of the transformer and duration of over load for

satisfactory operation at site under maximum temperature conditions shall

be clearly stated in the tender. The temperature limits under the specified

over load capacity should also be stated.

11. PARALLEL OPERATION: The transformers shall be capable of operating satisfactorily in parallel

with one another under all conditions of load whether balanced or not, and

under varying power factor.

12. TANK The main tank of the transformers shall be made of good quality steel

having a minimum thickness of sides of the tanks 3.15 mm and a

minimum thickness of 5.0 mm for top and bottom plates. The tank shall

be capable of withstanding a pressure up to 0.8 kg/cm2 and (-) 0.7 kg/cm2

for 30 minutes and 10 minutes respectfully as prescribed in clause 27.2 (i)

of this specification. The word “UHBVN/DHBVN PROPERTY” shall be

engraved on the top cover plate and side of the tank body.

The following information (in addition to be provided in rating and

diagram plate) shall be punched on two opposite sides of the body of T/F.

a) Property of UHBVN/DHBVN b) P.O No & date. c) Date & year of manufacture. d) Make



Satisfactory lifting lugs shall be properly secured to the top of the tank or

to the tank sides. The design of the tank and lugs (size 8 mm MS Plate)

shall be as such as to permit the complete transformers filled with oil being

lifted by means of the lugs, without risk of any damage.

13. PRESSURE RELEASE DEVICE

The transformer shall be equipped with a self-sealing pressure release

device, designed to operate at a maximum pressure of 8 psi (0.564 kg/

cm2). The PRD shall be provided in the low-voltage terminating portion of

the tank above top oil level. Inlet port shall be ¼ inch or longer NPT.

Releasing pressure shall be 0.3 kg/cm2.

14. TERMINALS AND BUSHINGS: a) The high and low voltage terminals shall be outdoor porcelain bushings

type for bare Aluminium connection. The bushing rod shall be of brass

and shall conform to ISS-3447 (Part-III). LT rods shall be manufactured

through drawing and HT rods shall be duly forged and in case casting

shall be accepted. Each, terminal including the neutral shall be distinctly

marked and colored for phase voltage on both the primary and secondary

sides in accordance with the diagram of connections supplied with the

transformers. The system of marking shall be in accordance with the

requirements of IS: 1180 amended to date.

b) The HV bushings shall be as per IS: 2099 with latest version and IS:

3347. The LV bushings shall be as per IS: 7721 (with latest amendment(s)

if any).

c) All porcelain used in the bushing shall be homogeneous free from other

flaws affecting its mechanical strength or dielectric quality. These should

be well vitrified, tough and impervious to moisture. A minimum phase to

phase external clearance of 75 mm for LV bushings and 255 mm for HV

bushings shall be obtained with bushings mounted on the transformers.

d) The external terminal clearances shall be maintained after fixing

Bimetallic clamps/thimbles.

Where HT/LT bushings are fitted on the side of the tank, the same shall be

fitted on a conical/rectangular pocket in the tank body and not on the

pipe/flange.



15. SEALING GASKETS: All sealing washers/gasket shall be made of oil and heat resistant

Nitrile/neoprene rubber/synthetic rubber bonded cork type RC-70C

Gaskets. Gaskets made of natural rubbers or cork sheet are not

permissible.

16. COOLING: All the transformers shall be capable of giving a continuous output without

exceeding the specified temperature rise.

17. TRANSFORMER OIL:

The transformer oil used shall comply with the requirements of the

specification as per Annexure-B enclosed in addition to the provision in

the IS: 335-1993 (Latest). Oil sample will also be taken out from fresh

stock of T/F oil to be tested as per latest IS: 335-1993.

18. INSULATION MATERIAL:-

18..1. Material:-Electrical grade insulation Kraft papers and press Boards of

standard should be used. For the use standard material the names of

following firms have been approved.

Sr. No. Name of insulating material

Name of the firms

1 Press board a. Senapathy whitely

b. Raman Board

2 Craft paper a. Ballarpur

b. Padamjee

c. Triveni

3 Press pahn paper Senapathy whitely

4 Gaskets a. New cork

b. Talbros

18.2 All spacers, axial wedges / runners used in windings shall be made of pre-

compressed pressboard-solid, conforming to type B 3.1 of IEC 641-3-2. In

case of cross-over coil winding of HV all spacers shall be properly sheared

and dovetail punched to ensure proper locking. All axial wedges/ runners

shall be properly milled to dovetail shape so that they pass through the

designed spacers freely. Insulation shearing, cutting, milling and

punching operations shall be carried out in such out in such a way, that

there should not be any burr and dimensional variations.

19. RATING AND TERMINAL MARKING PLATES: There shall be rating

plates on the transformer containing the information specified in clause

15.2 of IS: 2026-1977 (part-i). The 50% & 100% load losses of the

transformer should also be mentioned on the rating plate. The following

additional information must also be punched on the plate and imposed two

opposite sides of the body of T/F.

i) Purchase Order No & Date.

ii) Date of inspection.



iii) Property of UHBVN/DHBVN

iv) Make.

20. CORE: Core of the transformers could be of CRGO material or Amorphous

material. (a) CRGO Material:

The Core lamination shall be held rigidly by a steel frame work, which

shall clamp them together to prevent any vibration. The top and bottom

yoke clamping channels shall be tied together with at least 4 Nos tie rods

of minimum 12 mm dia, duly insulated. Only medium weight channels as

per ISS: 808 are to be used. Each core lamination of each yoke as well

as each limb shall be one piece and no joint shall be allowed in the same.

The core shall be provided with lifting lugs suitable for lifting the complete

core and coil assembly of the transformer without transmitting the stresses

to the laminations.

The transformer shall be suitable for over fluxing due to combine effect of

system voltage and frequency up to 12.5% without injurious heating at full

load condition and shall not get saturated.

The laminations shall be made of best quality non-ageing silicon steel cut

from annealed steel plates. These laminations shall be as thin as possible

consistent with mechanically strong constructions. Each lamination shall

be coated with a hot oil proof insulating material on both sides. The

laminations should be free from rust colour spots. The core shall be built

up with lamination of new prime, non ageing low loss, high permeability

CRGO silicon steel. The core material should be HI-B not below. M-IH,

Grade or better or equivalent. The core coils shall have the original

sealing of CGRO manufacturer(s) intact and supplier shall produce the

relevant documents indicating the particulars authenticating that the core

coils of Prime CRGO. M-III or better steel should be actually used at the

time of stage inspection.

Lamination core should be cut at 45o to avoid excessive losses at the

joints. The core material shall be processed by slitting only. Only one

grade and one thickness of core shall be accepted and no mixing of

different grade/thickness of lamination shall be allowed.

UHBVN/DHBVN reserves the right to ask for the original

documents relating to purchase of core to check the genuineness of the

core used for manufacture of UHBVN/DHBVN transformers for which

instructions/guidelines shall be issued after issuance of POs if required.

For the bolts used for clamping the core shall be so insulated that

there is no possibility of contact between edges and the core bolts. The

bolts shall be tested at 2500 volts to earth. To prevent any possibility of

movement of core assembly in transit, the following provisions shall be

made:

i) 4 no. core guides shall be provided at the bottom of the tank.



Alternatively, bottom foot channels of core and core channels shall be

extended to serve this purpose.

ii) The core shall be securely fastened to sides of tank with minimum 4

fixing bolts.

(b) AMORPHOUS METAL:

i) The core shall be high quality Amorphous ribbons having very low loss

formed into wound cores of rectangular shape, bolted together to the

frames firmly to prevent vibration or noise. The complete design of core

must ensure permanency of the core loss with continuous working of the

transformers. The value of the flux density allowed in the design shall be

clearly stated in the offer. Curve showing the properties of the metal shall

be attached with the offer.

ii) Core clamping for amorphous metal transformers:

1. Core clamping shall be with top and bottom U-shaped core clamps

made of sheet steel clamped, HT steel rods for efficient clamping.

2. MS Core clamps shall be painted with varnish or oil resistant paint.

3. MS rods shall be used as tie rods.

4. Suitable provision shall be made in the bottom core clamp/bottom plate

of the transformer to arrest movement of the active part.

iii) The transformers core shall be suitable for over fluxing (due to combined

effect of voltage and frequency) upto 12.5% without injurious heating at

full load conditions and shall not get saturated. The Bidder shall furnish

necessary design data in support of this situation.

iv) No load current shall not exceed 2% of full load current and will be


secondary. Increase of 433 V voltage by 12.5% shall not increase the no

Load Current disproportionately high. Test for magnetic balance by

connecting the LV phase by phase to the rated phase voltage and

measurement of an, bn, cn, Voltage will be carried out.

NOTE: I) “Equal weightage shall be given to the transformers with Amorphous

Metal Core and CRGO core”.

II) In case of variable prices, the price variation in respect of

amorphous metal core shall be to any extent on negative side

as per IEEMA indices applicable for CRGO core but there will

be no price variation allowed for amorphous core on the

positive side.

21. WINDING AND INSULATIONS:

The conductor used for winding shall consist of high conductivity,

non-oxidizing copper /Alluminium. The primary windings shall be

connected in delta and the secondary winding in star (Vector symbol Dyn-

II), so as to produce a positive displacement of 30o from the primary to the

secondary vector of the same phase. The neutral of secondary winding



shall be brought out to a separate insulated terminal. HV windings shall

consist of maximum 2 coils per limb. All delta leads from HT coils as well

as HT line leads should be taken out through SE Copper wires of sufficient

X- sectional area to impart desired Mechanical strength. The current

density in these leads should however not exceed 0.8A / mm2. All the

above leads should be taken out through bakelite tubes HV winding

should be super enameled (SE) of medium coverage as per IS: 4800

(part-II). LV winding may be of DPC or SE of medium coverage as per IS:

4800 (Part –II).

The coils shall be circular in shape and their construction shall be

such that there is no possibility of distortion under any likely conditions of

service. The high and low voltage windings shall be concentric, with the

low tension windings nearest the transformers core and high tension

windings outside. The two windings shall be so placed that they remain

electro magnetically balanced under all conditions of service. The axial

length of the coils must be kept down to a minimum so as to strengthen

the winding against axial stresses under short circuit conditions.

In oil immersed winding, an adequate provision shall be made for

the circulation of oil, so that a very low temperature gradient between

copper and oil is assured and any danger of excessive local heating is

eliminated.

The coils shall be wound to form a continuous coil or a number of

discs and the individual discs separated to provide a distinct oil space

between them. The inner coil shall be adequately insulated from the core.

The insulating cylinders shall have high electrical and mechanical

strength. No strip conductor would on edge shall have a width exceeding

six times its thickness.

All HV and LV coils ends shall be provided with crimped lugs.

Starting and finishing leads to HT coils should be feruled, crimped and

covered with insulating sleeve. These leads should also be clamped

tightly with the body of winding with the help of cotton tape during

manufacture of these coils. The star point on the LV side shall preferably

be properly sleeved and crimped. However, the manufacturer may make

the star point by fixing a neutral bus bar of Copper with the help of bolts,

nuts and spring washers etc. All fixations/joints should be such that there

is no scope for loose contact, local heating, breakage of conductor,

loosening due to vibrations. All the delta leads should be clamped tightly

on to the special frame/bracket making pie connections. This

frame/bracket could be made of bakelite flats having min size of 25X6

mm. The leads leading to the HV bushings terminals then be clamped to

the horizontal support base of ‘pie’ frame so that vibration during short

circuit are not passed on to windings.



Copper strip/foil used for earthing the core should be tinned. The

tinned foil should be properly connected to the channel with bolts and nuts

after removing the paint from the channel underneath the copper foil.

Current density both in LT and HT windings shall not exceed 2.8

Amp./ mm2. THE CONDUCTOR SIZE FOR HT & LT SHALL

ACCORDINGLY BE CHOSEN FROM THE RELEVANT IS

SPECIFICATION AND SHALL BE OF STANDARD SIZE AS PER IS

ONLY.

All transformers shall be designed and constructed to withstand without

damage, thermal & dynamic effects of an external short circuit. The

manufacturer/supplier shall furnish the relevant design data & calculations

in support of having fulfilled this requirement as stipulated under clause-9

of IS: 2026 (Part-I).

Two layers of electrical grade insulation Kraft paper of 2 mil (min)

thickness shall be used as inter layer insulation of HV & LV winding. Axial

ducts for free flow of oil shall be provided with the help of axial wedges

numbering at least 6 Nos. Dovetailed spacers shall be used between coils

of HV winding. Angle shaped or plain end rings made from pre-

compressed press board barriers shall be provided in between HV

windings.

Guides on all the four sides shall be provided to prevent shifting of the

active part and thereby accidentally touching the tank.

Electrical grade insulating Kraft paper used shall be of Triveni, Ballarpur

make, press board made from natural wood pulp, Electrical grade type D

conforming to IS; 1576-1992 shall be used and will be Senapathy Whitely

or better quality make and Gaskets of Talbros, Nucork make.

22. Following minimum internal clearances shall be maintained for the CRGO

core or in accordance with relevant IS:

a) Between HV & LV 10 mm b) Between HV winding and tank wall i) Non-bushing side 30mm ii) Bushing side 40mm iii)Between sections of HV winding 11mm iv) Between HV winding 10mm with bakelite

press board barriers. v) Between HV winding and yoke at ends 25mm with end

rings. vi) Between LV winding and yoke at ends 10mm vii) Between yoke & inside of tank top cover 100mm vii) Between yoke & tank bottom 40mm viii) Between LV winding and core 3mm

c) Clearance (Electricals)

Voltage Medium Clearance phase to phase

Clearance phase to earth

433 Air 75mm 55mm 11000 Air 255mm 205mm



23. LOCK NUTS: Bolts & nuts shall be provided with lock washer or lock nuts. Split pins

shall be used for the purpose of lock nuts.

24. SILICAGEL BREATHER: The silicagel breather device shall be provided and shall have capacity to

contain 250 gm Silicagel.

25. SURFACE PREPARATION & PAINTING.

25.9.1. General

25.9.1.1. All paints shall be applied in accordance with the paint manufacturer’s

recommendations. Particular attention shall be paid to the following:

25.9.1.1.1. Proper storage to avoid exposure as well as extremes of temperature.

25.9.1.1.2. Surface preparation prior to painting.

25.9.1.1.3. Mixing and thinning.

25.9.1.1.4. Application of paints and the recommended limit of time intervals

between coats.

25.9.1.1.5. Shelf life for storage.

25.9.1.2. All paints when applied in a normal full coat, shall be free from runs,

sags, wrinkles, patchiness, brush marks or other defects.

25.9.1.3. All primers shall be well marked into the surface, particularly in areas

where painting is evident, and the first priming coat shall be applied as soon as

possible after cleaning. The paint shall be applied by airless spray according to

manufacture’s recommendations. However, whenever airless spray is not

possible, conventional spray be used with prior approval of purchaser.

25.9.1.4. The supplier shall prior to painting nameplates, lettering gauges sight

glasses, light fittings and similar such items.

25.9.2. Cleaning and Surface preparation

25.9.2.1. After all machining, forming and welding shall been

completed, all steel work surfaces shall be

thoroughly cleaned of rust, scale, welding slag or

spatter and other contamination prior to any

painting.

25.9.2.2. Steel surfaces shall prepared by Short blast

cleaning or Chemical by Seven Tank process including

Phosphating to the appropriate quality.

25.9.2.3. The pressure and volume of the compressed air

supply for blast cleaning shall meet the work

requirement and shall be sufficiently free from all

water contamination to ensure that the cleaning

process is not impaired.

25.9.2.4. Chipping, scraping and steel wire brushing using

manual or power driven tools cannot remove firmly

adherent mill-scale shall only be used where blast

cleaning is impractical. Manufacture to explain such

areas in his technical offer clearly.



25.9.3. Protective Coating:

25.9.3.1. As soon as all items have been cleaned and within

four hours of the subsequent drying. They shall be given

suitable anti-corrosion protection.

25.9.4. Paint Material.

Followings are the types of paint that may be suitably used

for the items to be painted at shop and supply of matching

paint to site:

25.9.4.1. Heat resistant paint (Hot oil Proof) for inside surface.

25.9.4.2. For external surfaces one coat of Thermo Setting powder paint

or 1 coats of Zinc chromate primer followed by 2 coats of Synthetic

Enamel /Polyurethane base paint. These paints can be either air-drying or

stoving.

25.9.4.3. The colour of the finishing coats shall be dark admiral gray

conforming to No. 632 of ISS-5 of 1961

25.9.5. Painting procedure

25.9.5.1. All painting shall be carried out in conformity with

both Specification and with the paint manufacture’s

recommendation. All paints in anyone particular system,

whether shop or site applied, shall originate from one paint

manufacture.

25.9.5.2. Particular attention shall be paid to the

manufacturer’s instructions on storage, mixing, thinning and

pot life. The paint shall only be applied in the manner detailed

by the manufacture’s e.g. brush, roller, conventional or airless

spray and shall be applied under the manufacture’s

recommended condition Minimum and maximum time intervals

between coast shall be closely followed.

25.9.5.3. All prepared steel surfaces should be primed before

visible re-rusting occurs or within 4 hours whichever is

sooner.

25.9.5.4. Chemical treated steel surface shall be primed as

soon as the surface is dry and while the surface is still

warm.

25.9.5.5. Where the quality of film is impaired by excess film

thickness (wrinkling, mud cracking or general

softness) the Supplier shall remove the unsatisfactory

paint coating and apply another. As a general rule,

dry film thickness should not exceed the specified

minimum dry film thickness by more than 25%. In all

instances where two or more coats of the same paint

are specified, such coating may or may not be of

contrasting colours.



25.9.5.6. Paint applied to items that are not be painted shall be

removed at Supplier’s expense, leaving the surface

clean, unstained and undamaged.

25.9.6. Damaged Paintwork

25.9.6.1. Any damage occurring to any part of a painting

scheme shall be made good to the same standard of

corrosion protection and appearance as that originally

employed.

25.9.7. Any damage paint work shall be made good as follows:

25.9.7.1. The damaged area, together with an area extending

25 mm around its boundary, shall be cleaned down to

bare metal.

25.9.7.2. A priming coat shall be immediately applied, followed

by a full paint finish equal to that originally applied and

extending 50 mm around the perimeter of the original damage.

25.9.7.3. The repainted surface shall present a smooth

surface. This shall be obtained by carefully

chamfering the paint edges before and after priming.

25.9.8. Dry Film Thickness

25.9.8.1. To the maximum extent practicable the coats shall

be applied as a continuous film of uniform thickness

and free of pores. Overspray, skips, runs, sags and

drips should be avoided. The different coats may or

may not be of the same colour.

25.9.8.2. Each coat of paint shall be allowed to harden before

the next is applied as per manufacturer’s

recommendation.

25.9.8.3. Particular attention must be paid to full film

thickness at edges.

25.9.8.4. The requirements for the dry film thickness (DFT) of

paint and the materials to be used shall be as given below.

Sr. No.

Paint Type Area to be painted

No. of coats Total Dry film thickness (mm)

1 Thermo setting paint Inside

Inside outside

01 01

20 microns 60 microns

2 Liquid paint a) Zinc chromate (primer) b) Synthetic Enamel/ Poly Urethene (Finish coat) c) Hot oil paint/ Varnish

Outside Outside inside

01 02 01

30 microns 25 microns each 35/ 10 microns

.



26. RAW MATERIAL

The raw material used in the manufacture of transformers shall be brand

new and of the best quality available in the market.

27. TEST AND INSPECTION

All tests shall be carried out in accordance with clause 16 of IS : 2026

(Part-I) amended to date or any other applicable standard for

transformers.

27.1. ROUTINE TESTS

All transformers shall be subject to the following routine tests at the

manufacturer’s works in accordance with IS: 2026 and 1180 (Part-I):-

a) Measurement of winding resistance.

b) Ratio, polarity and phase relationship.

c) Measurement of impedance voltage/short circuit impedance.

d) Maximum Load losses at 50% load & 100% load at 75o C

e) No load current. f) Insulation resistance g) Induced over voltage withstand. h) Separate source voltage withstand. i) Peel off test for paint. j) Oil leakage test with pressure of 0.8 KG/CM2 above atmospheric

pressure for 10 minutes. The losses shall be measured by three-watt meter method & three volt

meter/Ammeters shall be used to measure voltage/Current.

27.2 TYPE TESTS

The supplier shall supply copies of following type test certificates carried

out at a Govt., recognized Testing House/Laboratory

27.2.1 (i) AIR PRESSURE TEST: The tank shall be fixed with a dummy cover

with all fittings including bushing in position and shall be subjected to the

following pressure created inside the tank.

a) 0.8 kg/cm2 above the atmospheric pressure for 30 minutes.

b) A vacuum corresponding to (-) 0.7 kg/cm2 for 10 minutes. Permanent

deflection of flat plate, after pressure has been released, shall not

exceed the value given below:-

Length of plate Deflection

Upto 750 mm 5mm

751 to 1250mm 6mm

The oil leakage test shall be carried out on 10% of transformers in each

lot. The firm shall ensure to get this test conducted strictly as per relevant

ISS.

(ii) TEMPERATURE RISE TEST: shall be carried out on one unit from

each lot offered for inspection to ensure that it meets with the requirement

specified under Clause-5 of this specification. The tenderers shall submit

calculations for temperature rise along with the tender.



(iv) MAGNETIC BALANCE TEST: shall be conducted by connecting the B

phase (central) of LV to rated voltage and measurement of LV side (Un,

Vn, Wn) voltages, Value shall be within a tolerance of (+/-) 2% (middle full

& sides half).

Magnetic Balance test (Type Test) should be conducted on one

sample from each lot for all ratings of transformers.

27.2.2 Impulse Voltage Test; The test on all the three limbs of HT side as per clause-12 of ISS: 2026-

1977 shall be got conducted in the presence of Nigam’s representative

from some recognized/Govt. Test House. The dispatches shall only be

allowed after successful conductance of this test, on one transformer.

27.2.3 SHORT CIRCUIT TEST: The test shall be carried out in accordance with the details specified in IS:

2026-1977 from some recognized/ Govt. Test House.

Charges for routine tests and type tests including impulse voltage

withstand test and short circuit test will be included in the quoted prices.

The purchaser also reserves the right to get any number of additional

Units type tested. However, the cost shall be paid and as such the test

charges for these tests should be quoted separately. No supplies will be

allowed to be dispatched without inspection by the purchaser/its

representative and without carrying out the impulse and short circuit tests

satisfactorily.

27.2.4 . Note: - If sample fail in any of the type tests viz. short circuit tests or

impulse tests, the whole lot shall be considered rejected. The firm

shall offer fresh lot for inspection and get the type tests carried out

again at its own cost.

27.3 TRANSFORMER OIL:

The transformer oil shall be purchased by the contractor directly from the

transformer oil manufacturers whose products have been given ISI

certificate mark. The firm shall ensure to get the tests conducted strictly

as per relevant ISS.

i) Net quantity of oil (up to 30o C mark) excluding the oil soaked in

core-coil assembly shall be given in G.T.P.

ii) Approximate quantity of oil soaked in core-coil assembly may

however be given separately.



27.4 PHYSICAL CHECK OF VARIOUS DIMENSIONS (INTERNAL AND

EXTERNAL) WEIGHT CLEARANCE ETC.

One number transformer from each lot shall be opened for checking of

core weight, size and weight of HT & LT conductor, quantity of oil and

various clearance etc.

27.5 INSPECTION:

STAGE INSPECTION: Stage inspection may be carried out by the

inspecting officers of the Nigam or its nominated agency during the course

of manufacture. The core shall be processed by slitting only which shall

be carried out at the supplier’s works or can be got carried out on job

order basis from other source. The core coils offered for stage inspection

shall have the original sealing of CRGO manufacturer intact. Loose coils

without the original seal of manufacturer shall not be accepted.

FINAL INSPECTION:

The inspection shall be carried out by Nigam’s representative or any

outside inspection agency to be nominated by the Nigam. All tests and

inspection shall be made at the place of manufacturer unless otherwise

specifically agreed upon by the manufacturer and purchaser at the time of

purchase. The manufacturer shall provide all reasonable facilities to the

inspectors representing the purchaser, without charges to satisfy that the

material is being manufactured in accordance with the specification.

The Nigam shall inspect, examine and test equipment/material

through its official (s) and/or through an outside agency nominated by

UHBVN/DHBVN at the Manufacturer’s/supplier’s works during or after the

manufacture of goods prior to dispatch on receipt of a clear notice of

minimum three weeks in advance to be reckoned from the date of receipt

of call by purchaser. The supplier/contractor shall provide all facilities as

may be required to carry out the tests in accordance with approved

standards free of cost. The sampling of T/Fs to be offered for inspection

shall be in accordance with the latest provisions of the relevant IS of latest

edition for carrying out the various tests at firms works.

It shall be the responsibility of the manufacturer to provide during

inspection, all testing instruments duly calibrated from a Govt. Test

House/Govt. approved test house within last 12 months. Before using an

instrument, the Nigam’s representative shall ensure that the seal of the

test house is intact and at none of the calibrated points the instrument has

error more than the prescribed limits of error.

Manufacturers shall maintain a complete record of the Routine tests

carried out on the transformer and shall produce the same whenever

desired by the purchaser.

27.5.1 The purchaser has the right to have the tests carried out at his own cost

by an independent agency whenever there is any dispute regarding the



quality of supply. If the transformer, fails in the test, the cost shall be

borne by the supplier and if passes, the cost shall be borne by the Nigam.

27.5.2 UHBVN/DHBVN shall get all the transformers of the complete lot tested

out at Nigam’s Stores after receiving the same in the store. In case any

T/f fails in tests, the same shall be replaced by the supplier at his own cost

within shortest possible time not exceeding fifteen days.

27.5.3 Fake Inspection calls



the supplier shall be liable to pay a fixed penalty of Rs. 20, 000/- for each


28 PACKING:

The transformers shall be delivered suitably packed. Although the method

of packing is left to the discretion of manufacturer but it should be robust

enough for rough handling that is occasioned during transportation by

Nigam.

All accessories shall be dispatched in boxes or cases. They shall be of

tin, securely bound with wire and shall have all descriptive marking

stamped thereon.

The transportation arrangements of the transformers from the place

of manufacture to the destination are also required to be such that the

transformers are properly transported to the UHBVN/DHBVN stores. It will

be preferable to depute one suitable technical hand to get the

transformers checked in Stores before the same are taken on books and

attend to those transformers which are found leaking which have

developed some other defect during transportation.

29 CONTRACT DRAWINGS: Complete set of transformer drawing should be

submitted alongwith the tender. Four blue prints of the general outline and

assembly drawing for the transformer shall be submitted to this office within

two weeks of placement of order. The drawing should give dimensions,

weight, accessories, plan, front and side elevation. The dimensions, weights

mentioned in the above drawing should be same as guaranteed in the tender/

offer.

No negative tolerance will be allowed on dimensions/weight.

30. DEVIATIONS: - No deviation in technical particulars as per specifications

shall be accepted and the offers of such bidders who do not met with

UHBVN/DHBVN specifications are liable to be ignored.

31. GUARNTEED TECHNICAL PASRTICULARS

The guaranteed technical particulars of the transformer shall be given by

the tender (Annexure-A) along with the tender. Tenders without GTPS

shall be out rightly rejected



33. WARRANTY:

The supplier/ Contractor shall be responsible to replace free of cost with

no transportation and insurance expenses to the purchaser up to the

destination of material equipment, the whole or any part of material which

under normal and proper use and maintenance, proves defective in

material or workmanship within 78 months from the date of receipt in

Nigam’s Stores or 72 months from the date of installation, whichever is

earlier. Such replacement shall be effected by the Supplier/Contractor,

within a reasonable time not exceeding 1 month of the intimation to

defects. However, in case the supplier fails to effect replacement within

stipulated period they shall be liable to pay a penalty @18% of the cost of

the DTs for the remaining period of warranty of the same.

34. FASETENERS

All bolts, studs, screw threads pipe threads, bolt heads and nuts shall

comply with the appropriate Indian Standards for metric threads or the

technical equivalent.

Bolts or studs shall not be less than 6 mm in diameter except when used

for small wiring terminals. 2 Nos. anti theft fasteners of steel on two

diagonally opposite corners of the tank shall be provided. All nuts and

pins shall be adequately locked.

Wherever possible, bolts shall be fitted in such a manner that in the event

of failure of locking resulting in the nuts working loose and falling off, the

bolt will remain in position.

All ferrous bolts, nuts and washers placed in outdoor positions shall be

treated to prevent corrosion, by hot dip galvanizing, except high tensile

steel bolts and spring washers which shall be electro galvanized/plated.

Appropriate precautions shall be taken to prevent electrolytic action

between dissimilar metals.

Each bolt or stud shall project at least one thread but not more than three

threads through the nut except when otherwise approved for terminal

board studs or relay stems. If bolts nuts are placed so that they are

inaccessible by means of ordinary spanners, special spanners shall be

provided.

The length of the screwed portion of the bolts shall be such that no screw

thread may form part of a shear plane between members.

Taper washers shall be provided where necessary.

Protective washers of suitable material shall be provided front and back or

the securing screws.

35. Completely Self Protected (CSP) Features additional

The transformers shall have CSP (completely self protected) features. The

transformer along with all fittings such as metering cubicle should be

suitable for installation and operate as per H-pole drawing (enclosed as

Annexure-A)



The transformers shall have the following CSP features:

i) Internal HV Fuse on the HT side of transformer:

Specification for the HV fuse: Expulsion/any other suitable type of

fuse shall be placed in series with the primary winding. The fuse shall be

mounted normally inside of the primary bushing for the three phases and

connected to the high voltage winding through a terminal block. This has

to protect that part of the electrical distribution system which is ahead of

the distribution transformers from faults which occur inside the distribution

transformers i.e. either on the windings or some other part of the

transformers. It shall be ensured that the fuse does not blow for faults on

the secondary side (LT side) of the transformer i.e. the blowing

characteristics of the fuse and LT breaker shall be so coordinated such

that the fuse shall not blow for any faults on the secondary side of the

transformer beyond LT breakers and those faults shall be cleared by the

LT breaker only.

(ii) Internally mounted oil immersed LT breaker on the LV side of the transformer.

3 Pole LT Circuit breaker:

All LT faults after the breaker shall be clear by this breaker. As such it

shall be designed for perfect coordination with HT fuse link. The Bidder

shall furnish the time/current characteristics of LT circuit breaker and 11

KV fuses for various current multiples.

The two characteristics shall be drawn on the same sheet to indicate

coordination between the circuit breaker and fuse. The Bidder shall carry

out coordination test as indicated above and this forms one of the tests as

for acceptance test.

The breaker shall be coordinated thermally with the transformer design to

follow closely the variations of coil temperature due to fluctuating load and

ambient temperatures. The breaker trip setting shall be kept considering

continuous loading of 130% for 6-hours duration at an average ambient

temperature of 40 o C.

This is to be accomplished by connecting the breaker in series between

the secondary windings and the secondary bushings. The breaker shall

be located in the same oil as the core and coil assembly so that the bi-

metal are sensitive to the temperature of oil as well as the load current.

The Circuit breaker shall also be closed and opened manually standing on

ground. The current carrying parts of breakers shall be copper plus a set

of copper tungsten current interrupting contacts.

The Cross section of the current carrying parts of the breakers shall

withstand the full load current at a current density not more than 2.5

A/Sq.mm (for additional mechanical strength the area should be more).

iii) The supplier can also offer the transformer with MCCB (Specifications

attached) mounted on it instead of in-built breaker.



36. Earthing Connections

Two earthing connections shall be provided with connection facilities withs

25 x 6 mm GI strip. The bolts shall be located on the lower side of the

transformer and shall be of M12 size. The earthing should be suitable to

carry the full fault current. Further, there should be separate earthing for

the STAR point on LT side as well as on the body of the transformer.

37. FITTINGS: Each transformer shall be provided with all the required

fittings as per Annexure-D.

38. PENALTY FOR NON PERFORMANCE:

38.1. Purchaser reserves the right to reject any transformer during the test at supplier’s works, if it is found that actual measured losses are more than the values quoted by the bidder

38.2. Purchaser reserves the right to reject any transformer during the test at supplier’s works, if the temperature rise exceeds the guaranteed values. 38.3. Purchaser reserves the right to reject any transformer during the test at

supplier’s works, if the impedance values differ from the guaranteed values including tolerance.

38.4. Purchaser also reserves the right to retain the rejected transformer and take it into service until the Bidder replaces it with a new transformer at no extra cost. The delivery as per contract will be counted when the new transformer as per specification is provided by the manufacture.

39. PROTOTYPE TRANSFORMER

The prototype transformer on which type test got conducted shall be supplied to UHBVN/ DHBVN duly sealed after completion of type testing in the beginning itself before commencement of supply. The bidder shall furnish an affidavit that all his balance transformers shall meet with prototype in all respects ( internal & external ). The Nigam can randomly select any transformer & verify the internal / external details with the prototype sample at any time during warranty period. Type test certificates for the tests carried out on prototype of same specifications shall be submitted along with the bid. The purchase may select any transformer from the offered lot for inspection during subsequent lots for carrying out temperature rise test from any Govt. approved lab. Further the purchaser may select the transformer for type tests randomly. 40. CHALLENGE CLAUSE: -

"The material offered/received after the inspection by the authorized inspecting officer may again be subjected to the test for losses or any other parameter from any Testing House/in-house technique of the Nigam & the results if found deviating un-acceptable or not complying to approved GTP's the bidder shall arrange to supply the replacement within thirty (30) days of such detection at his cost including to & fro transportation." In addition to this penalty @10% of cost of the inspected lot of material shall be imposed.

Director/Technical-I UHBVN, Panchkula

Director/Project, DHBVN, Hisar

CE/PD&C UHBVN, Panchkula

CE/P&D DHBVN, Hisar

FA&CAO/MM UHBVN, Panchkula

FA&CAO/MM DHBVN, Hisar

SE/P&D UHBVN, Panchkula

SE/P&D DHBVN, Hisar



ANNEXURE ‘A’

GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR 6.3, 10, 16, 20 KVA COPPER WOUND & 40 KVA Aluminium wound CSP TYPE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS.

1. Normal continuous output under site conditions in KVA.

2. Continuous output as a percentage of Indian Standard Specifications rating.

3. Over-load capacity for 2 hours under site conditions after

running continuously at full load.

4. With annual weighted ambient temp of 35oC, maximum temperature rise of:

a) Oil by thermometer in _________ oC. b) Winding by resistance in __________oC. c) Maximum hot spot in temperature in ___oC (by calculation). 5. CORE PARTICULARS a) Thickness of laminations: b) Name of Supplier: c) Curve supplied by the manufactures of the core plate,

material (Loss/Kg.) d) Core dia in mm: e) Core weight in Kg. f) Core frame size. g) No. of steps” h) Type and Grade of Core Material i) Maximum flux density at: i) Normal voltage (in tesla). ii) 12.5% over voltage (in tesla) 6. WINDING PARTICULARS a) Copper /Al., weight of HT coils (in Kg.) i) Bare. ii) Covered. b Copper/Al., weight of LT coils ( in Kg.) i) Bare. ii) Covered. c) Size of Conductor (in sq.mm) as per ISS i) HT II) LT d) Total number of turns per phase: i) HT II) LT e) Current density in Amp./Sq.mm (Max.) i) HT II) LT

7. i) No load current at 100% voltage and 50 Hz in Amps. ii) No load current 112.5% of normal voltage & frequency. 8. Maximum losses guaranteed.

i) Maximum loses at 50% load in watt at 75oC ii) Maximum losses at 100% load in watt at 75oC. 9. Winding Resistance at 75oC (ohm/phase).

a) HV:

b) LV:



10. Efficiency at 75oC at unity P.F. and 0.8 P.F.

At unity P.F. At 0.8 P.F. i) Full load ii) ¾ load iii) ½ load iv) ¼ load

11. Load at which maximum efficiency occurs: 12. Reactance at full load: 13. Impedance at full load at 75oC

14. Regulations:

a) Full load at unit power factor. b) Full load 0.8 power factor lagging.

15. Minimum inter clearance a) Between HV & LV b) Between HV winding & tank wall. i) Non-bushing side ii) Bushing side.

c) Between section of HV winding d) Between HV winding e) Between HV winding & yoke ( at ends) f) Between LV winding & yoke (at ends) g) Between yoke and inside of tank top cover h) Between yoke & tank bottom i) Between LV winding & Core

16. Internal Insulation a) Turn insulation High voltage. b) Turn insulation low voltage. c) Insulation core to low voltage: d) Interlayer insulation of HV & LV Coils: e) type of insulation used for HV & LV windings. f) (Angle shaped/plain end rings made from pre-compressed

board shall be used between the end coils and the core)

17. Dry flash over voltage at 50 cycles of HT & LT bushings in KV. 18. Wet flashover voltage at 50 cycles of HT Bushings.

19. Impulse flash over voltage with 1.2/50 positive wave of HT

bushings in KV. a) One minute dry withstand power frequency voltage in KV. b) One minute withstand power frequency voltage. c) Puncture voltage of HT bushings at Power frequency in KV.

20 Impulse withstand voltage of T/fs windings. a) with 1.2/50 positive wave KV: b) with 1.2/50 Negative wave KV: 21. Spark over length of HT bushings (i.e. string length MM). 22. HT pressure test (separate sources of HT windings 50 cycles for

one minute. 23. Quantity of oil in transformers. 24. Weight of complete T/fs with oil: 25. Tank thickness sides



26. Tank thickness of top and bottom: 27. Weight of tanks fittings and accessories. 28. Approx. dimensions (Lx B x H) in mm: i) Overall ii) Inside of tank iii) Max. depth of HT coils (in cms) iv) Radial width of oil duct between LT & HT v) Standard reference of bushings vi) Type of transformer, shell or core

vii) Standard reference of transformers viii) Vector group of connections ix) Current density of HT delta wire

Note: Above approved GTPs shall be applicable up to Type Tests/First Lot. For subsequent supplies, all parameters as per First Lot shall be maintained. But in no case any parameter less than GTPs shall be accepted in First Lot. In case any type tests are waived off, then all technical parameters & dimensions shall be as per type tested Transformers and no negative variation shall be accepted. .



ANNEXURE ‘B’ GUARANTEED CHARACTERISTICS OF NEW TRANSFORMER OIL IN DRUMS/TANKERS AND IN TRANSFORMERS A. OIL IN DRUMS/TANKERS S.No. Characteristics Requirement 1. Appearance Oil shall be clear & transparent &

free from suspended matter or sediments.

2. Density at 29.5oC (Max.) 0.89 g/cm2

3. Kinematics viscosity at 27oC (Min.) 27CST 4. Interfacial tension at 27oC (min.) 0.04 N/M 5. Flash point (Min.) 140oC 6. Pour point (Max.) -6oC 7. Neutralization value

a) Total acidity (Max.) b) In organic acidity

0.03 mg KOH/gm Nil

8. Corrosive sulphur Non-corrosive 9. Electric strength (Break down voltage) Min.

a) New untreated oil: If the above value is not obtained the oil shall be treated.

b) After treatment.

a) 30 KV (rms) b) 60 KV (rms)

10. Dielectric dissipation factor (Tan-delta) at 90oC 0.002 (Max.) 11. Water content )Max.) 50 ppm 12. Specific resistance (resistivity)

a) At 90oC (Min.) b) At 27oC (Min.)

a) 35x1012 ohm-cm b) 900 x1012 ohm-cm

13. Oxidation stability a)Neutralization value after oxidation (max.) b)Total sludge after oxidation (Max.)

0.40 mg KOH/gm 0.10% by weight

14. Ageing characteristics after accelerated ageing (open breaker method with copper catalyst) a) Specific resistance (Resistivity) i) At 27oC Min.) ii) At 90oC (Min.) b) Dielectric dissipation factor (Tan delta) at 90oC c) Total acidity (Max.) d) Total sludge value percent by weight

2.5 x 1012 ohm-cm 0.2 x 1012 ohm-cm 0.2 Max. 0.05 mg KOH/gm 0.05 Max.

15. Presence of oxidation inhibitor Absent B. CHARACTERSTICS OF OIL IN THE TRANSFORMERS The important characteristics of the transformer oil after it is filled in the transformer (within 3 months of filling) shall be as follows:- Sr No

Characteristics Permissible limit satisfactory for use

1. Electric Strength (Breakdown voltage KV) Prior to energisation

50 KV minimum

2. Water content (PPM) 25 PPM (max.) 3. Specific Resistance (Resistivity)

ohm-cm at 90oC 2X1012 ohm-Cm (Min)

4. Dielectric dissipation factor tan delta) at 90oC

0.01 (Max)

5. Neutralization value (Total acidity)

0.055 mg. KOH/gm (Max)

6. Sediment and/or perceptible sludge

Absent

7. Flash point 140oC (Min) 8. Interfacial tension at 27oC 0.030 N/m(Min).



ANNEXURE ‘C’ SOURCE OF MATERIAL INSPECTION ETC. S. No

Item Source of Material

Place of manufacture

Place of testing and inspection

1. Copper 2. Aluminium 3. Core laminations 4. Transformer Oil 5. ERW Tubes. 6. Steel Sheets 7. Bushings 8. a) Porcelain HV

b) Epoxy LV

9. Insulating Cylinders 10. Insulating Paper. 11. Corrugated Cylinders. PLACE: SIGNATURE OF TENDER DATE: NAME:

DESIGNATION



ANNEXURE ‘D’ FITTINGS AND ACESSORIES FOR 6.3, 10, 16, 20 & 40 KVA TRANSFORMERS

(i) 3 no. 11 KV porcelain bushings with brass studs fitted with single gap arcing horns along with bi metallic connectors/thimbles.

(ii) 4 no. 0.433 KV porcelain bushings with brass studs (neutral to be made available on LV side) / thimbles.

(iii) Drain cum sampling valve made of steel welded to tank as per drawing.

(iv) One set of lifting lugs. (v) Rating & diagram plate of brass containing details

as provided in IS:2026 and also “Property of UHBVN/DHBVN” shall be engraved in bold letters.

vi) 4-Star rating label in accordance with colour design, logo etc., shall be provided on the transformer, as per the design / recommendations of Bureau of efficiency (BEE Note: Actual Losses at 50% & 100% Load should also be marked.

vii) Two earthing terminals, one on either side of the base. (Details as per clause 36)

viii) Air release valve arrangement. ix) ERW elliptical tube radiators of minimum thickness of

18 SWG. x) Oil level gauge indicating three positions of oil marked

as under:- Minimum (-) 0.5o C 30o C Maximum 95oc

xi) Thermometer pocket to be suitably plugged with a threaded cap.

xii) Base Channel. xiii) UHBVN/DHBVN logo shall be embossed on the side

of the tank. .NOTES

i) The bushing rods, bushings cap washers & bushings nuts etc, should be made of brass.

ii) The threading on the nuts and bushings rods should be of one uniform specification.

iii) All MS fittings & fasteners etc. may preferably be elctro-galvanzied.

iv) The special tools for operating the valves shall be supplied with the transformer.

iv) To ensure that transformer is not opened by UHBVN/DHBVN field staff during warranty period, 6 No. suitable clamps shall be welded with top cover & tank body as well as drain wall flange after the transformer has been inspected and sealed by UHBVN/DHBVN inspecting officer. However, the arrangement shall be got approved by the supplier from UHBVN/DHBVN before commencement of supplies.

v) TEST REQUIREMENTS FOR CONNECTORS

Technical features HT LT 1. Rated normal current rating 50 Amps. 200 Amps. 2. Short time current rating (Amps for

1Sec) 3000 3000

3 Tensile Strength 110 kg 110 kg 4. Resistance test: The resistance of 1.25 meter of conductor including

the connector shall not exceed the resistance of 1.25 meter of identical conductor without connector by more than 10%.

4. Temperature rise test: The steady state temperature rise of connector above the reference ambient temperature of 40oC when carrying rated current, shall not exceed 45oC.



VI)

TYPE TESTS ACCEPTANCE TESTS ROUTINE TESTS a) Tensile test a) Tensile test a) Visual examination b) Resistance test b) Resistance test b) Dimensional check c) Temperature rise test

c) Temperature rise test

d) Short time d) Dimensional check e) Dimensional check

NOTE:

1. Permissible tolerance shall be (+) 5% on the dimensions indicated. 2. The minimum clearance between phase to phase shall be 25mm and

phase to earth 20mm when the connectors are fixed in position on the terminal block of MOCB on the HT side.

3. All the above tests shall be carried out in accordance with IS: 5561, latest version.

4. Supplier of the transformer/connector shall provide necessary testing facilities at his works for the acceptance tests.

of 21

Specification No. CSC-47/R-I /DH/UH/P&D/2010-2011

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR WHOLE CURRENT A.C. SINGLE PHASE TWO WIRE STATIC ENERGY METER

OF

ACCURACY CLASS 1.0(10-60A)

WITH COMMUNICATION FACILITY General Manager/P&D, General Manager/P&D, DHBVN, Hisar UHBVN, Panchkula

Issue of the Month:

of 21

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR WHOLE CURRENT A.C.SINGLE PHASE TWO WIRE STATIC ENERGY METER OF ACCURACY CLASS 1.0 (10-60A) WITH COMMUNICATION FACILITY

1. SCOPE

The specification covers the design, manufacturing, testing, supply of AC whole current 1 phase 2 wire static watt hour meter for measurement of active energy (kWh) with initial and sustained accuracy of class 1.0 for solidly earthed system having power factor in the range of zero to unity(Lagging/Leading).

2. APPLICABLE STANDARDS Unless otherwise especially modified and to the extent so modified from these specification, the meter shall comply with the latest version of IS-13779, IEC-62053-21:2003 and CBIP Technical report 88/1998(latest amendments). The Manufacturer should have ISO 9000 or above certification.

3. CLIMATIC CONDITIONS The Static Energy Meter shall be suitable for satisfactorily working under the following climatic conditions: -




4. Max. yearly weighted average ambient temperature 320C

5. Max. altitude above mean sea level 1000 m





10. Maximum wind pressure 195 kg/m2 The meter shall be suitably designed and treated for normal life and satisfactory operation under the hot and hazardous tropical climate conditions and shall be dust and vermin proof. All the parts and surface, which are subject to corrosion, shall either be made of such material or shall be provided with such protective finish which provides suitable protection to them from any injurious effect of excessive humidity.

4. RATINGS:

The rating of kWh meter should be as follows:- Voltage Rating 240 V AC Current Rating (Basic Current) 10A Maximum Continuous Current 600% of Basic Current Starting current 0.2% of Basic Current at unity power factor Current Rating 10-60 A Class of Accuracy 1.0( No drift in tolerance of accuracy for 10 years)

Frequency 50 Hz +/-5% Power loss As per ISS-13779 Resistance to surge voltage >6 kV peak As per ISS-13779

of 21

1.2/50Micro sec. IEC-62053-21:2003/CBIP-88 Test voltage of 50Hz for 1 Min. 2 kV rms Clock time accuracy +/- 5 ppm at 25°C Temperature rise As per ISS-13779 Power consumption by meter As per ISS-13779

5. SUPPLY SYSTEM:

Supply Voltage 240V AC Voltage variation range -40% to +20% Frequency 50Hz +/- 5% Power Factor +1 to -1

6. QUANTITY TO BE MEASURED / MONITORED

The display order shall be:- 6.1 Default Display (Continuously on auto scroll). 6.1.1 Cumulative Active Energy kWh along with legend.

6.1.2 Current calendar month MD in kW with legend. These parameters should be displayed on the LCD continuously for a period of

15 seconds on Auto scroll. In case of power failure, the meter should display above parameters i.e. 6.1.1 & 6.1.2 with push button.

6.2 On Demand Display(with push button)

6.2.1 Internal diagnostics

6.2.2 Cumulative kWh 6.2.3 Date

6.2.4 Real Time 6.2.5 Voltage in V 6.2.6 Current I 6.2.7 Inst. Power kW 6.2.8 Current calendar month MD in kW 6.2.9 Last calendar month cumulative kWh 6.2.10 Last calendar month MD in kW

6.2.11 Last calendar month MD in kW occurrence Date 6.2.12 Last calendar month MD in kW occurrence Time 6.2.13 Meter Serial Number

The meter’s display should return to default display mode (continues auto scroll) if push button is not operated for more than 10 seconds.

7 Auto Display

The meter shall have LED/LCD backlit type electronic display with minimum six digits with

additional provision for legend. The decimal digit shall be clearly distinguished from integral digit. The registered parameters i.e. the data stored in meter shall not be lost/ affected in the event of power failure. The display shall also not be effected by electric and magnetic disturbances. The meter shall have non volatile memory (NVM) which does not need battery back up. The NVM shall have minimum retention period 10 years. The minimum character dimensions shall be 8.5mmx5mm. Impulse Counter & Stepper Motor shall not be provided in the meter.

Default MD integration period will be 30 min, however, it should have facility to

change to 15 min at site with proper security feature.

of 21

7.1 Meter shall store MD integration period along with date and time at the end of every integration period, new MD shall be previous MD and store, whichever is higher and the same shall be displayed.

7.2 MD shall be reset automatically at the defined date (or period) or through CMRI

manually as when required. The re-setting shall be automatic at the end of every month i.e. 24 hours of last day of month. Six last M.D. values shall be stored in the memory also with auto reset count in numbers. In addition to this the cumulative kWh shall also be stored in the memory at same time at the end of every month. The meter should be capable of storing last 6 month data with an option to retrieve the same.

7.3 For single phase meters MD can be monthly Auto reset or transaction through CMRI.

7.4 BILLING DATA

7.4.1 Meter serial number, Date and time, kWh, MD in kW, History of kWh & MD for last 6 months along with TOD readings.

7.4.2 All the above parameters (namely kWh, MD in kW) are meter readings. 7.4.3 All these data shall be accessible for reading, recording and spot billing by

downloading through optical port on MRI or Laptop computers. 8 STARTING CURRENT: The starting current of the meter shall be 0.2% lb at unity power factor.

9 RUNNING AT NO LOAD

The meter should comply with the requirements of IEC 1036/IS-13779 and CBIP Technical Report 88/1998 (Latest amendment)

10 ACCURACY & LIMITS OF ERRORS:

The error of meters shall not exceed the permissible limits per standard IS 13779 (latest version) and CBIP Technical Report 88/1998 (with latest amendment) for a period of at least 10 years from the date of supply. In case any drift is notified which is beyond the permissible limits, the bidder shall re-calibrate the meter for correct accuracy and if re- calibration is not possible, the meter shall be replaced by a new meter without any extra cost.

11 TEST OUTPUT DEVICE:

The meter shall have a test output device in the form of a pulse indicator accessible from the front and capable of being monitored by suitable testing equipment.

12 TESTS 12.1 TYPE TESTS & TEST CERTIFICATES

Meters shall be fully type tested as per IS: 13779 (latest version). The type

test certificates shall be submitted along with the offer. Offer without Type Test Report shall be liable for rejection. The Type test certificates shall not be more than 3 years old. Test certificates of appropriate range shall be accepted.

The type certificates shall be from institutions as per Appendix ‘G’ of CBIP Technical

report 88 (amended)

of 21

12.2 ROUTINE TESTS

The Acceptance and Routine tests shall be carried out as per latest version of IS-13779.

12.3 EFFECT OF MAGNETIC FILED OF EXTERNAL ORIGIN.

The meter shall be provided with adequate magnetic shielding so that any external magnetic field (AC electro-magnets/DC magnet) as per the value specify in CBIP technical report-88 (with latest amendment) application on the meter shall not effect the proper functioning and recoding of energy as per error limits prescribed by CBIP. However, the test certificates of the designed meter for AC abnormal magnetic field & DC abnormal magnetic field as per clause 5.6.2 of CBIP -88 report (with latest version). The required test certificate for the design rating of meter from the NABL accredited laboratory shall be submitted by the bidders along with the bid.

12.4 D.C IMMUNITY TEST

The meter should comply with the requirements of IEC 1036/IS-13779 and CBIP Technical Report 88/1998 (Latest amendment)

12.5 INFLUENCE QUANTITIES

The meter shall work satisfactorily with guaranteed accuracy as per limit of IS 13779 and CBIP Technical Report 88/1988 (with latest amendments) under presence of the following quantities:

12.5.1 External Magnetic field 0.5 Tesla. 12.5.2 Electro Magnetic Field. 12.5.3 Radio Frequency interference. 12.5.4 Vibration. 12.5.5 Harmonic wave form. 12.5.6 Voltage fluctuation. 12.5.7 Electromagnetic high frequency field.

12.6 ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY

The meter shall conform to provisions as per IS-13779 and IEC-62053-21:2003 and CBIP Technical Report 88/1998 (Latest Amendments) and should be protected against radiated interference from either magnetic or radio frequency sources. The meter shall also withstand DC immunity test so as to ensure that the meter does not saturate on passage of direct current.

12.7 METER POWER SUPPLY

The meter should withstand the maximum system voltage i.e 288 volts continuously. In case of failure of power supply, the meter should display the measured quantities minimum for 24 hours. This event will be logged in the history as power failure (Indicating time, date & duration).

13. CONSTRUCTION 13.1 METER CASE & COVER

The meter case & cover will be ultrasonically welded with provision of two No. polycarbonate seals, one on either side, so that Meter’s internal parts are accessible only after breaking seals and ultrasonic welding of case/cover of the meter and it should become unserviceable. The meter base can be opaque and meter cover will be Transparent or translucent with transparent window.

of 21

13.1.1 The supplier should indicate hardness, melting temperature and tensile yield

strength of the material and necessary test certificates of the same shall be furnished. The meter case and transparent cover should be sturdy enough to prevent damage during transportation and installation.

13.1.2 The meter chamber shall conform to the degree of protection IP 51 of IS: 12063/ IEC: 529 for protection against ingress of dust and moisture.

13.1.3 The polycarbonate plastic housing used may be provided with a key hole on the

top for fixing which should not be accessible to the consumer after terminal cover is sealed.

The polycarbonate plastic used shall conform to IS: 11731 besides meeting the test requirement of heat reflection test as per ISO-75, Glow wire test as per IS: 11000 (par t 2/SEC-I) 1984 OR IEC PUB, 60695-2-12, Bal l pressure test as per IEC-60695-2-12 and Flammabi l i ty Test as per IS 11731 (Part -2) 1986. Plastic grade for Meter case should be LEXAN 500R and for meter cover should be LAXAN 143R/940A. Even Bayer make polymer may be accepted.

13.2 TERMINAL BLOCK & COVER

The terminals may be grouped in a terminal block having adequate insulating properties and mechanical strength. The terminal block shall be made from best quality non-hygroscopic, flame retardant material (capable of passing the flammability tests given in IS-11731) with nickel-plated brass for connecting terminals. The clamping screw should be provided inside the terminal cover and should have metallic sleeve molded within the block to avoid damage during tightening of the screws.

The terminals in the terminal block shall be of adequate length in order to have proper grip of conductor with the help of two screws through assembly of a plate so as to make cage type arrangement. The screws shall have thread size not less than M4 and head having 4 -6 mm diameter. The screw shall not have pointed ends at the end of threads. All terminals and connecting screws and washers should be of tinned/nickel plated brass material.

The internal diameter of terminal hole shall be min. 8.5 mm and should comfortable accommodate the 25 mm2 cable conductors. Normally the cable used in such meters is 6 mm2 & 10 mm2 however at some places 25 mm2 can be used. The holes in the insulating material shall be of sufficient size to accommodate the insulation of conductor also.

The terminal cover shall be polycarbonate plastic with minimum thickness 2 .0mm mm and the terminal cover shall be of extended type completely covering the terminal block and fixing holes except for the provision of conductor entry at the bottom for incoming and outgoing leads. The terminal cover shall be so provided that it remains permanently connected with meter base. The supplier shall suitably design the cover, so that it opens and closes like a hinged door and the ends of hinged pins shall be flattened so that it does not come out. Provision for

of 21

Minimum one number utility seal(s) as the terminal cover shall be made. Supply voltage circuit is to be connected solidly from inside. Plastic grade for Meter terminals should be LEXAN 500R and for meter terminal cover should be LAXAN 143R/940A. Even Bayer make polymer may be accepted

13.3 DESIGN

Voltage circuit, sealing arrangement, terminal block, terminal cover and nameplate etc. shall be in accordance with IS-13779 (latest version). The meter shall be compact and reliable in design, easy to transport and immune to vibration and shock involved in transportation and handling. The construction of the meter shall ensure consistent performance under all conditions especially during dust storm/heavy rains/very hot weather. The insulating material used in the meter should be non-hygroscopic, non- aging and of tested quality. The meter should be sealed in such a way that the internal parts of the meter are inaccessible.

Further meter shall withstand an insulation test of 4 kV and impulse test at 8 kV & the terminal block and meter case shall have safety against spread of fire. They shall not get ignited by thermal overload of live parts in contact with them as per the relevant IS-13779.

13.4 CIRCUITARY:

The meter shall have an operational indication device such as blinking LED given type indication. The following indications are mandatory: 13.4.1 Meter Calibration (LED). 13.4.2 Phase available indication (LCD). 13.4.3 Load Earthling (LED/ LCD). 13.4.4 Current reversal (LCD).

The operation indicator should be accessible from the front .The mounting of components on the PCB (Printed Circuit Board) shall preferably be SMT (Surface Mounted Technology) type. The Electronic Components used in the meter shall be of high quality and there shall be no drift in the accuracy of the meter at least up to 10 years. The circuitry in the meter shall be compatible with 2x8 bit (or better) processor and the meter shall be based on digital measuring and sampling technique.

13.5 CURRENT & PRESSURE COILS

13.5.1 Current Circuit As per IS- 13779

13.5.2 Potential Circuit As per IS-13779. i.e Voltage Circuit

13.6 FIXING ARRANGEMENT

Every meter shall have three fixing holes one at the top and two at the bottom. The top hole shall be provided with a special clip at the back of the mater so that holding screw is not accessible to the consumer after the fixing of the meters. The lower fixing screws shall be provided under the sealed terminal cover. The requisite fixing screws shall be supplied with each meter.

of 21

13.7 SEALING:

Minimum 2 No. holes shall be provided for proper fixing of meter cover with 2 No. polycarbonate numbered seals, of good quality, on opposite side (one by the meter manufacturer and the other by the Utility/ Nigam on both opposite side.) So that meter internal parts are accessible only after breaking the seals, ultrasonic welding of case/cover of the meter.

13.8 ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS

The meter shall be from high accuracy and reliable Surface Mount Technology (SMT) components. The supplier should submit the details of source/agencies from whom purchase of various components of meters used by them, has been done, to the authorized representative/ team deputed by Nigam for its verification. The make of components used in the meter should be used as listed below.

Sr. No.

Component Function

Requirement Makes and Origin

1. Measurement or computing chips

The Measurement or computing chips in the meter should be with the Surface mount type along with ASICs.

USA: Anolog Devices, Cyrus Logic,Atmel,Phillips, Texas Instruments. South Africa: SAMES Japan: Hitachi or Oki Free scale semiconductors, MMI ,Maxim

2. Memory Chip The memory chips should not be affected by the external parameters like sparking high voltage spikes or electrostatic discharges.

USA Atmel,National Semiconductors,Texas Instruments,Phillips,ST. Japan: Hitachi or Oki Microchip

of 21

3. Display modules

a) The display modules should be well protected from the external UV radiations. b) The display visibility should be sufficient to read the Meter mounted at height at 0.5 meter as well as at the height of 0.2 meters (ref 3.2d for Viewing angle). c) The construction of the modules should be such that the displayed quantity should not disturbed with the life of display (PIN Type) d) It should be trans reflective HTN or STN type industrial grade with extended temperature

Honkong: Genda Singapore : Bonafied technologies. Korea: Advantek China: Success Japan: Hitachi, Sony Haijing

4. Communication modules

Communication modules should be compatible for the two RS 232 ports (one for optical port for communication with meter reading instruments & the other- forthe hardwire RS 232 port to communication with various modems for AMR)

USA: National Semiconductors, HP, Ontonica, ST Holland/Korea: Philips Japan: Hitachi Taiwan:Ligitek Germany: Siemens

5. Optical Port Optical Port should be used to transfer the meter data to meter reading instrument. The mechanical construction of the port should be such to facilitate the data transfer easily.

USA: National Semiconductors, HP, Holland/Korea: Philips Japan: Hitachi Taiwan:Ligitek Osram

of 21

6. Power Supply The power supply should be with the capabilities as per the relevant standards. The power supply unit of the meter should not be affected. In case the maximum voltage of the system appears to the terminals due to faults or due to wrong connections.

SMPS type

7. Electronic Components

The active & passive components should be of the surface mount type & are to handled & soldered by the state of art assembly processes.

USA: National Semiconductors, Atmel, Philips, Texas Instruments, Texas, ST, Onsemi Japan: Hitachi, Oki, AVX or Ricoh Korea: Samsung

8. Mechanical Parts

a) The internal electrical component should be of electrolytic copper & should be protected from corrosion, rust etc.

b) The other mechanical components should be protected from rust, corrosion etc. by suitable plating /painting methods.

9. Battery Lithium with guaranteed life of 10 years.

Verta, Tedirun, Sanyo or National Renota

10. RTC & Micro controller

The accuracy of RTC shall be as per relevant IEC/IS standards

USA: Philips, Dallas, Atmel, Motorola, Microchip Japan: NEC or Oki Texas instruments

11. P.C.B. Glass Epoxy, fire resistant grade FR4, with minimum thickness 1.6mm

(BBT test is must)

No components of any other make other than mentioned above shall be accepted.

of 21

13.9 SOFTWARE & COMMUNICATION COMPATIBILITY

13.9.1 The optical port shall be compatible to RS232. Communication modules should be RS 232 optical port (for communication with meter reading instruments & communication with various modems for AMR). The RS 232 port shall be capable to transfer the data locally i.e. through CMRI, Laptop etc. & transfer the data to the remote end through PSTN/Optical fiber/GPRS/GSM/CDMA/RF/any other technology to the main computer/Laptop by using Modem. Half-meter long cable, of suitable size, having facility at one end, for connecting to the optical port, other end shall be provided with RS – 232 Connector shall be provided, as spare cable, so that the optical port can be brought out the meter box. The meter shall have necessary facilities to transfer the data via the Communication port, the hand held data collection device (DCD) and to the computer at remote end to get complete details in alpha numeric form. The necessary software for this purpose shall be provided by the supplier.

13.9.2 The Supplier shall supply Software required for CMRI & for connectivity to

AMR modules. The supplier shall also provide training for the use of software. The software should be compatible to Microsoft Windows systems (Latest version). The software should have polling feature with optional selection of parameters to be down loaded for AMR application.

13.9.3 Necessary provision shall be made in the software for converting all

the parameters available for new and old meters if supplied earlier. Copy of operation manual shall be supplied.

13.9.4 The data transfer (from meter to CMRI /AMR equipment) rate should be minimum

1200/9600 bps.

13.9.5 The supplier shall provide meter reading protocols / API. 14. PACKING:

The meters shall be suitably packed for vertical/horizontal support to withstand handling during transport. The bidder shall be responsible for any damage during transit due to inadequate or improper packing. The meters shall preferably be supplied in thermocol packing of minimum 10 mm thickness/ Corrugated (CFS) box packing of min 3 mm thickness.

15. DESIGN LIFE The meter shall have a design life of at least 10 years.

16. QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN

The design life of the meter shall be minimum 10 years and to prove the design life, the firm shall have at least the following Quality Assurance Plan:

16.1 The factory shall be completely dust proof. 16.2 The testing rooms shall be temperature and humidity controlled as per relevant

standard.

16.3 The testing and calibrating equipment should be automatic and all test equipment shall have their valid calibration certificates.

16.4 Power supply used in testing equipment shall be distortion free with sinusoidal

of 21

wave- forms and maintaining constant voltage current and frequency as per the relevant standards.

16.5 During the manufacturing of the meters the following checks shall be carried out: 16.5.1 Meter frame dimension tolerance shall be minimum. 16.5.2 The assembly of parts shall be done with the help of jigs and fixtures so that

human errors are eliminated. 16.5.3 The meters shall be batch tested on automatic, computerized test bench

and the results shall be printed directly without any human errors. 17. ANTI TAMPER FEATURES

The meter shall not be affected by any remote control device and shall continue recording energy under any one or combinations of the following condition. 17.1 The meter shall be capable of recording energy correctly even if input and output

terminals are interchanged. Also the meter shall record correctly even if phase and neutral are inter changed.

17.2 The meter shall register energy even if the load is not terminated back to the meter; instead current is drawn through a local earth under following conditions. 17.2.1 When phase and neutral are connected correctly. 17.2.2 When phase and neutral wires connected are interchanged at input terminals.

17.3 Also when only phase is available either in neutral or phase terminal and earth loading has been done. In such circumstances only minimum starting current of 1.5 Amp. should be drawn and in other conditions as per relevant ISS.

17.4 The meter shall be factory calibrated through software and no modification of calibration shall be possible at site by any means what-so-ever. Trim pot method for calibration shall not be acceptable. No mechanical or potentiometer like devices shall

be used for meter calibration that possibly can alter the meter accuracy either in case of change in climatic conditions or intentionally at site. Calibration Certificate/Routine test certificate should be supplied with the dispatch.

17.5 Meter shall record the energy accurately under the effect of radiation emitted by mobile phone. The test shall be carried out by bringing a mobile phone in the close proximity almost touching the meter of the meter for 10 minutes when there is an incoming call ( ringing or being received ) and shall be checked under the following conditions: 17.5.1 10% Ib and UPF 17.5.2 50% Ib and UPF 17.5.3 Ib and UPF 17.5.4 Ib and 0.8PF 17.5.5 125% Ib and UPF

17.6 The Meter shall immune to the external magnetic field upto 0.5 Tesla with permanent magnet of 75x75x35 mm and in case external magnetic field exceeding 0.5 Tesla(permanent magnet), the meter shall log the event of attempt of tampering by the external magnetic field, occurrences & restoration with date & time. The meter shall start record energy at maximum current Imax under such influence of abnormal magnetic field irrespective of actual load. The meter shall record as per actual load once the external abnormal magnetic field is removed.

17.7 Meter shall be immune of any abnormal frequency signal OR Meter shall log & display as tamper in the event abnormal frequency signal i.e. less than 47.5Hz OR more than 52.5 Hz is supplied to the meter.

17.8 Load survey-for all the billing parameters/anti tamper features shall be available for 75 days,

17.9 Minimum 100 numbers of events (occurrences & restoration with date & time of more than 10 minutes) shall be available in the meter memory on roll over facility. All the information shall be available in a standard simple format.

of 21

17.10 Meter should register energy correctly within its class of accuracy at 240V and UPF even with neutral disconnected or neutral available through by putting variable resistance/capacitor/diode.

17.11The meter shall work satisfactorily under presence of various influencing conditions like External Magnetic Field, Electromagnetic Field, Radio Frequency Interference, Vibrations, harmonic Distortion, Voltage/ Frequency Fluctuations, and electromagnetic High Frequency Fields etc. The meter should be immune to electrostatic discharges (generated by High Voltage/Frequency Tamper device) of voltage up to 35 KV level (approx.) Meter should log the tamper event with date and time along with showing in display and start recording at Imax if ESD voltage level is more than 35 KV (approx.) To this effect a test certificate must submitted by the bidder from NABL accredited laboratory as per following criteria. The accuracy of the meter should not be affected with the application of abnormal voltage /frequency generating device ( having spark discharge of approximately 35Kv) in any of the following manner for a total period of 10 minutes: 17.11.1 On phase or neutral terminals 17.11.2 On any connecting wires of the meter. 17.11.3 Voltage discharge with 0-10mm spark gap 17.11.4 Spark on meter body 17.11.5 At any place in load circuit

The accuracy of meter should be checked before, during & after the application of said

devices.

17.12 Meter Body Opening:

The meter shall have provision for detection and logging of opening of meter cover. Meter must detect/log with date and time meter body opening tamper, body opening must also be logged in absence of power supply. Incase of meter body opening display of “C open’’ Must appear continuously even after the re-closing the cover so that at the time of meter reading it must come in notice. However cover open “date & time” should appear in push button mode.

18. NAME PLATE AND MARKING

18.1 Every meter shall have a name plate clearly visible and indelible and distinctly marked in accordance with IS 13779 (latest version). The following information should appear on an external plate attached to the meter cover:

18.1.1 Manufacturer’s name or trade mark and place of manufacture. 18.1.2 Designation of type. 18.1.3 Number of phases and number of wires for which the meter is suitable.

18.2 In addition to above, the following information shall be marked on a name plate

preferably placed with in the meter:

18.2.1 Sr. No. and year of manufacture 18.2.2 Principal unit in which the meter records.

of 21

18.2.3 Reference voltage. 18.2.4 Basic current and rated maximum current. 18.2.5 Reference frequency in Hz. 18.2.6 Meter constant. 18.2.7 Class index. 18.2.8 Reference temperature. 18.2.9 The words properties of ‘DHBVN’ or ‘UHBVN’ depending upon the name

of Nigam to whom meters are supplied. 18.2.10 BIS Mark 19. TESTING AND MANUFACTURING FACILITIES

The bidder shall have at least the following testing facilities to ensure accurate calibration: 19.1 Insulation resistance measurement. 19.2 Running at no load. 19.3 Starting current test. 19.4 Limits of error. 19.5 Range of adjustment. 19.6 Power loss in voltage and current coil. 19.7 Repeatability of error. 19.8 Transportation test. 19.9 Low load run test. 19.10 Heating test. 19.11 Protection against water, dust and moisture. The meter shall confirm to the degree of

protection IP-51 against ingress of dust, moisture and vermin’s 19.12 Effect of Magnetic field of external origin as per clause 5.6.2. of CBIP Report-88

with latest amendments & provision of Nigam Technical Specification. 20. INSPECTION

20.1 All meters shall be duly tested and sealed by the firm at their premises prior to inspection.

20.2 The Nigam Inspecting Officer will inspect double the number of meters as per sampling plan of ISS 13779 (latest version). Max. size/ lot of 5,000 numbers shall be considered for acceptance test as per ISS 13779. Higher lot shall be considered as two or more lots. The inspecting agency can carry out any type test which felt necessary as acceptance test at firm’s works. After testing, these sample meters shall be additionally sealed by the inspecting officer and one copy of the inspection report will be handed over to the manufacturer. However, one sample of each successive lot (of 5000 meters) received in the stores will be subject to all tests as per specification from any NABL lab.

20.3 The supplier shall submit the details of source/ agencies from whom purchase of various components of meters used by them, has been done, to the authorized representative/ team deputed by Nigam for its verification.

20.4 The manufacturer shall be liable to pay penalty of Rs 20,000/- for each occasion at which the fake inspection call has been made. This penalty would be in addition to the expenses incurred by the Nigam in deputing the Inspecting Officer for carrying out such inspection.

In case the material offered for inspection fails in Ist inspection, the Nigam will have the right to levy a penalty at 0.1 % of the order value. In case the material offered for inspection fail during the 2nd inspection, the Nigam will have the right to increase the penalty to 0.25% of the order value. In case, the material offered fails during the 3rd and final inspection also, the firm will be liable for penal action

of 21

including forfeiture of EMD, risk purchase, debarring/ blacklisting in future and no further opportunity for inspection would be provided to the supplier firm.

21 CHALLENGE CLAUSE:

The material offered/received after the inspection by the authorized Inspecting Officer may again be subjected to the test for losses or any other parameters from any testing house/in house technique of the Nigam having requisite capabilities and facilities. The results if found deviating/ unacceptable or non-complying to approved GTPs the lot shall be rejected and bidder shall arrange to supply the replacement within thirty (30) days of such detection at his cost including to & fro transportation. In addition to this penalty @10% of cost of the inspected lot of material shall be imposed.

22. GUARANTEE:

The meter shall have a designed life of at least 10 years and the supplier shall be responsible to replace, free of cost, with no transportation or insurance - cost to the Nigam, up to destination, the whole or any part of the material which, under normal and proper use, proves defective in quality or workmanship, subject to the condition that the defect is noticed within 78 months from the date of receipt of material by the consignee or 72 months from the date of installation, which ever period may expire earlier. The consignee or any other officer of the Nigam, actually using the material, will give prompt notice of each such defect to the supplier as well as the Purchasing authority and the Controller of Stores. The replacement shall be affected by the supplier within a reasonable time, but not, in any case, exceeding 45 days. The supplier shall also arrange to remove the defective supply within reasonable period but not exceeding 45 days from the date of issue of the notice in respect thereof. Upon the firm failing to do so, the damages / defects may be got rectified by the Nigam and the cost adjusted from the firm’s pending dues and/or security deposit against this or any other contract in force and the balance left be got deposited by the supplier. The Nigam may withhold the amount, equal to cost of defective material. These provisions shall, also equally apply to the replaced material. In case, the material is again found to be defective within warranty period, it shall, also, have to be replaced similarly. The purchaser shall recover an equivalent amount plus 15% supervision charges, if the defective material is not repaired / replaced with in the above specified period. The cumulative damage rate during warrantee period should not exceed:- (i) Upto one year -- 6% (ii) Upto two years -- 7% (iii) Upto three years -- 8% (iv) Upto four years -- 9% More than four years -- 10% If the supplier fails to adhere to the above requirement, the Nigam may take any penal action against the supplier upto and including blacklisting.

23. The bidder shall submit four samples in which one shall be ultrasonic welded and three shall be in normal condition i.e. without ultrasonic weld. Sample shall be accepted upto 10 days from date of opening of the technical bid. The samples are to be delivered in person to the XEN/MM DHBVN. Vendor shall have to submit predefined copies of all the software (meter reading software for CMRI, Base computer software for meter data analysis and technical details). The sample meter to be submitted with tender by the bidder will be without any identity of the firm i.e. without any logo & name printed on the meter to maintain secrecy.

of 21

The sample meter shall be got tested by purchaser without any representative of firm/ manufacturer to verify compliance to all clauses of specification from NABL lab. The necessary fees shall have to be deposited by bidder/ supplier. The intimation in this regards will be conveyed to the supplier, for which the name of the person and the contract number may please be provided along with the offer. In event of failure of the sample during any of the tests the offer will be considered as “REJECTED” and consequently the fees paid for type tests will be forfeited. Further if the sample passes in type testing the necessary fees would be reimbursed to bidder/ supplier by DHBVN. However, the decision of the Nigam in this regard shall be final and binding on all the bidders.

24. ANNEXURES

The bidder shall submit the following Annexures (as per format) which are part and parcel of the specification: Annexure A Guaranteed and Technical particulars. Annexure B Deviation from specifications. Annexure C Deviations from specified standards.

Annexure D Deviations from specified test requirements. Annexure E Bidder’s experience.

Director/Project, UHBVN, Panchkula

Director/Project, DHBVN, Hisar



FA & CAO/MM, UHBVN, Panchkula


GM/P&D, UHBVN, Panchkula


of 21

ANNEXURE-A GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR SINGLE PHASE STATIC METER

Sr. No. DESCRIPTION AS OFFERED BY FIRM 1. Maker’s Name 2. Type of meter

i) Basic current (A) ii) Maximum current

3. Standards to which the meter conform 4. Overload capacity 5. Dynamic range 6. Power supply variation

i) Specified operational range ii) Limit rage of operation iii) Frequency

7. Accuracy class 8. P.F. Range 9. Variation of voltage at which meter functions normally 10. Power consumption per phase

i) Voltage circuit ii) Current circuit

11. Minimum starting current of the meter (% Ib) 12. Impulse voltage 13. Display (No. of digits and character height) 14. Continuous display (Auto Display mode) 15. Operational indication-LED 16. a) Material for base/terminal block

b) Material for meter cover/terminal cover

17. a) Meter terminal block having sealable extended terminal cover. b) No of seals to be Provided. c) Connection diagram inside the terminal cover

18. Communication port. 19. REAL Time clock with back up battery

Life of battery

20. Non volatile memory retention time in absence of power. 21. MD reset 22. Self diagnostic feature 23. Load survey 24. Snap shot facility 25. No. of tamper events 26. Temper persistence time 27. Routine tests 28. Acceptance tests 29. Type tests 30. Testing facilities 31. BIS licence 32. ISO 9001/9002 33. Guarantee

of 21

DEVIATIONS FROM SPECIFICATIONS ANNEXURE-B

Sr. No. Specification

Clause No. Requirement of Deviation

Proposed Specification

Reasons for Deviation

1. Name of firm 2. Name & signature of tenderer 3. Designation 4. Dated

of 21

ANNEXURE-C

DEVIATIONS FROM SPECIFIED STANDARDS Sr. No. Particulars Stipulation of

Specified standard ………………. Standard Stipulation Ref.

Stipulation standard adopted By tenderer ……………… Standard stipulation

Ref.

Remarks


of 21

ANNEXURE-D

DEVIATIONS FROM SPECIFIED TEST REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED IN RELEVANT & PRESENT SPECIFICATION

……………………………………………………………………………………………… Sr. No.

Name of test Standard No. & Clause No.

Requirement of standard

Proposed Deviation

Reasons for Deviations

……………………………………………………………………………………………… 1. Type test 2. Acceptance test


of 21

ANNEXURE-E

BIDDER’S EXPERIENCE ……………………………………………………………………………………………… Sr. P.O. with To whom Description Qty. Status of RemarksNo. date Supplied of material P.O. ………………………………………………………………………………………………

1. Name of firm 2. Name & signature of

tenderer 3. Designation 4. Date

of 23

Specification No. CSC- 48-R-1/DH/UH/P&D/2010-2011

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

FOR

WHOLE CURRENT A.C. THREE PHASE FOUR WIRES L.T.

STATIC ENERGY METER

OF

ACCURACY CLASS 1.0(10-60A)

WITH COMMUNICATION FACILITY

General Manager/P&D, General Manager/P&D, UHBVN, Panchkula DHBVN, Hisar

Issue of the Month:

of 23

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR WHOLE CURRENT A.C. THREE PHASE FOUR WIRES STATIC ENERGY METER OF ACCURACY CLASS 1.0(10-60A) WITH COMMUNICATION FACILITY

1. SCOPE

The specification covers the design, manufacturing, testing, supply of AC whole current 3 phase 4 wire static watt hour meter for measurement of active energy (kWh) with initial and sustained accuracy of class 1.0 for solidly earthed system with balanced and unbalanced loads having power factor in the range of zero to unity(Lagging/Leading).

2. APPLICABLE STANDARDS

Unless otherwise especially modified and to the extent so modified from these specification, the meter shall comply with the latest version of IS-13779, IEC-62053-21:2003 and CBI&P Technical report 88/1998(latest amendments). The Manufacturer should have ISO 9000 or above certification .

3. CLIMATIC CONDITIONS

The Static Energy Meter shall be suitable for satisfactorily working under the following climatic conditions: -




4. Max. yearly weighted average ambient temperature

320C

5. Max. altitude above mean sea level 1000 m





10. Maximum wind pressure 195 kg/m2

The meter shall be suitably designed and treated for normal life and satisfactory operation under the hot and hazardous tropical climate conditions and shall be dust and vermin proof. All the parts and surface, which are subject to corrosion, shall either be made of such material or shall be provided

of 23

with such protective finish which provides suitable protection to them from any injurious effect of excessive humidity.

4. RATINGS

The rating of kWh meter should be as follows:-

Supply voltage 3x240V AC (Phase to Neutral),415V AC (Between phases)

Current range(basic)Ib 10 A Max. current 600% of Basic Current =10amp. Current rating 10-60A Class of accuracy 1.0(No drift in tolerance of accuracy for 10 years) Starting current 0.2% of Basic Current at unity power factor Power factor range 0 to 1 (Lagging & Leading) Power loss As per ISS-13779 Resistance to surge voltage >6kV peak As per ISS-13779 1.2/50Micro sec. IEC-62053-21:2003/CBIP-88

Test voltage of 50Hz for 1 Min. 2kV rms Clock time accuracy +/- 5 ppm at 25°C Temperature rise As per ISS-13779 Power consumption by meter As per ISS-13779

5 SUPPLY SYSTEM

Supply Voltage 3x240V AC (Phase to Neutral), 415V AC (Between phases) Voltage variation range -40% to +20% Frequency 50Hz +/- 5% Power Factor +1 to -1

6 QUANTITY TO BE MEASURED / MONITORED

The display order shall be:-

6.1 Default Display (Continuously on auto scroll).

6.1.1 Cumulative Active Energy kWh along with legend. 6.1.2 Current calendar MD in kW along with legend.

6.1.3 Cumulative Max Demand along with legend. 6.1.4 No of reset count along with legend.

These parameters should be displayed on the LCD continuously for a period of 15 seconds on Auto scroll. In case of power failure, the meter should display above parameters i.e. 6.1.1 to 6.1.4 with push button.

6.2 On Demand Display(with push button)

6.2.1 Internal diagnostics 6.2.2 cumulative kWh 6.2.3 Date 6.2.4 Real Time

of 23

6.2.5 Current calendar month MD in kW 6.2.6 Voltage phase wise

6.2.7 Current phase wise 6.2.8 Inst. Power 6.2.9 Cumulative Max Demand 6.2.10 MDI reset count 6.2.12 Last calendar month MD in kW

6.2.13 Last calendar month MD in kW occurrence Date 6.2.14 Last calendar month MD in kW occurrence Time 6.2.15 Meter Serial Number

The meter’s display should return to default display mode (continues auto scroll) if push button is not operated for more than 10 seconds.

7 Auto Display

The meter shall have LED/LCD backlit type electronic display with minimum six digits with additional provision for legend. The decimal digit shall be clearly distinguished from integral digit. The registered parameters i.e. the data stored in meter shall not be lost/ effected in the event of power failure. The display shall also not be effected by electric and magnetic disturbances. The meter shall have non volatile memory (NVM) which does not need battery back up. The NVM shall have minimum retention period 10 years. The minimum character dimension sha l l be 10mmx5mm. Impulse Counter & Stepper Motor shall not be provided in the meter.

Default MD integration period will be 30 min, however, it should have facility to change to 15 min at site with proper security feature.

7.1 Meter shall store MD integration period alongwith date and time at the end of every integration period new MD shall be previous MD and store, whichever is higher and the same shall be displayed.

7.2 MD shall be reset automatically at the defined date (or period) or through CMRI

manually as when required. The re-setting shall be automatic at the end of every month i.e. 24 hours of last day of month. Twelve last M.D. values shall be stored in the memory also with auto reset count in numbers and reset count show on the display. In addition to this the cumulative kWh should also be stored in the memory at 0-00 hrs. at the end of every month and show on the display . The meter should be capable of storing last 12 month data with an option to retrieve the same.

7.3 Manual MD resetting should be possible. Use of scalable push button or any other

method is optional. 7.4 BILLING DATA

of 23

7.4.1 Meter serial number, Date and time, kWh, MD in kW, History of kWh & MD for

last 6 months along with TOD readings. 7.4.2 All the above parameters (namely kWh, MD in kW) are meter readings.

7.4.3 All these data shall be accessible for reading, recording and spot billing by downloading through optical port on MRI or Laptop computers at site.

8 STARTING CURRENT:

The starting current of the meter shall be 0.2% lb at unity power factor.

9 RUNNING AT NO LOAD:

The meter should comply with the requirements of IEC 1036/IS-13779 and CBIP Technical Report 88/1998 (Latest amendment).

10 ACCURACY & LIMITS OF ERRORS:

The error of meters shall not exceed the permissible limits per standard IS 13779 (latest version) and CBIP Technical Report 88/1998 (with latest amendment) for a period of at least 10 years from the date of supply. In case any drift is notified which is beyond the permissible limits, the bidder shall re-calibrate the mete for correct accuracy and if re-calibration is not possible, the meter shall be replaced by a new meter without any extra cost.

11 TEST OUTPUT DEVICE :

The meter shall have a test output device in the form of a pulse indicator accessible from the front and capable of being monitored by suitable testing equipment.

12 TESTS:

12.1 TYPE TESTS & TEST CERTIFICATES:

Meters shall be fully type tested as per IS: 13779 (latest version). The type test certificates shall be submitted along with the offer. Offer without Type Test Report shall be liable for rejection. The Type test certificates shall not be more than

3 years old. Test certificates of appropriate range shall be accepted. The type certificates shall be from institutions as per Appendix ‘G’ of CBIP Technical report 88 (amended).

12.2 ROUTINE TESTS

The Acceptance and Routine tests shall be carried out as per latest version of IS- 13779.

12.3 EFFECT OF MAGNETIC FILED OF EXTERNAL ORIGIN.

The meter shall be provided with adequate magnetic shielding so that any external magnetic field (AC electro-magnets/DC magnet) as per the value specify

of 23

in CBIP technical report-88 (with latest amendment) application on the meter shall not effect the proper functioning and recoding of energy as per error limits prescribed by CBIP. However, the test certificates of the designed meter for AC abnormal magnetic field & DC abnormal magnetic field as per clause 5.6.2 of CBIP -88 report (with latest version). The required test certificate for the design rating of meter from NABL accredited laboratory shall be submitted by the bidders along with the bid.

12.4 D.C IMMUNITY TEST

The meter should comply with the requirements of IEC 1036/IS-13779 and CBIP Technical Report 88/1998 (Latest amendment).

12.5 INFLUENCE QUANTITIES

The meter shall work satisfactorily with guaranteed accuracy as per limit of IS 13779 and CBIP Technical Report 88/1988 (with latest amendments) under presence of the following quantities:

12.5.1 External Magnetic field 0.5 Tesla. 12.5.2 Electro Magnetic Field. 12.5.3 Radio Frequency interference. 12.5.4 Vibration. 12.5.5 Harmonic wave form. 12.5.6 Voltage fluctuation. 12.5.7 Electromagnetic high frequency field. 12.6 ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY

The meter shall conform to provision as per IS-13779 and IEC-62053-21:2003 and CBIP Technical Report 88/1998 (Latest Amendments) and should be protected against radiated interference from either magnetic or radio frequency sources. The meter shall also withstand DC immunity test so as to ensure that the meter does not saturate on passage of direct current.

12.7 METER POWER SUPPLY

The meter should withstand the maximum system voltage i.e. 498 volts continuously. In case of failure of power supply, the meter should display the measured quantities minimum for 24 hours. This event will be logged in the history as power failure (Indicating time, date & duration).

13 CONSTRUCTION

13.1 METER CASE & COVER

The meter case & cover will be ultrasonically welded with two No. polycarbonate seals, one each on either side, so that Meter’s internal parts are only accessible after breaking seals, ultrasonic welding case/cover of the meter and it should become unserviceable. The meter base can be opaque and meter cover will be

of 23

Transparent or translucent with transparent window.

13.1.1 The supplier should indicate hardness, melting temperature and tensile yield strength of the material and necessary test certificates of the same shall be furnished. The meter case and transparent cover should be sturdy enough to prevent damage during transportation and installation.

13.1.2 The meter chamber shall conform to the degree of protection IP 51 of IS: 12063/ IEC:

529 for protection against ingress of dust and moisture.

13.1.3 The polycarbonate plastic housing used may be provided with a key hole on the top for fixing which should not be accessible to the consumer after terminal cover is sealed.

The polycarbonate plastic used shall conform to ISS: 11731 besides meeting the test requirement of heat reflection test as per ISO-75 and Glow wire test as per IS: 11000 (part 2/SEC-I) 1984 OR IEC PUB, 60695-2-12, Ball pressure test as per IEC-60695-2-12 and Flammability Test as per IS 11731 (Part-2) 1986. Plastic grade for Meter case should be LEXAN 500R and for meter cover should be LAXAN 143R/940A. Even Bayer make polymer may be accepted.

13.2 TERMINAL BLOCK & COVER

The terminals may be grouped in a terminal block having adequate insulating properties and mechanical strength. The terminal block shall be made from best quality non-hygroscopic, flame retardant material (capable of passing the flammability tests given in IS-11731) with nickel-plated brass for connecting terminals. The clamping screw should be provided inside the terminal cover and should have metallic sleeve molded within the block to avoid damage during tightening of the screws. The terminals in the terminal block shall be of adequate length in order to have proper grip of conductor with the help of two screws through assembly of a plate so as to make cage type arrangement. The screws shall have thread size not less than M4 and head having 4 -6 mm diameter. The screw shall not have pointed ends at the end of threads. All terminals and connecting screws and washers should be of tinned/nickel plated brass material. The internal diameter of terminal hole shall be min. 8.5 mm and should comfortable accommodate the 25 mm2 cable conductors. Normally the cable used in such meters is 6 mm2 & 10 mm2 however at some places 25 mm2 can be used. The holes in the insulating material shall be of sufficient size to accommodate the insulation of conductor also. The terminal cover shall be polycarbonate plastic with minimum thickness 2.0mm mm and the terminal cover shall be of extended type completely covering the terminal block and fixing holes except for the provision of conductor entry at the bottom for incoming and outgoing leads. The terminal cover shall be so

of 23

provided that it remains permanently connected with meter base. The supplier shall suitably design the cover, so that it opens and closes like a hinged door and the ends of hinged pins shall be flattened so that it does not come out. Provision for Minimum one number utility seal(s) as the terminal cover shall be made. Supply voltage circuit is to be connected solidly from inside. Plastic grade for Meter terminals should be LEXAN 500R and for meter terminal cover should be LAXAN 143R/940A. Even Bayer make polymer may be accepted

13.3 DESIGN

Voltage circuit, sealing arrangement, terminal block, terminal cover and nameplate etc. shall be in accordance with IS-13779 (latest version).The meter shall be compact and reliable in design, easy to transport and immune to vibration and stock involved in transportation and handling. The construction of the meter shall ensure consistent performance under all conditions especially during dust storm/heavy rains/very hot weather. The insulating material used in the meter should be non-hygroscopic, non-aging and of tested quality. The meter should be sealed in such a way that the internal parts of the meter are inaccessible. Further meter shall withstand an insulation test of 4 kV and impulse test at 8kV & the terminal block and meter case shall have safety against spread of fire. They shall not get ignited by thermal overload of live parts in contact with them as per the relevant IS-13779

13.4 CIRCUITARY:

The meter shall have an operational indication device such as blinking LED given type indication. The following indications are mandatory: 13.4.1 Meter Calibration (LED). 13.4.2 Phase available indication (LCD). 13.4.3 Load Earthling (LED/ LCD). 13.4.4 Current reversal (LCD).

The operation indicator should be accessible from the front. The mounting of components on the PCB (Printed Circuit Board) shall preferably be SMT (Surface Mounted Technology) type. The Electronic Components used in the meter shall be of high quality and there shall be no drift in the accuracy of the meter at least upto10 years. The circuitry in the meter shall be compatible with 2x8 bit (or better) processor and the meter shall be based on digital measuring and sampling technique.

13.5 CURRENT & PRESSURE COILS

of 23

13.5.1 Current Circuit As per IS- 13779

13.5.2 Potential Circuit As per IS-13779. i.e Voltage Circuit

13.6 FIXING ARRANGEMENT

Every meter shall have three fixing holes one at the top and two at the bottom. The top hole shall be provided with a special clip at the back of the mater so that holding screw is not accessible to the consumer after the fixing of the meters. The lower fixing screws shall be provided under the sealed terminal cover. The requisite fixing screws shall be supplied with each meter.

13.7 SEALING:

Minimum 2 No. holes shall be provided for proper fixing of meter cover with 2 No. polycarbonate numbered seals, of good quality, on opposite side (one by the meter manufacturer and the other by the Utility/ Nigam on both opposite side.) So that meter internal parts are accessible only after breaking the seals, ultrasonic welding of case/cover of the meter.

13.8 ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS

The meter shall be from high accuracy and reliable surface mount Technology (SMT) components. The supplier should submit the details of source/agencies from whom purchase of various components of meters used by them, has been done, to the authorized representative/ team deputed by Nigam for its verification. The make of components used in the meter should be used as listed below. Sr. No.

Component Function

Requirement Makes and Origin

1. Measurement or computing chips

The Measurement or computing chips in the meter should be with the Surface mount type along with ASICs.

USA: Anolog Devices, Cyrus Logic,Atmel,Phillips, Texas Instruments. South Africa: SAMES Japan: Hitachi or Oki Free scale semiconductors, MMI ,Maxim 2. Memory Chip The memory chips

should not be affected by the external parameters like sparking high voltage spikes or electrostatic discharges.

USA Atmel,National Semiconductors,Texas Instruments,Phillips,ST. Japan: Hitachi or Oki Microchip

of 23

3. Display modules

a) The display modules should be well protected from the external UV radiations. b) The display visibility should be sufficient to read the Meter mounted at height at 0.5 meter as well as at the height of 0.2 meters (ref 3.2d for Viewing angle). c) The construction of the modules should be such that the displayed quantity should not disturbed with the life of display (PIN Type) d) It should be trans reflective HTN or STN type industrial grade with extended temperature

Honkong: Genda Singapore : Bonafied technologies. Korea: Advantek China: Success Japan: Hitachi, Sony Haijing

4. Communication modules

Communication modules should be compatible for the two RS 232 ports (one for optical port for communication with meter reading instruments & the other- forthe hardwire RS 232 port to communication with various modems for AMR)

USA: National Semiconductors, HP, Ontonica, ST Holland/Korea: Philips Japan: Hitachi Taiwan:Ligitek Germany: Siemens

5. Optical Port Optical Port should be used to transfer the meter data to meter reading instrument. The mechanical construction of the port should be such to facilitate the data transfer easily.

USA: National Semiconductors, HP, Holland/Korea: Philips Japan: Hitachi Taiwan:Ligitek Osram

of 23

6. Power Supply The power supply should be with the capabilities as per the relevant standards. The power supply unit of the meter should not be affected. In case the maximum voltage of the system appears to the terminals due to faults or due to wrong connections.

SMPS type

7. Electronic Components

The active & passive components should be of the surface mount type & are to handled & soldered by the state of art assembly processes.

USA: National Semiconductors, Atmel, Philips, Texas Instruments, Texas, ST, Onsemi Japan: Hitachi, Oki, AVX or Ricoh Korea: Samsung

8. Mechanical Parts

a) The internal Electrical component should be of electrolytic copper & should be protected from corrosion, rust etc.

b) The other mechanical components should be protected from rust, corrosion etc. by suitable plating /painting methods.

9. Battery Lithium with guaranteed life of 10 years.

Verta,Tedirun, Sanyo or National Renota

10. RTC & Micro controller

The accuracy of RTC shall be as per relevant IEC/IS standards

USA: Philips, Dallas, Atmel, Motorola, Microchip Japan: NEC or Oki Texas instruments

11. P.C.B. Glass Epoxy, fire resistant grade FR4, with minimum thickness 1.6mm

(BBT test is must)

of 23

No components of any other make other than mentioned above shall be accepted.

13.9 SOFTWARE & COMMUNICATION COMPATIBILITY

13.9.1 The optical port shall be compatible to RS232. Communication modules should be RS 232 optical port (for communication with meter reading instruments & communication with various modems for AMR). The RS 232 port shall be capable to transfer the data locally i.e. through CMRI, Laptop etc. & transfer the data to the remote end through PSTN/Optical fiber/GPRS/GSM/CDMA/RF/any other technology to the main computer/Laptop by using Modem. half-meter long cable, of suitable size, having facility at one end, for connecting to the optical port, other end shall be provided with RS – 232 Connector shall be provided, as spare cable, so that the optical port can be brought out the meter box. The meter shall have necessary facilities to transfer the data via the Communication port, the hand held data collection device (DCD) and to the computer at remote end to get complete details in alpha numeric form. The necessary software for this purpose shall be provided by the supplier.

13.9.2 The Supplier shall supply Software required for CMRI & for connectivity to

AMR modules. The supplier shall also provide training for the use of software. The software should be compatible to Microsoft Windows systems

(Latest version). The software should have polling feature with optional selection of parameters to be down loaded for AMR application.

13.8.3 Necessary provision shall be made in the software for converting all

the parameters available for new and old meters if supplied earlier. Copy of operation manual shall be supplied.

13.9.4 The data transfer (from meter to CMRI /AMR equipment) rate should be minimum

1200/9600 bps, 13.9.5 The supplier shall provide meter reading protocols / API. 14 PACKING

The meters shall be suitably packed for vertical/horizontal support to withstand handling during transport. The bidder shall be responsible for any damage during transit due to inadequate or improper packing.The meters shall preferably be supplied in thermocol packing of minimum 10 mm thickness/ Corrugated (CFS) box packing of min 3 mm thickness.

15 DESIGN LIFE

The meter shall have a design life of at least 10 years.

16 QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN

The design life of the meter shall be minimum 10 years and to prove the design life, the firm shall have at least the following Quality Assurance Plan:

of 23

16.1 The factory shall be completely dust proof. 16.2 The testing rooms shall be temperature and humidity controlled as per relevant

standard. 16.3 The testing and calibrating equipment should be automatic and all test equipment

shall have their valid calibration certificates. 16.4 Power supply used in testing equipment shall be distortion free with

sinusoidal wave-forms and maintaining constant voltage current and frequency as per the relevant standards.

16.5 During the manufacturing of the meters the following checks shall be carried out: 16.5.1 Meter frame dimension tolerance shall be minimum. 16.5.2 The assembly of parts shall be done with the help of jigs and fixtures so

that human errors are eliminated. 16.5.3 The meters shall be batch tested on automatic, computerized test bench

and the results shall be printed directly without any human errors.

17 ANTI TAMPER FEATURES

The meter shall not be affected by any remote control device and shall continue recording energy under any one or combinations of the following condition.

17.1 The meter shall record correctly irrespective of phase sequence and even in case of current reversal and missing potential or Meter should record as per prevailing electric connection.

17.2 The meter shall continue record energy; 17.2.1 In the event neutral to the meter is disconnected from both ends of the

meter and any phase is shorted to the neutral and supply is used with earth from any phase, meter functioning should not at all be effected on all phases individually when all 3 phases remained connected at their respective places.

17.2.2 Meter must function accurately, on all the phases individually when single phase load is used with earth and neutral to the meter is disconnected at the neutral point of the meter remaining phases are connected at respective places.

17.3 The meter shall be factory calibrated. 17.4 In the meters original software, there shall be no possibility of tampering

including viruses. 17.5 Meter shall record the energy accurately under the effect of radiation emitted

by mobile phone. The test shall be carried out by bringing a mobile phone in the close proximity (almost touching the meter) of the meter for 10 minutes when there is an incoming call ( ringing or being received ) and shall be checked under the following condition: 17.5.1 10% Ib and UPF

17.5.2 50% Ib and UPF 17.5.3 Ib and UPF 17.5.4 Ib and 0.8 PF 17.5.5 125% Ib and UPF

of 23

17.6 The Meter shall immune to the external magnetic field upto 0.5 Tesla with permanent magnet of 75x75x35 mm and in case external magnetic field exceeding 0.5 Tesla (permanent magnet), the meter shall log the event of attempt of tampering by the external magnetic field, occurrences & restoration with date & time. The meter shall start record energy at maximum current IMAX under such influence of abnormal magnetic field irrespective of actual load. The meter shall record as per actual load once the external abnormal magnetic field is removed.

17.7 Meter shall log & display tampers of

17.7.1 Potential Missing 17.7.2 Current circuit reversal 17.7.3 Current circuit short 17.7.4 Injecting AC/DC high frequency/Current signal in neutral.

17.8 Meter shall be immune of any abnormal frequency signal OR Meter shall log & display at tamper in the event abnormal frequency signal i.e. less than 47.5Hz OR more than 52.5 Hz is supplied to the meter.

17.9 Load Survey-Load survey for all the billing parameters/Anti Tamper Features should be available for 120 days.

17.10 Minimum 200 number of events(occurrences & restoration with date & time of more than 10 minutes) shall be available in the meter memory on roll over facility. All the information shall be available in a standard simple format.

17.11 Meter should register energy correctly within its class of accuracy at 240V and UPF even with neutral disconnected or neutral available through by putting variable resistance/capacitor/diode. Meter should register energy correctly within class of accuracy at 240V UPF with neutral disconnected and neutral available through by putting variable resistance/capacitor/diode.

17.12 The meter shall work satisfactorily under presence of various influences

conditions like External Magnetic Field, Electromagnetic Field, Radio Frequency Interference, Vibrations, harmonic Distortion, Voltage/Frequency Fluctuations, and electromagnetic High Frequency Fields etc. The meter should be immune to electrostatic discharges (generated by High Voltage/Frequency Tamper device) of voltage up to 35 KV level (approx.) Meter should log the tamper event with date and time along with showing in display and start recording at Imax if ESD voltage level is more than 35 KV (approx.)

To this effect a test certificate must submitted by the bidder from NABL accredited laboratory as per following criteria: The accuracy of the meter should not be affected with the application of abnormal voltage /frequency generating device (having spark discharge of approximately 35kV) in any of the following manner for a total period of 10 minutes:

17.12.1 On phase or neutral terminals 17.12.2 On any connecting wires of the meter.

of 23

17.12.3 Voltage discharge with 0-10mm spark gap 17.12.4 Spark on meter body 17.12.5 At any place in load circuit

The accuracy of meter should be checked before, during & after the application of said devices and the accuracy of meter should not be affected.

17.13 Meter Body Opening:

The meter shall have provision for detection and logging of opening of meter

cover. Meter must detect/log with date and time meter body opening tamper, body opening must also be logged in absence of power supply. Incase of meter body opening display of “C open’’ Must appear continuously even after the re- closing the cover so that at the time of meter reading it must come in notice. However cover open “date & time” should appear in push button mode.

18 NAME PLATE AND MARKING

18.1 Every meter shall have a name plate clearly visible and indelible and distinctly marked in accordance with IS 13779 (latest version). The following information should appear on an external plate attached to the meter cover: 18.1.1 Manufacturer’s name or trade mark and place of manufacture.

18.1.2 Designation of type. 18.1.3 Number of phases and number of wires for which the meter is suitable.

18.2 In addition to above, the following information shall be marked on a name plate preferably placed with in the meter: 18.2.1 Sr. No. and year of manufacture

18.2.2 Principal unit in which the meter records. 18.2.3 Reference voltage. 18.2.4 Basic current and rated maximum current. 18.2.5 Reference frequency in Hz. 18.2.6 Meter constant. 18.2.7 Class index. 18.2.8 Reference temperature. 18.2.9 The words properties of ‘DHBVN’ or ‘UHBVN’ depending upon the

name of Nigam to whom meters are supplied. 18.2.10 BIS Mark

19 TESTING AND MANUFACTURING FACILITIES

The bidder shall have at least the following testing facilities to ensure accurate calibration:

19.1 Insulation resistance measurement. 19.2 Running at no load. 19.3 Starting current test. 19.4 Limits of error. 19.5 Range of adjustment. 19.6 Power loss in voltage and current coil.

of 23

19.7 Repeatability of error. 19.8 Transportation test. 19.9 Low load run test.

19.10 Heating test. 19.11 Protection against water, dust and moisture. The meter shall confirm to the degree

of protection IP-51 against ingress of dust, moisture and vermin’s 19.12 Effect of Magnetic field of external origin as per clause 5.6.2. of CBIP Report-88 with latest amendments & provision of Nigam Technical Specification.

20 INSPECTION 20.1 All meters shall be duly tested and sealed by the firm at their premises prior to

inspection. 20.2 The Nigam Inspecting Officer will inspect double the number of meters as per sampling plan of ISS

13779 (latest version). Max. size/ lot of 5,000 numbers shall be considered for acceptance test as per ISS 13779. Higher lot shall be considered as two or more lots. The inspecting agency can carry out any type test which felt necessary as acceptance test at firm’s works. After testing, these sample meters shall be additionally sealed by the inspecting officer and one copy of the inspection report will be handed over to the manufacturer. However, one sample of each successive lot (of 5000 meters) received in the stores will be subject to all tests as per specification from any NABL lab.

20.3 The supplier shall submit the details of source/ agencies from whom purchase of various components of meters used by them, has been done, to the authorized representative/ team deputed by Nigam for its verification.

20.4 The manufacturer shall be liable to pay penalty of Rs 20,000/- for each occasion at which the fake inspection call has been made. This penalty would be in addition to the expenses incurred by the Nigam in deputing the Inspecting Officer for carrying out such inspection.

In case the material offered for inspection fails in Ist inspection, the Nigam will have the right to levy a penalty at 0.1 % of the order value. In case the material offered for inspection fail during the 2nd inspection, the Nigam will have the right to increase the penalty to 0.25% of the order value. In case, the material offered fails during the 3rd and final inspection also, the firm will be liable for penal action including forfeiture of EMD, risk purchase, debarring/ blacklisting in future and no further opportunity for inspection would be provided to the supplier firm.

21 CHALLENGE CLAUSE:

The material offered/received after the inspection by the authorized Inspecting Officer may again be subjected to the test for losses or any other parameters from any testing house/in house technique of the Nigam having requisite capabilities and facilities. The results if found deviating/ unacceptable or non-complying to approved GTPs the lot shall be rejected and bidder shall arrange to supply the replacement within thirty (30) days of such detection at his cost including to & fro transportation. In addition to this penalty @10% of cost of the inspected lot of material shall be imposed.

of 23

22. GUARANTEE:

The meter shall have a designed life of at least 10 years and the supplier shall be responsible to replace, free of cost, with no transportation or insurance - cost to the Nigam, up to destination, the whole or any part of the material which, under normal and proper use, proves defective in quality or workmanship, subject to the condition that the defect is noticed within 78 months from the date of receipt of material by the consignee or 72 months from the date of installation, which ever period may expire earlier. The consignee or any other officer of the Nigam, actually using the material, will give prompt notice of each such defect to the supplier as well as the Purchasing Authority and the Controller of Stores. The replacement shall be affected by the supplier within a reasonable time, but not, in any case, exceeding 45 days. The supplier shall also arrange to remove the defective supply within reasonable period but not exceeding 45 days from the date of issue of the notice in respect thereof. Upon the firm failing to do so, the damages / defects may be got rectified by the Nigam and the cost adjusted from the firm’s pending dues and/or security deposit against this or any other contract in force and the balance left be got deposited by the supplier. The Nigam may withhold the amount, equal to cost of defective material. These provisions shall, also equally apply to the replaced material. In case, the material is again found to be defective within warranty period, it shall, also, have to be replaced similarly. The purchaser shall recover an equivalent amount plus 15% supervision charges, if the defective material is not repaired / replaced with in the above specified period. The cumulative damage rate during warrantee period should not exceed:- (i) Upto one year -- 6% (ii) Upto two years -- 7% (iii) Upto three years -- 8% (iv) Upto four years -- 9% (v) More than four years -- 10% If the supplier fails to adhere to the above requirement, the Nigam may take any penal action against the supplier upto and including blacklisting.

23. The bidder shall submit four samples in which one shall be ultrasonic welded and three shall be in normal condition i.e. without ultrasonic weld. Sample shall be accepted upto 10 days from date of opening of the technical bid. The samples are to be delivered in person to the XEN/MM DHBVN. Vendor shall have to submit predefined copies of all the software (meter reading software for CMRI, Base computer software for meter data analysis and technical details). The sample meter to be submitted with tender by the bidder will be without any identity of the firm i.e. without any logo & name printed on the meter to maintain secrecy.

The sample meter shall be got tested by purchaser without any representative of firm/ manufacturer to verify compliance to all clauses of specification from NABL lab.

The necessary fees shall have to be deposited by bidder/ supplier. The intimation in this regards will be conveyed to the supplier, for which the name of the person and the contract number may please be provided along with the offer. In event of failure of the sample during any of the tests the offer will be considered as “REJECTED” and consequently the fees paid for type tests will be forfeited. Further if the sample passes in type testing the necessary fees would be reimbursed to bidder/ supplier by DHBVN. However, the decision of the Nigam in this regard shall be final and binding on all the bidders.

of 23

24 ANNEXURES

The bidder shall submit the following Annexure (as per format) which are part and parcel of the specification: Annexure A Guaranteed and Technical particulars. Annexure B Deviation from specifications. Annexure C Deviations from specified standards. Annexure D Deviations from specified test requirements. Annexure E Bidder’s experience.

Director/Project, UHBVN, Panchkula




FA & CAO/MM, UHBVN, Panchkula


GM/P&D, UHBVN, Panchkula


of 23

ANNEXURE-A GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR THREE PHASE WHOLE CURRENT STATIC ENERGY METER

Sr. No. DESCRIPTION AS OFFERED BY FIRM 1. Maker’s Name 2. Type of meter

i) Basic current (A) ii) Maximum current

3. Standards to which the meter conform 4. Overload capacity 5. Dynamic range 6. Power supply variation

i) Specified operational range ii) Limit rage of operation iii) Frequency

7. Accuracy class 8. P.F. Range 9. Variation of voltage at which meter functions normally 10. Power consumption per phase

i) Voltage circuit ii) Current circuit

11. Minimum starting current of the meter (% Ib) 12. Impulse voltage 13. Display (No. of digits and character height) 14. Continuous display (Auto Display mode) 15. Operational indication-LED 16. a) Material for base/terminal block

b) Material for meter cover/terminal cover

17. a) Meter terminal block having sealable extended terminal cover. b) No of seals to be Provided. c) Connection diagram inside the terminal cover

18. Communication port. 19. REAL Time clock with back up battery

Life of battery

20. Non volatile memory retention time in absence of power. 21. MD reset 22. Self diagnostic feature 23. Load survey 24. Snap shot facility 25. No. of tamper events 26. Temper persistence time 27. Routine tests 28. Acceptance tests 29. Type tests 30. Testing facilities 31. BIS license 32. ISO 9001/9002 33. Guarantee

of 23

DEVIATIONS FROM SPECIFICATIONS ANNEXURE-B

Sr. No. Specification

Clause No. Requirement of Deviation

Proposed Specification

Reasons for Deviation


of 23

ANNEXURE-C

DEVIATIONS FROM SPECIFIED STANDARDS Sr. No. Particulars Stipulation of

Specified standard ………………. Standard Stipulation Ref.

Stipulation standard adopted By tenderer ……………… Standard stipulation

Ref.

Remarks


of 23

ANNEXURE-D

DEVIATIONS FROM SPECIFIED TEST REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED IN RELEVANT & PRESENT SPECIFICATION

……………………………………………………………………………………………… Sr. No.

Name of test Standard No. & Clause No.

Requirement of standard

Proposed Deviation

Reasons for Deviations

……………………………………………………………………………………………… 1. Type test 2. Acceptance test


of 23

ANNEXURE-E

BIDDER’S EXPERIENCE ……………………………………………………………………………………………… Sr. P.O. with To whom Description Qty. Status of RemarksNo. date Supplied of material P.O. ………………………………………………………………………………………………

1. Name of firm 2. Name & signature of

tenderer 3. Designation 4. Date


Specification No. CSC- XXXXI/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010

Meter Cup Board (MCB) for outside usage for Three

Phase Energy Meters

Issue of the Month: Jan. 2010


Page 1 of 9

of 9

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION IN RESPECT OF METER CUPBOARD (MCB) FOR THREE PHASE ENERGY METERS 1. SCOPE

This specification covers the design, manufacture, inspection, testing and

supply of MS sheet. Meter Cup Board (MCBs) for housing three phase energy

meters for electric connections of General category i.e. Domestic &

Commercial connections.

1.1 SERVICE CONDITIONS

The Metal Meter Boxes to be supplied against this specification shall be suitable

for satisfactory continuous operation under the following climatic conditions:





320C







2. CONSTRUCTIONAL AND TECHNICAL PARTICULARS :

2.1 The MCBs shall conform to drawing attached as per Annexure-I to II. It shall

be dust and vermin proof for housing single phase energy meters of any

make. The internal dimensions of MCB shall be 380mm x 300 mm x 160

mm ( i.e. height x width x depth).

2.2 The MCB shall be made from 20 SWG MS sheet by the following method:

Deep Drawn Method:

The base and cover of the MCB shall be individually in one piece without

any welding except for fixing of the accessories like hinges, clamps, handle

etc. which shall be spot welded. The cover of MCB shall be fixed on

two tamper proof inside hinges not visible from outside. The hinge pin

of 9

diameter should be minimum 3mm; Hinges shall be made from min.

1.6mm MS sheet. The door of MCB shall open from right to left by minimum

90˚.The collar of the door (cover) in closed position shall rest on the collar

of the body (base) of MCB. The collar of the door shall overlap the collar of

the body of MCB by minimum 8mm. The collar of the body shall be provided

with good quality rubber gasket lining of min. 3mm thickness. Thickness of

rubber lining shall be such that it provides proper sealing between the

cover & base of MCB to avoid penetration of dust and ingress of water.

Rubber lining should be fixed with suitable adhesive so that the same does

not get removed by itself on opening of the door. Two No. sealing

screws with rubber washer shall be provided to seal & hold the door and

body of MCB. Head of sealing screws should have hole of 3mm. The fixing

arrangement of the sealing screws shall consist of 1.6mm thick strip (L-

shaped) welded from inner side of the body & another strip having L-shaped

end with 3 mm hole welded from inner side of door of the MCB. The length

of the extended portion of the strips shall be such that the sealing screws in

tightened position are at a distance of about 5 mm from end of the collar of

the cover. The sealing strips shall have additional hole of 5.5mm for riveting

the cover and base of MCB. All the holes shall be properly aligned.

2.3 All the steel sections used in fabrication shall be carefully leveled

and straightened before any works is done on them. No rough edges shall

be permitted anywhere through out the work. The material of MCB shall be

capable to withstand mechanical, electrical and thermal stresses as well as

the effects of humidity, which are likely to be encountered during its

service. All the spot welding work shall be done carefully so as to avoid

over heated spots, cavities, porosity burns and dents etc. The surface

should be properly cleaned before welding and slag removed after

welding.

2.4 A viewing window opening of the size 200x150 mm as indicated in the

drawing shall be provided about 50mm below top edge of MCB to

facilitate taking of meter readings. Viewing window shall be provided with

toughened glass of 5mm thickness. Glass shall have scratch proof

“DHBVN” logo on the right side top corner of the glass. This glass shall be

fixed from inside of the cover of MCB, with single piece drawn metal frame

of 9

(Glass Holder) made of 20 SWG MS sheet fixed with min. four screws.

Glass holder shall have rectangular cuttings as per details shown in

Annexure-III. The size of toughened glass shall be 220mm x170 mm so as

to provide minimum overlap of 10mm. This glass has to be fitted with a

wrap around single piece rubber ring without joint having minimum depth

of 8mm made from good quality rubber so as to with stand weather effect. 2.5 A handle of minimum 75mm length and 10mm width and 20 SWG sheet

thickness should be provided for opening and closing of the cover at the

place as shown in the drawing.

2.6 The mounting arrangement of the meter shall be as shown in the Annexure-

II. It should be raised from the base of MCB body by 35mm

(minimum). The mounting arrangement shall have 3mm thick

adjustable slotted strip of Phenolic Laminated Sheet ( Bakelite) fixed with

screws on the mounting arrangement. Adjustable slotted flat shall be

provided with two MS screws (M4 x 35mm length) with nuts .And one

screw ( M4 x 12mm length)shall be provided at upper point with Phenolic

Laminated Strip for meter hanger.

2.7 Sealing arrangement as shown in drawing with a sealing screw of 5.0 mm

diameter shall be provided for sealing of MCB .Head and Body of sealing

screw shall have a hole suitable for sealing wire.

2.8 Four Nos. fixing holes of 6.5 mm diameter at the back surface of MCB

shall be provided to fix the MCB at flat wall or surface. For fixing of

MCB on flat wall, 4 Nos. 5mm diameter 40mm long pan head self taping

screws and washers shall be provided by the supplier with every MCB. 4

Nos. plastic fixing plugs of 50mm length suitable for self-tapping screws

shall also be provided. Alternately, for fixing of MCB on poles, suitable 4 nos.

zinc plated clamps shall be provided with each box. Clamps shall have

adjustable slotted arrangement for adjustment of variation in pole sizes.

Clamps shall be provided with 4 Nos. M6 bolts and nuts for fixing of MCB

with clamps. Suitable nuts, bolts and washers shall also be provided for

fixing of clamps on the poles, Clamps, nuts & bolts shall be properly zinc

plated.

2.9 2 Nos. holes with superior quality plastic / rubber cable glands of

internal diameter of 20mm each for incoming and outgoing cables shall be

provided at the bottom of the MCB. Glands shall be properly fixed on

of 9

the box such that the same does not get removed from the box.

Glands shall be made such that internal diameter of glands provided for

cables should be closed with the film of not less than 1mm thickness.

Cable will go through the glands by piercing the film of the glands.

2.10 MCB shall be adequately protected against rust, dust water and

corrosion both from inside and outside. The MCB shall have smoke grey

shade on outside and white on inside. The MCB shall be powder coated.

Powder Coating: The surface of the MCB shall be properly pre-treated

and cleaned in 7 tank process(degreasing, water rinsing, de-rusting, water

rinsing, phosphating, water rinsing, passivation) and shall be applied with a

powder coating of suitable thickness on outer side and inside the box.

2.11 Earthing bolt of diameter 6 mm with nut and washer shall be provided in

the threads of L-shape clamp welded to main body on left side.

2.12 All the screws and washers shall be properly zinc plated. 2.13 The tolerance permissible on the overall dimensions and weight of the MCB

shall be (+/-) 2%. 2.14 Provision for fixing of Communication port (9-pin ‘D’ Connector) shall be

provided on the side wall of the box. A window of the size suitable for

Communication port shall be provided on the side wall such that

communication port is fixed from inside of the side wall in vertical direction

with two suitable screws and nuts. Window shall be located approximately

50mm from back side and 150mm from top side of the box. Communication

port shall be covered with a Sealing arrangement from outside of the box.

Sealing arrangement shall be fixed with two sealing screws of M4 threads to

cover the communication port. Head of sealing screw shall have hole of

2.5mm for sealing wire. Suitable rubber packing shall be provided between

the sealing arrangement and box wall in order to avoid any ingress of water.

Any access to communication port shall only be after the removal of sealing

arrangement.

2.15 Push button arrangement shall be provided on the reading window glass of

the MCB. Location of push button arrangement shall be approximately 75mm

vertically downwards from top of the box and 43mm off centre from the

centre line of the box towards sealing segment side of the box. Push button

of 9

arrangement shall be suitable to press the push buttons of the meter 65mm

below the glass level.

3 DEGREE OF PROTECTION:

The MCB shall comply with the requirement of IP-53 & its latest version.

The MCB shall be fully type tested as per IP-53 & its latest version. All

the type tests shall be carried out from the Govt approved laboratory

which are accredited by the National Board of testing and calibration

laboratories (NABL) of Govt of India. The type test reports shall be

furnished along with the bid, failing which the tender shall not be

entertained and liable to be rejected. The type test report shall not be older

than 3 years on the date of opening of Tender part-I.

4 DRAWING/SAMPLES

One complete set of detailed dimensioned drawings of each offered item

shall be submitted along with tender. Enclosed drawings are only for

general arrangement purpose. One sample of MCB as per specifications

shall be submitted along with tender and any tender not accompanied with

the sample shall be rejected out rightly. The samples being furnished shall

be new.

5 MARKINGS:

DHBVN/ UHBVN insignia shall be embossed on the MCB. The word

‘DHBVN’/ ‘UHBVN’ shall be embossed on the Meter Cup Board. A notice

with wording that ‘ There should be no cable joints inside the cabinet’

should be printed in Red on the pocket of the meter cupboard. A notice in

Hindi with wording that DHBVN/UHBVN should also be got printed on the

cover of the meter cup Board.

6 INSPECTION:

The manufacturer shall give minimum 15 days advance notice about

readiness of material at his works. The material shall be inspected for

conformity with Nigam specification before the same is accepted and

dispatched. Nigam may also carry out stage inspection of the MCBs

before powder coating. For this the manufacturer shall intimate the

manufacturing schedule in advance.

The manufacturer shall be responsible to pay penalty of Rs

20,000/- for each occasion at which the fake inspection call has been made

of 9

or the material is rejected during testing/inspection by the authorized

agency/representative of the Nigam. This penalty would be in addition to the

expenses incurred by the Nigam in deputing the Inspecting Officer,

carrying out such inspection.

7 PACKING :

The MCB shall be suitably packed in 3 ply corrugated boxes in order to

avoid damage in transit, handling, storage and further transportation from

store to field.

8. CHALLENGE CLAUSE:

The material offered/received after the inspection by the authorized Inspecting

Officer may again be subjected to the test for loses or any other parameters

from any testing house/in house technique of the Nigam and the results if

found deviating/unacceptable or non-complying to approved GTPs the bidder

shall arrange to supply the replacement within 30 days of such detection at

his cost including to & fro transportation. In addition , penalty @10% of cost

of the inspected lot of material shall be imposed.










Specification No. CSC-XXXXII/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010

TECHNICAL SPECIFICAITON

FOR

Meter Cup Board (MCB) for outside usage

for Single Phase Energy Meters

Issue of month:

Common Specification Committee UHBVN & DHBVN.

Page 1 of 10

of 10

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION IN RESPECT OF METER CUPBOARD (MCB) FOR SINGLE PHASE ENERGY METERS

1. SCOPE

This specification covers the design, manufacture, inspection, testing and supply of MS sheet. Meter Cup Board (MCBs) for housing single phase energy meters for electric connections of General category i.e. Domestic & Commercial connections.

1.1 SERVICE CONDITIONS

The Metal Meter Boxes to be supplied against this specification shall be suitable for satisfactory continuous operation under the following climatic conditions:





320C







2. CONSTRUCTIONAL AND TECHNICAL PARTICULARS: 2.1 The MCBs shall conform to drawing attached as per Annexure-I to IV. It shall

be dust and vermin proof for housing single phase energy meters of any

make. The internal dimensions of MCB shall be 300mm x 250mm x 160

mm (i.e. height x width x depth).

2.2 The MCB shall be made from 20 SWG MS sheet by the following method:

Deep Drawn Method:

The base and cover of the MCB shall be individually in one piece without

any welding except for fixing of the accessories like hinges, clamps, handle

etc. which shall be spot welded. The cover of MCB shall be fixed on two

tamper proof inside hinges not visible from outside. The hinge pin

diameter should be minimum 3mm; Hinges shall be made from min.

1.6mm MS sheet. The door of MCB shall open from right to left by

minimum 90˚.The collar of the door(cover) in closed position shall rest on

of 10

the collar of the body (base) of MCB. The collar of the door shall overlap the

collar of the body of MCB by minimum 8mm. The collar of the body shall be

provided with good quality rubber gasket lining of min. 3mm thickness.

Thickness of rubber lining shall be such that it provides proper sealing

between the cover & base of MCB to avoid penetration of dust and ingress of

water. Rubber lining should be fixed with suitable adhesive so that the same

does not get removed by itself on opening of the door. Two No. sealing

screws with rubber washer shall be provided to seal & hold the door and

body of MCB. Head of sealing screws should have hole of 3mm. The fixing

arrangement of the sealing screws shall consist of 1.6mm thick strip (L-

shaped) welded from inner side of the body & another strip having L-shaped

end with 3 mm hole welded from inner side of door of the MCB. The length of

the extended portion of the strips shall be such that the sealing screws in

tightened position are at a distance of about 5 mm from end of the collar of

the cover. The sealing strips shall have additional hole of 5.5mm for riveting

the cover and base of MCB. All the holes shall be properly aligned.

2.3 All the steel sections used in fabrication shall be carefully leveled

and straightened before any works is done on them. No rough edges

shall be permitted anywhere through out the work. The material of MCB

shall be capable to withstand mechanical, electrical and thermal stresses as

well as the effects of humidity, which are likely to be encountered during its

service. All the spot welding work shall be done carefully so as to avoid

over heated spots, cavities, porosity burns and dents etc. The surface should

be properly cleaned before welding and slag removed after welding.

2.4 A viewing window opening of the size 100x90 mm as indicated in the

drawing shall be provided about 40mm below top edge of MCB to

facilitate taking of meter readings. Viewing window shall be provided with

toughened glass of 5mm thickness. Glass shall have scratch proof

“DHBVN/ UHBVN” logo on the right side top corner of the glass. This glass

shall be fixed from inside of the cover of MCB, with single piece drawn

metal frame (Glass Holder) made of 20 SWG MS sheet fixed with min. four

screws. Glass holder shall have rectangular cuttings as per details shown

in Annexure-III. The size of toughened glass shall be 120mm x110 mm so

as to provide minimum overlap of 10mm. This glass has to be fitted with a

of 10

wrap around single piece rubber ring without joint having minimum depth of

8mm made from good quality rubber so as to with stand weather effect. 2.5 A handle of minimum 60mm length and 10mm width and 20 SWG

sheet thickness should be provided for opening and closing of the cover at

the place as shown in the drawing.

2.6 The mounting arrangement of the meter shall be as shown in the Annexure-

II. It should be raised from the base of MCB body by 35mm

(minimum). The mounting arrangement shall have 3mm thick

adjustable slotted strip of Phenolic Laminated Sheet ( Bakelite) fixed with

screws on the mounting arrangement. Adjustable slotted flat shall be

provided with two MS screws (M4 x 25mm length) with nuts .And one screw

( M4 x 12mm length)shall be provided at upper point with Phenolic Laminated

Strip for meter hanger.

2.7 Sealing arrangement as shown in drawing with a sealing screw of 5.0

mm diameter shall be provided for sealing of MCB .Head and Body of

sealing screw shall have a hole suitable for sealing wire.

2.8 Four Nos. fixing holes of 6.5 mm diameter at the back surface of MCB

shall be provided to fix the MCB at flat wall or surface. For fixing of MCB

on flat wall, 4 Nos. 5mm diameter 40mm long pan head self taping screws

and washers shall be provided by the supplier with every MCB. 4 Nos.

plastic fixing plugs of 50mm length suitable for self-tapping screws shall also

be provided. Alternately, for fixing of MCB on poles, suitable 4 No. zinc plated

clamps shall also be provided with each box. Clamps shall have adjustable

slotted arrangement for adjustment of variation in pole sizes. Clamps shall be

provided with 4 Nos. M6 bolts and nuts for fixing of MCB with clamps.

Suitable nuts, bolts and washers shall also be provided for fixing of clamps on

the poles, Clamps, nuts & bolts shall be properly galvanized..

2.9 2 Nos. holes with superior quality plastic / rubber cable glands of internal

diameter of 15mm each for incoming and outgoing cables shall be provided

at the bottom of the MCB. Glands shall be properly fixed on the box

such that the same does not get removed from the box. Glands shall be

of 10

made such that internal diameter of glands provided for cables should be

closed with the film of not less than 1mm thickness. Cable will go through

the glands by piercing the film of the glands.

2.10 MCB shall be adequately protected against rust, dust water and corrosion

both from inside and outside. The MCB shall have smoke grey shade on

outside and white on inside. The MCB shall be powder coated.

Powder Coating: The surface of the MCB shall be properly pre-

treated and cleaned in 7 tank process (degreasing, water rinsing, de-rusting,

water rinsing, phosphating, water rinsing, passivation) and shall be applied

with a powder coating of suitable thickness on outer side and inside the box.

2.11 Earthing bolt of diameter 6 mm with nut and washer shall be provided in

the threads of L-shape clamp welded to main body on left side.

2.12 All the screws and washers shall be properly galvanized. 2.13 The tolerance permissible on the overall dimensions and weight of the MCB

shall be (+/-) 2%.

2.14 Provision for fixing of Communication port (9-pin ‘D’ Connector) shall be

provided on the front wall of the box. A window of the size suitable for

Communication port shall be provided on the right side wall of lower portion

such that communication port is fixed from inside of the front wall in vertical

direction with two suitable screws and nuts. Communication port Window shall

be located approximately 50 mm upward from bottom side and 50 mm from

right side of the box. Communication port shall be covered with a Sealing

arrangement from outside of the box. Sealing arrangement shall be fixed with

two sealing screws of M4 threads to cover the communication port. Head of

sealing screw shall have hole of 2.5mm for sealing wire. Suitable rubber

packing shall be provided between the sealing arrangement and box wall in

order to avoid any ingress of water. Any access to communication port shall

only be after the removal of sealing arrangement.

of 10

2.15 Push button arrangement shall be provided on the reading window glass of the

MCB. Location of push button arrangement shall be approximately 70mm

vertically downwards from top of the box and 35mm off centre from the centre

line of the box towards sealing segment side of the box. Push button

arrangement shall be suitable to press the push buttons of the meter 65mm

below the glass level.

3. DEGREE OF PROTECTION:

The MCB (including arrangement of push fit type button and sealing

arrangement for optical port mentioned in Clause No. 2.15 & 2.16) shall

comply with the requirement of IP-53 & its latest version. The MCB shall be

fully type tested as per IP-53 & its latest version. All the type test shall be

carried out from the Govt. approved laboratory which are accredited by the

National Board of testing and calibration laboratories (NABL) of Govt. of India.

The type test report shall be furnished along with the bid, failing which the

tender shall not be entertained and liable to be rejected. The type test report

shall not be older than 3 years on the date of opening of Tender.

4. DRAWING/SAMPLES

One complete set of detailed dimensioned drawings of each offered item shall

be submitted along with tender. Enclosed drawings are only for general

arrangement purpose.

5. MARKING:

DHBVN/ UHBVN insignia as shown in Annexure-IV shall be embossed on

the MCB. The word ‘DHBVN’/ ‘UHBVN’ shall be embossed on the Meter Cup

Board. A notice with wording that ‘ There should be no cable joints

inside the cabinet’ should be printed in Red on the pocket of the

meter cup Board. A notice in Hindi with wording that should also be

got printed on the cover of the meter cup Board. 6. INSPECTION:

The manufacturer shall give minimum 20 days advance notice about

readiness of material at his works. The material shall be inspected for

conformity with DHBVN/UHBVN specification before the same is accepted

and dispatched. DHBVN/UHBVN may also carry out stage inspection of the

MCBs before powder coating. For this the manufacturer shall intimate the

manufacturing schedule in advance.

of 10

The manufacturer shall be responsible to pay penalty of Rs 20,000/- for each

occasion at which the fake inspection call has been made or the material is

rejected during testing/inspection by the authorized agency/representative of

the Nigam. This penalty would be in addition to the expenses incurred by

the Nigam in deputing the Inspecting Officer, carrying out such inspection.

7. PACKING :

The MCB shall be suitably packed in 3 ply corrugated boxes in order to

avoid damage in transit, handling, storage and further transportation from

store to field.

8. CHALLENGE CLAUSE:

The material offered/received after the inspection by the authorized Inspecting

Officer may again be subjected to the test for loses or any other parameters

from any testing house/in house technique of the Nigam and the results if

found deviating/unacceptable or non-complying to approved GTPs the bidder

shall arrange to supply the replacement within 30 days of such detection at

his cost including to & fro transportation. In addition , penalty @10% of cost

of the inspected lot of material shall be imposed.









of 10

ANNEXURE-IV

D H B V N / U H B V N

DHBVN / UHBVN INSIGNIA TO BE

EMBOSSED ON THE DOOR OF MCB


Specification No. CSC- XXXI/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010


FOR

FOUR CORE AND TWO CORE XLPE CABLES of Various SIZES 16mm2

Page 1 of 16

, 10mm2 & 6mm2

INSULATED & XLPE SHEATHED ARMORED LT

CABLES

Issue of the Month: Common Specifications Committee UHBVN & DHBVN

of 16

TECHINCAL SPECIFICATION FOR FOUR CORE AND TWO CORE XLPE INSULATED & XLPE SHEATHED ARMORED CABLES. 1. SCOPE

This section provides for manufacture, testing before dispatch, supply

and delivery F.O.R. destination of Four Core & Twin Core size

16mm2, 10mm2 & 6mm2 XLPE insulated and XLPE Sheathed Armored

circular LT cables with aluminum conductor suitable for working voltage

up to & including 1100 Volts ISI Marked & Conforming to IS 7098

(Pt-I)/1988 with latest amendments.

2. STANDARDS Unless otherwise stipulated in this specification the following

standards with latest amendments shall be applicable.

2.1 IS: 7098(Pt-I)/1988 XLPE Insulated (Heavy Duty) Electric cable for Voltages up to and including 1100 Volts working

2.2 IS: 8130/1984 Conductors for insulated cables.

2.3 IS: 5831/1984

XLPE insulation and sheath of electric cables.

2.4 IS: 10810/1984

Method of test for cables.

2.5 IS: 3975/1979 Galvanized Steel Wire/Strips.

2.6 IS: 10418/1982 Drums for electric cables.

3. CLIMATINC CONDITIONS:

3.1. Max. ambient air temperature 600C

3.2. Min. ambient air temperature (-)50C

3.3. Average Daily max. ambient temperature 400C

3.4. Max. yearly weighted average ambient temperature

320C

3.5. Max. altitude above mean sea level (Meters) 1000

3.6. Minimum Relative Humidity (%age) 26

3.7. Max. Relative Humidity (%age) 95

3.8. Avg. No. of Rainy days/year 120

3.9. Avg. annual rainfall 900 mm

3.10. Maximum wind pressure 195 Kg./m Sq.

Note: Moderately hot & humid tropical climate conductive to rust & fungus

growth. The climatic conditions are also prone to wide variations in

ambient conditions. Smoke is also present in the atmosphere Heavy

lightning also occurs during June to October.

of 16

4. GENERAL REQUIRMENT: 4.1 The ISI marked XLPE Insulated Armored cables shall conform to IS:

7098(Pt-I)/1988 with latest amendment and bear BIS certification mark.

The material used for construction of the cables shall be of best

quality complying with the requirement of IS: 7098(Pt-I)/1988 and

other relevant standards. The cables shall be suitable for

outdoor/indoor installation free in air and shall be capable of

withstanding the normal stresses associated with transportation,

erection, reeling and unreeling operations without getting deformed.

4.2 The cable shall be suitable for use where combination of ambient

temperature and temperature rise due to load results in a conductor

temperature not exceeding 90 degree C under normal operation and 250

degree C under short circuit condition.

4.3 The XLPE Insulated Armored LT Cable shall be ISI marked. The

tenderer (MANUFACTURER) must furnish valid ISI certificate along with

offer.

5. MATERIAL:

5.1 CONDUCTOR

The conductor shall be composed of aluminum wire complying with

IS: 8130/1984 with latest amendments.

5.2 INSULATION

Insulation shall be cross linked Polyethylene (XLPE) conforming to the

requirements Table-I of IS: 7098/1984 with latest amendments.

5.3 FILLERS

5.3.1 The central hole/void, if any, of the cable shall be invariably filled

with suitable filler material so that there is no gap in the center.

5.3.2 The filler shall be of vulcanized rubber, un-vulcanized rubber or

Thermoplastic material and shall be provided to fill the gaps between

cores.

5.3.3 The filler material shall be so chosen so as to be compatible with

temperature of the cable and shall have no deleterious effect on other

components of the cable. These shall not be harder than XLPE and PVC

used for insulation and outer sheath respectively.

5.4. ARMOURING

Armoring shall be of galvanized round steel wires for cable size 6 Sq.

of 16

mm whereas Armoring shall be of galvanized steel strips for cable sizes

above 6 Sq. mm.

5.5 OUTER SHEATH

The outer sheath shall consist of type ST-2 XLPE Compound conforming

to the requirements of IS: 5831/1984.

6. CONSTRUCTION:

6.1 CONDUCTOR

The construction of the conductor shall be stranded for cable size 6 Sq.

mm and above, as per Clause No. 8.1 of IS:7098(Pt-I)/1988 &

relevant clause of IS:8130/1984.

A protective barrier may be applied between the conductor and

insulation. Such barriers when used shall be compatible with insulating

material and suitable for the operating temperature of the cable.

6.2 INSULATION :

The conductor (with protective barrier, wherever applied) shall be

provided with Cross-Linked Polyethylene (XLPE) insulation applied by

extrusion. The insulation shall be so applied that it fits closely on the

conductor and it shall be possible to remove it without damage to the

conductor. The thickness and tolerance on thickness of insulation shall

be as per clause No. 9.2 of IS: 7098 (Pt- I)/1988.

6.3 CORE IDENTIFICATION:

The core shall be identified by different coloring of XLPE insulation as

per Clause No. 10.1 of IS: 7098 (Pt-I)/ 1988.

6.4 LAYING UP OF CORES :

The cores shall be laid up together with the suitable right hand lay. The

interstices shall be filled with non-hygroscopic material.

6.5 INNER SHEATH (COMMON COVERING):

6.5.1 The laid up cores shall be provided with an inner sheath applied either

by extrusion or by wrapping. It shall be ensured that it is as circular as

possible. The thickness of inner sheath shall be as given in Table-5 of IS:

7098(Pt-I)/1988.

6.5.2 The inner sheath shall be so applied that it fits closely on the laid up

cores and it shall be possible to remove it without damage to the

insulation.

of 16

6.6 ARMORING:

6.6.1 Application:

Armoring shall be applied over the inner sheath. The armor wires/strips

shall be applied as closely as possible.

The direction of lay of armor shall be left hand. A Binder Tape may be

provided on the armor.

6.6.2 Type of Armor & Dimension:

The armor shall consist of galvanized round steel wires for cable size 4

Sq. mm & 6 Sq. mm whereas it shall be galvanized steel strips for

cable size above 6 Sq. mm with the dimensions as specified in Table

- 6 of IS:7098(Pt-I)/1988.

6.6.3 Joints:

The joints in the armor wire / strips shall be made by brazing or welding

and the surface irregularities shall be removed. A joint in any wire /

strips shall be at least 300 mm from the nearest joint in any other armor /

wire in the completed cable.

6.7 OUTER SHEATH

6.7.1. The outer sheath shall be applied over the armouring.

6.7.2. The color of the outer sheath shall be black.

6.7.3. The minimum thickness of XLPE outer sheath shall not fall below the

thickness specified in Table -8 of IS: 7098 (Pt-I) /1988.

7. TESTS AND TEST CERTIFICATS:

7.1 The cable should meet the requirement of all tests including optional

tests as specified at Clause No. 15.4 of IS: 7098 (Pt. I) / 1988.

7.1.1 The following shall constitute routine tests:

7.1.1.1 Conductor resistance test.

7.1.1.2 High Voltage test.

7.1.2 The following shall constitute Acceptance Tests:

7.1.2.1 Tensile test (for Aluminum).

7.1.2.2 Wrapping test (for Aluminum).

7.1.2.3 Conductor resistance test.

7.1.2.4 Test for thickness of Insulation & Sheath.

7.1.2.5 Tensile strength & elongation at break of Insulation & sheath.

7.1.2.6 Insulation resistance (Volume Resistivity) test.

7.1.2.7 High Voltage test.

7.1.2.8 Hot Set Test for Insulation.

of 16

7.1.2.9 Cold Bend Test for outer sheath.

7.1.2.10 Cold Impact Test for outer sheath.

7.1.3 The following shall constitute Type Tests:

7.1.3.1 Tests of Conductor

7.1.3.1.1 Tensile test (for aluminum)

7.1.3.1.2 Wrapping test (for aluminum)

7.1.3.1.3 Conductor resistance test.

7.1.3.2 Test for Armoring Wires/ Strips

7.1.3.3 Test for thickness of insulation and sheath

7.1.4 Physical tests for insulation:

7.1.4.1 Tensile strength and elongation at7.1.4.2 Ageing in air oven. 7.1.4.3 Hot Set test. 7.1.4.4 Shrinkage Test. 7.1.4.5 Water Absorption (Gravimetric).

7.1.5 Physical tests for Outer Sheath:

7.1.5.1 Tensile strength and elongation at break.

7.1.5.2 Ageing in air oven.

7.1.5.3 Loss of mass in air oven.

7.1.5.4 Shrinkage Test.

7.1.5.5 Hot Deformation Test.

7.1.5.6 Heat shock Test.

7.1.5.7 Thermal Stability.

7.1.6 Insulation resistance (Volume Resistivity Test)

7.1.7 High voltage test.

7.1.8 Flammability test.

7.2 The tenderer shall furnish latest complete type tests and optional test

certificates as specified in Clause No. 15.4 of IS: 7098(Pt-I)/1988 (not

older than three years as on the date of tender opening) for all sizes of

offered LT XLPE ARMORED CABLES from NABL accredited testing

laboratory with the tender offer otherwise their offer is likely to be ignored.

7.3 The tenderer must also clearly indicate various testing facilities available

at their works for testing the material as per relevant standards. In case

of otherwise, particulars of the place where such testing is proposed to

be conducted during the course of inspection, shall be indicated with

the offer.

of 16

8 INSPECTION:

8.1 The inspection may be carried out by the purchaser at any stage of

manufacture. The successful tenderer shall grant free access to the

purchaser’s representatives at a reasonable time when the work is in

progress. Inspection and acceptance of any equipment / material under

this specification by the purchaser shall not relieve the supplier of

his obligation of furnishing equipment in accordance with the

specification and shall not prevent subsequent rejection if the

equipment/material is found to be defective.

8.2 The supplier shall keep the purchaser informed in advance about the

manufacturing program so that arrangement can be made for inspection.

8.3 The acceptance tests as per IS: 7098(Pt-I)/1988 shall also be conducted

by the manufacturer before dispatch in the presence of purchaser’s

Representative / Inspecting Officer as per relevant clause of “General

Conditions of Contract” along with verification of lengths & weight and

checking the manufacturing defects, if any of samples coils .The mass

of aluminum, XLPE, PVC & Filler in sample coils shall also be verified

by the Inspecting Officer(s).

Cold bend/ cold impact test (IS: 5831/ 1984) shall constitute the

optional tests and shall be conducted on each offered lot of the

cables of each size as per Clause No. 15.4 of IS: 7098(Pt- I)/1988.

8.4 TYPE TESTS:

The first lot offered shall not be less than 10% of ordered quantity of

each size of LT XLPE ARMORED CABLE.

One sample from the 1st Lot of LT XLPE ARMORED Cable of each

size as received in purchaser’s store shall be selected and sealed by

the inspecting officer nominated by purchaser’s for getting it type tested

at any NABL accredited testing laboratory. The charges incurred

towards type test of the material received in our stores shall be borne

by Supplier.

In case sample from first lot fails then:

8.4.1 Supplier shall have to replace the full quantity of the respective

inspected lot supplied to various stores and lying unused at stores.

8.4.2 For the quantity already utilized against the order in field a deduction

@ 15% (Fifteen Percent) of F.O.R. Destination prices of the material

supplied shall be made.

of 16

8.4.3 Sample from next lot shall be selected again for type test. All test

charges incurred towards type test of the material for second time shall be

borne by the Supplier. In case sample again fails in the type test then

further supplies shall not be accepted.

8.5 The purchaser reserves the right to insist for witnessing the acceptance

/routine tests of the bought out items.

8.6 At least 5% of total numbers of drums subject to minimum of 2 in each

lot put up for inspection shall be selected at random to ascertain the

length/workmanship of cable by the following method:

At the work of the manufacture, the cable shall be transferred from

one drum to another for checking any manufacturing defects in the

cable drum selected for conducting acceptance tests, at the same time

measuring its length with the help of pulley & cyclometer graduated

in presence of inspector. The difference in the measured length thus

obtained from the declared length by the supplier in the packing list

shall be applied to all the drums if the cable is found short during checking

the sample lot (s).

8.7 The supplier shall present the latest Calibration Certificate(s) of testing

instruments/equipments to be used for the testing of the material

covered in the Purchase Order to the authorized inspecting officer

/inspecting agency of the purchaser. The testing instruments / meters

/apparatus etc. should be got calibrated by the supplier from time to time

from an independent testing laboratory / house having valid

accreditation from National Accreditation Board for testing and

calibrating laboratories for the testing equipment or from original

manufacturers having trace ability to NABL /NPL. The calibration

certificate(s) should not in any case be older than one year at the time

of presenting the same to the inspecting officer / inspecting agency of

the purchaser. The testing instruments / equipment should be duly

sealed by the Calibrating Agency and mention thereof shallbe indicated in

the calibration certificate(s).

8.8 TEST CHECKING OF MATERIAL AT STORES:

8.8.1 SAMPLING:

8.8.1.1 One number out of each lot / sub-lot of 25 Nos. drums or pert

thereof for cables of size 50 Sq. mm. and above.

of 16

8.8.2 TESTS:

The following tests shall be carried out:

8.8.2.1 Measurement of Resistance of conductor.

8.8.2.2 Tensile & Elongation test for insulation.

8.8.2.3 Thickness of Insulation.

8.8.3 CRITERIA FOR ACCEPTANCE:

8.8.3.1 If the measured conductor resistance of the sample(s) exceeds

beyond 2% as per the resistance specified in the contract, the

material shall be rejected and the same shall have to be replaced by

the supplier.

8.8.3.2 If the measured conductor resistance of the sample(s) exceeds

the value specified in the contract but does not exceed by more

than 2% of the resistance value specified in the contract, the

material pertaining to the relevant lot/ sub-lot to shall be accepted

with a deduction @ 1.5% of the cost of cable for increase in resistance

for every 1% or part thereof.

8.8.3.3 If the sample(s) fails in any other test, the material contained in the

pertinent lot/sub-lot shall be rejected and shall have to be replaced by

the supplier.

8.9 TEST CHARGES:

All test charges incurred towards test checking of the material received in

our stores shall be borne by the NIGAM.

8.10 The manufacturer shall be responsible to pay penalty of Rs 20,000/-

for each occasion at which the fake inspection call has been made or

the material is rejected during testing/inspection by the authorized

agency/representative of the Nigam. This penalty would be in addition

to the expenses incurred by the Nigam in deputing the Inspecting

Officer, carrying out such inspection.

9. IDENTIFACTION:

9.1 The manufacture shall be identified through-out the length of cables as

per Clause No. 17.1 of IS: 7098(Pt-1)/1988.

9.2 In order to distinguish these electric cables from telephone cables, the

word ELECTRIC shall be indicated, printed or embossed throughout the

length of the cable on outer sheath.

of 16

9.3 The cable code shall be provided as per Clause No. 17.3 of IS: 7098 (Pt-

I)/1988.

9.4 The cable shall also be required to be embossed with the word Name of

Manufacture or trade name, Cable code, Voltage Grade, DHBVN, size of

cable, year of manufacture and ISI certification mark at every meter

length for which no extra charges shall be paid.

10 PACKING AND MARKING:

10.1 The cables shall be wound on non-returnable wooden drums

conforming to IS: 10418/1982 of suitable size and packed. The ends of

the cable shall be sealed by means of non-hygroscopic sealing material.

Only one cable length shall be supplied on a drum.

10.2 The cable shall carry the following information stenciled /painted on the

drum:

10.2.1 Manufacturer‘s name, Brand name or trade mark.

10.2.2 Type of cable and voltage grade.

10.2.3 Number of Cores.

10.2.4 Nominal Cross-sectional area of the conductor.

10.2.5 Cable Code.

10.2.6 Length of cable on the drum.

10.2.7 Approximate gross weight.

10.2.8 Year of manufacture.

10.2.9 BIS Certification marks.

10.2.10 Name of the Consignee and full destination.

10.2.11 Tender number/Purchase Order No.

10.2.12 The word SUITABLE FOR OUTDOOR USE & LOW TEMPERATURE

CONDITIONS.

11. STANDARD LENGTH:

11.1 The cables shall be supplied in the standard length of 500 Metre for,

4CX16 Sq mm2, and 1000 Metre for size 4CX10Sq. mm2, 2CX16Sq.

mm,2 2CX10 Sq. mm2, 4CX6 Sq. mm2 & 2C X 6 mm2.

11.2 A tolerance (+/-) 5 % shall be allowed in standard length.

11.3 Only one cable length shall be acceptable by non-standard length

measuring not less than 50% of standard length to complete the ordered

quantity in each size.

of 16

12 QUANTITY:

The quantities as mentioned in the Schedule of requirement are

tentative & these may increase/decrease as per the requirement of the

Nigam.

13 QUANTITY TOLERANCE:

The quantity tolerance of (+/-)2% shall be allowed in each size for

completion of supply.

14. GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS:

The tenderer shall furnish guaranteed technical particulars in the relevant

schedule.( Annexure– I & II)

15. CONSTRUCTIONAL DRAWINGS:

The tenderer is required to furnish the detailed constructional drawing

of the cable clearly showing shape of core, type and size of fillers/

interstices along with centre filler etc. In absence of this the tender is

likely to be ignored.



inspecting officer may again be subjected to the test for or any parameter

from any testing house/in-house technique of the Nigam & the results if

found deviating un-acceptable or not complying to approved GTPs the

bidder shall arrange to supply the replacement within thirty (30) days of

such detection at his cost including to & fro transportation. In addition ,

penalty @10% of cost of the inspected lot of material shall be imposed.



transportation or insurance cost to the purchaser, up to destination, the

whole or any part to the material which in normal and proper use proves

the defective in quality or workmanship, subject to the condition that the

defect is noticed within 18 months from the date of receipt of material in

stores or 12 months from the date of commissioning whichever period

may expire earlier. The consignee or nay other officer of Nigam actually

using the material will give prompt notice of each such defect to the

supplier. The replacement shall be effected by the supplier within a

reasonable time, but not, in any case, exceeding 45 days/ The supplier

shall, also, arrange to remove the defective within a reasonable period,

of 16

but not exceeding 45 days from the date of issue of notice in respect

thereof, failing which, the purchaser reserve the right to dispose of

defective material in any manner considered fit by him (purchaser), at the

sole risk and cost of the supplier. Any sale proceeds of the defective

material after meeting the expenses incurred on its custody, disposal

handling etc., shall however be credited to the supplier’s account and set

off against any outstanding dues of the purchaser against the supplier.

The warranty for 12/18 months shall be one time.

The specification no. CSC-XI/ DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010 be hereby

considered withdrawn.









of 16

ANNEXURE-III GUARANTEED TECHNICAL AND OTHER PARTICULARS FOR THE SUPPLY OF 4 CORE LT XLPE ARMOURED CABLES.

4 CORE XLPE ARMOURND CABLES IN S. No

PARTICULARS 4CX16 4CX10 4CX6

1 Manufacturer’s name and works address. 2 Standard specification to which the

material shall

3 VOLTAGE GRADE. 4 NO. OF CORES. 5 CONDUCTOR DETAILS:

Normal cross section area of : 1 Phase Conductor (Sq.mm)

A

2 Neutral Conductor (Sq.mm) No. and size of strands (in mm)of: 1 Phase Conductor (Sq.mm)

B

2 Neutral Conductor(Sq.mm) C SHAPE OF CONDUCTOR D Whether compacted or non compacted E Resistance at 27 0c

1 Phase Conductor ohm/km

2 Neutral Conductor ohm/km INSULATION 1 Type 2 Colour 3 Thickness A Phase Conductor (sq.mm)

1 Nominal (mm) 2 Minimum (mm)

B Neutral Conductor (Sq.mm) 1 Nominal (mm)

6

2 Minimum (mm)

7 Type of inner sheathing and colour 8 Whether Binder Tape provided 9 Armoring

A Type B Dimension (mm)

10 Outer Sheath A Material B Thickness

1 Nominal (mm) 2 Minimum (mm)

C Standard to which it Confirm A Type and size of filler used 11 B MIN. WT. OF FILLER IN KG./KM

12 MAX. OVERALL DIAMETER OF THE CABLE IN MM.

13 Nature of Packing. 14 DRUM

A TARE WEIGHT OF DRUM B WHETHER DRUM IS WHELL C STANDARD SPECIFICATION TO

WHICH

D DRUM DETAILS & DIMENSIONS

E Whether 2-Full Ply Flange Construction or 2-Full Ply plus 1 Segmental layer Flange Construction.

1 Drum size A Flange Diameter (d1) (mm) B Barrel Diameter (d2) (mm) C Centre hole Diameter (d3) (mm) D Overall with (L1) (mm)

F Travers (L2) (mm)

of 16

G Thickness of Flange H Barrel End (Supporting disc or

1 Diameter (mm) 2 Thickness (mm)

I Stretchers (core carrier Planks ) 1 Number (Min) 2 Thickness x width (mm)

J Barrel Battens thickness (core K Barrel Middle Supports (Middle L Thickness of External Lagging. 2 DETAILS OF METAL

A Clamping Studs with 1 Numbers 2 Diameter (mm)

B Square or Round Washers 1 Numbers 2 Diameter (mm)

C M.S. Bushes 1 Numbers 2 Thickness of Sleeve (mm) 3 Dimension of Sleeve (mm 4 Number of Bolts

5 Diameters of Bolts D M.S. /C.I. Centre Plate

1 Numbers 2 Diameter of Bolts (mm) 3 Centre Plate Bolts.

A Numbers

B Diameter of Bolts (mm)

E Centre Hole Diameter (mm) F Minimum Weight in kg/km

1 Aluminum 2 XLPE

3 PVC G Standard Length of cable in

metre & its Tolerance

H Whether material bears BISCertification

I BIS License no. & validity. J Embossing.

K Any other particulars.

of 16

ANNEXURE-III

GURANTEED TECHNICAL AND OTHER PRTICULARS FOR THE SUPPLY OF 2 CORE LT XLPE ARMOURED CABLES.

2CORE XLPE ARMOURND CABLES IN SQ MM

S. No

PARTICULARS 2Cx16 mm2 2Cx10 mm2 2Cx6 mm2

1 Manufacture’s name and works address 2 Standard specification to which the material shall confirm. 3 VOLTAGE GRADE 4 NO. OF CORES 5 CONDUCTOR DETAILS:

A Nominal cross section area of : 1 Phase Conductor (Sq.mm) 2 Neutral Conductor (Sq.mm)

B No. and size of strands (in mm)of: 1 Phase Conductor (sq.mm) 2 Neutral Conductor (Sq.mm)

C SHAPE OF CONDUCTOR D Whether compacted or non compacted E Resistance at 27 0C

1 Phase Conductor ohm/km

2 Neutral Conductor ohm/km

INSULATION A Type B Colour C Thickness

Phase Conductor (sq.mm) 1.1 Nominal (mm)

1

1.2 Minimum (mm) Neutral Conductor (sq.mm) 2.1 Nominal (mm)

6

2

2.2 Minimum (mm) 7 Type of inner sheathing and colour 8 Whether Binder Tape provided

Armoring A Type

9

B Dimension (mm) Outer Sheath A Material

Thickness 1 Nominal (mm)

B

2 Minimum (mm)

10

C Standard to which it Confirm A Type and size or filler used 11 B MIN. WT. OF FILLER IN KG./KM.

12 MAX. OVERALL DIAMETER OF THE CABLE IN MM.

13 Nature of Packing 14 DRUM

A TARE WEIGHT OF DRUM B WHETHER DRUM IS WHEEL MOUNTED.

C STANDARD SPECIFICATION TO WHICH DRUM

D DRUM DETAILS 8 DIMENSIONS

E Whether 2-Full Ply Flange Construction or 2-Full Ply plus 1 Segmental layer Flange Construction.

Drum size A Flange Diameter (d1) (mm) B Barrel Diameter (d2) (mm) C Centre hole Diameter (d3) (mm)

1

D Overall with (L1) (mm)

of 16

E Travers (L2) (mm) F Thickness of Flange

Barrel End (Supporting disc or core segment ) 1 Diameter (mm)

G

2 Thickness (mm) Stretchers (core carrier Planks ) 1 Number (Min)

H

2 Thickness X width (mm) I Barrel Battens thickness (core filler Planks) J Barrel Middle Supports (Middle core discs )

K Thickness of External Lagging. (mm) 2 DETAILS OF METAL COMPONENTS :

Clamping Studs with Hexagonal Nuts 1 Numbers

A

2 Diameter (mm) Square or Round Washers 1 Numbers

B

2 Diameter (mm) M.S. Bushes 1 Numbers 2 Thickness of Sleeve (mm) 3 Dimension of Sleeve (mm) 4 Number of Bolts

C

5 Diameters of Bolts M.S. /C.I. Centre Plate 1 Numbers 2 Dimensions of Square /Triangular equal

sides

Centre Plate Bolts. 3.1 Numbers

D

3

3.2 Diameter of Bolts (mm) E Centre Hole Diameter (mm) F Minimum Weight in Kg. /Km

1 Aluminum 2 XLPE

3 PVC G Standard Length of cable in meters & its H Whether material bears BIS Certification I BIS License no. & validity J Embossing

K Any other particulars


SECTION VII-D

DRAWINGS

bid volume -ii sec vii ted-151

Documents

scope of work

work of release

required work

tf supply order

kv lines

release of bpl connections

required material

lt lines